Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Financial Reporting W
Financial Reporting W
FINANCIAL REPORTING
om
.c
PART 2
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
CPA SECTION 3
w
w
w
STUDY TEXT
FINANCIAL REPORTING
KASNEB SYLLABUS
PAPER NO. 9 FINANCIAL REPORTING
GENERAL OBJECTIVE
This paper is intended to equip the candidate with knowledge, skills and attitudes that will enable
him/her to prepare financial statements for various entities and account for specialised transactions in
both the public and private sectors
9. 0 LEARNING OUTCOMES
A candidate who passes this paper should be able to:
Account for various assets and liabilities
Prepare financial statements including published financial statements for various types of
organisations
Account for specialised transactions
Prepare group financial statements
Apply International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) and International Public Sector
Accounting Standards (IPSASs) in preparing non-complex financial statements.
CONTENT
om
9.1 Assets and liabilities
.c
ya
en
- Assets and liabilities covered in Paper No.1: Financial Accounting still examinable (in
k
ea
the context of published financial statements)
om
- Non- current assets held for sale
.s
- Borrowing costs
w
w
- Investment property
w
- Financial instruments (presentation, recognition, classes, measurement, de-recognition and
disclosures) (excluding impairment, hedging and embedded derivatives)
- Leases (all aspects including dealers and sale and leaseback)
- Income tax (current and deferred tax but not deferred tax in the case of groups)
- Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets
9.2 Further aspects of partnerships
- Contracts with customers (revenue recognition): Hire Purchase/ Installment sales (split of
hire purchase profit into interest and gross profit and using actuarial method and sum of digits
to account for interest); sale of goods; construction contracts and real estate, provision of
services.
- Government grants
- Farming
- Insurance
- Banks
- Professional firms (lawyers and accountants)
- Independent local, dependent and foreign branches
- Co-operative societies
9.5 Published financial statements
om
excludes acquisition and disposal of subsidiaries during the year
.c
ya
- Accounting treatment of associate companies
ken
- Jointly controlled entity
ea
om
9.5 Financial statements of public sector entities
.s
w
w
(Provisions of the following IPSAS (emphasis on distinctions with equivalent IASs/IFRS)
w
- Presentation of financial statements
- Accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates and errors
- Borrowing costs
- Consolidated and separate financial statements
- Investments in associates
- Interests in joint ventures
- Events after the reporting date
- Construction contracts, leases and inventories
- Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOPIC PAGE
om
.c
ya
en
Revised on: November 2016
k
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
TOPIC 1
ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Introduction
Property, plant and equipment are tangible items that are held for use in the production or supply of
goods or services, for rental to others, or for administrative purposes; and are expected to be used
during more than one period.
IAS 16 states that the cost of an item of property, plant and equipment shall be recognized as an
asset if, and only if:
it is probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the
entity; and
The cost of the item can be measured reliably.
om
.c
ya
This recognition principle shall be applied to all costs at the time they are incurred, both incurred
en
initially to acquire or construct an item of property, plant and equipment and incurred
k
ea
subsequently after recognition to add to, replace part of or service it.
om
.s
w
Initial costs
w
w
Some items of property, plant and equipment might be necessary to acquire for safety or
environmental reasons. Although they do not directly increase the future economic benefits, they
might be inevitable to obtain future economic benefits from other assets and therefore, should be
recognized as an asset. For example, water cleaning station might be necessary in order to proceed
with some chemical processes within chemical manufacturer.
Subsequent costs
Day-to-day servicing of the item shall be recognized in profit or loss as incurred, because they just
maintain (not enhance) item’s capacity to bring future economic benefits.
However, some parts of the item of property, plant and equipment may require replacement at
regular intervals, for example, aircraft interiors. In such a case, an entity derecognizes carrying
amount of older part and recognizes the cost of new part into the carrying amount of the item. The
same applies to major inspections for faults, overhauling and similar items.
Measurement
Initial Measurement
An item of property, plant and equipment that qualifies for recognition as an asset shall be measured
at its cost.
1. its purchase price including import duties, non-refundable purchase taxes, after deducting
trade discounts and rebates
2. Any costs directly attributable to bringing the asset to the location and condition necessary
for it to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management. Examples of these
costs are: costs of site preparation, professional fees, initial delivery and handling, installation
and assembly, etc.,
3. The initial estimate of the costs of dismantling and removing the item and restoring the
site on which it is located.
The cost of an item of property, plant and equipment is the cash price equivalent at the recognition
date. If payment is deferred beyond normal credit terms, the difference between the cash price
equivalent and the total payment is recognized as interest over the period of credit (unless such
interest is capitalized in accordance with IAS 23).
om
.c
If an asset is acquired in exchange for another non-monetary asset, the cost will be measured at the
ya
en
fair value unless (a) the exchange transaction lacks commercial substance or (b) the fair value of
k
neither the asset received nor the asset given up is reliably measurable. If the acquired item is not
ea
om
measured at fair value, its cost is measured at the carrying amount of the asset given up.
.s
w
w
Subsequent Measurement
An entity may choose two accounting models for its property plant and equipment: w
1. Cost model
An entity shall carry an asset at its cost less any accumulated depreciation and any
accumulated impairment losses.
2. Revaluation model
An entity shall carry an asset at a revalued amount. Revalued amount is its fair value at the
date of the revaluation less any subsequent accumulated depreciation and subsequent
accumulated impairment losses.
An entity shall revalue its assets with sufficient regularity so that the carrying amount does not differ
materially from its fair value at the end of the reporting period. If an item of property, plant and
equipment is revalued, the entire class of property, plant and equipment to which that asset belongs
shall be revalued.
The change of asset’s carrying amount as a result of revaluation shall be treated in the
following way:
Change in
Carying Where
Amount
Other comprehensive income Profit or loss if reverses previous revaluation
Increase
(heading “Revolution surplus”) decrease of the same value
Other comprehensive income if reduces previously
Decrease Profit or loss recognized revaluation surplus (heading
“Revaluation surplus”)
Depreciation is defined as the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its
useful life. The items of property, plant and equipment are usually depreciated in order to maintain
matching principle – as they are in operation for more than 1 year, they assist in producing the
revenues in more than 1 year and therefore, their cost shall be spread among those years in order to
match the revenue they help to produce.
When dealing with the depreciation the basic things considered are:
Depreciable amount: Depreciable amount is simply HOW MUCH you are going to
om
depreciate. It is the cost of an asset, or other amount substituted for cost, less its
.c
residual value.
ya
en
Depreciation period: Depreciation period is simply HOW LONG you are going to
k
depreciate and it is basically asset’s useful life. Useful life is the period over which an asset is
ea
om
expected to be available for use by an entity; or the number of production or similar units
.s
expected to be obtained from the asset by an entity.IFRS16 lists several factors that shall be
w
w
considered when establishing item’s useful life: expected usage of the item, expected physical
w
wear and tear, technical or commercial obsolescence of the item, and legal or other limits on
the use of the asset. Useful life and asset’s residual value (input to depreciable amount) shall
be reviewed at least at the end of each financial year. If there is a change in the
expectations comparing to previous estimates, then change shall be accounted for as a change
in an accounting estimate in line with IAS 8 (no restatement of previous periods).
Depreciation method: Depreciation method is simply HOW, IN WHAT MANNER you are
going to depreciate. The depreciation method used shall reflect the pattern in which the
asset’s future economic benefits are expected to be consumed by the entity.An entity may
select from variety of depreciation methods, such as straight-line method, diminishing
balance method and the units of production methods. Selected method shall be reviewed at
least at the end of each financial year. If there is a change in the expected pattern of asset’s
usage, then the depreciation method shall be changed and be accounted for as a change in an
accounting estimate in line with IAS8 (no restatement of previous periods).Depreciation shall
be recognized in profit or loss unless it is capitalized into the carrying amount of another asset
(for example, inventories, or another item of property, plant and equipment).
Each part of an item of property, plant and equipment with a cost that is significant in relation
to the total cost of the item shall be depreciated separately. For example, aircraft interior cost
might be depreciated separately from the remaining airplane cost.
Fixed assets differ from each other in their nature so widely that the same depreciation methods
cannot be applied to each. The following methods have therefore been evolved for depreciating
various assets:
Under this method, the Depreciation is calculated on the basis of either a fixed percentage of the
original value of the asset or divides the original value of asset by the number of years of its
estimated life. Every year, the same amount is written off as Depreciation so as to reduce the asset
account to nil.
om
.c
ya
=
ken
ea
om
Diminishing Balance Method
.s
w
w
Under the diminishing Balance method, depreciation is calculated at a fixed percentage on the
w
opening balance of each year. Each year the opening balance may be decreasing in value. This
decreasing book value is commonly known as written down value of the asset. While applying the
depreciation rate both salvage or scrap value and removal costs are ignored. There are no
possibilities to reduce the book value to zero.
It gives decreasing depreciation charge year by year. For the purpose of obtaining yearly
depreciation diminishing percentages to the cost of the asset, less salvage value is applied. Under
this method, the rate of depreciation is a fraction having the sum of the digits representing the useful
life of the asset as its denominator and individual year as its numerator.
( )
Annuity Method
Under the Annuity method, the annual depreciation charges would be ascertained with the help of
Annuity table. This method gives importance to interest factor. Other methods do not take into
account the interest factor while investing the assets. Fixed interest rate is charged on the opening
balance of each year and then cost of asset together with interest thereon is written off equally over
the life of the asset.
Depreciation fund method provides an adequate financial requirement for the replacement of the
asset when the asset is replaced by a new one. Depreciation fund account is opened and the amount
of depreciation is credited to that account. The asset account stands year after year at its original
cost. At the end of each year, the amount of depreciation is debited and depreciation fund account is
credited and the corresponding amount is invested in securities of some reputed companies, for the
purpose of mobilizing funds for replacement.
Under this method, an insurance policy is taken from the insurance company for the purpose of
replacement of an asset. At the end of the definite period, the insurance company will pay the
assured sum with the help of which asset can be repurchased.
om
.c
Revaluation Method
ya
k en
This method is suitable for small and diverse items of asset such as bottles, corks, trade marks, loose
ea
tools, livestock etc. Under this method the amount of depreciation is ascertained to find the
om
difference between the book value of the asset and the real value of the asset. At the end of the year
.s
w
the difference is taken as depreciation.
w
w
Suppose on first January, 2005 the value of loose tools was Shs.1, 600 and during the year Shs.2,
000 worth of tools were purchased.
Now, if at the end of the year, the loose tools are considered to be worth only Shs.2, 400, the
depreciation comes to Shs.1, 200, i.e. Shs. 1,600 + 2,000 – 2,400
The Economic Life of the asset is estimated in terms of working hours. Hourly rate is determined by
dividing total cost of the asset by total number of hours to be operated in its life time. The annual
depreciation charge is calculated by applying this rate to the actual number of hours operated in the
particular accounting period.
Depletion Method
The Economic Life of the asset is determined by geographical survey methods in terms of total units
of resource deposits. The depletion rate per unit is calculated by dividing the total cost of the asset
by the estimated available number of units.
Under this method, first the total repair and renewal costs are determined for the whole life of the
asset and then it is added to the capital cost to get a total value. Then, this value is divided by its
estimated life. The resultant value is treated as Repair, Renewals and depreciation. It has to be
charged to the profit and loss Account each year. The corresponding Credit is given to provision for
depreciation and Repairs account.
Impairment
Here, IAS 16 refers to another standard, IAS 36 Impairment of Assets that prescribes rules for
reviewing the carrying amount of assets, determining their recoverable amount and impairment loss,
recognizing and reversing impairment loss and more.
om
IAS 16 states that compensation from third parties for items of property, plant and equipment that
.c
were impaired, lost or given up shall be included in profit or loss when the compensation becomes
ya
receivable. For example, claim for compensation of damage on insured property from insurance
ken
company is recognized to profit or loss when insurance company accepts claim, closes the case and
ea
om
agrees to compensate (or after whatever procedure is agreed in the insurance contract).
.s
w
Derecognition
w
w
IAS 16 prescribes that the carrying amount of an item of property, plant and equipment shall be
derecognized on disposal; or when no future economic benefits are expected from its use
or disposal.
The gain (not classified as revenue!) or loss arising from the derecognition of an item of property,
plant and equipment shall be included in profit or loss when the item is derecognized. The gain or
loss from the derecognition is calculated as the net disposal proceeds (usually income from sale of
item) less the carrying amount of the item.
Intangible Assets
An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance and helps your
company make money. Examples include patents, copyrights, brands and franchises trademarks etc.
The International Accounting Standards Board, or IASB, further states that intangible assets must
arise out of a legal contract or be separable so that they can be sold. An example is a novel
copyright. It has no physical presence, but it enables the owner to profit from the sale of the book.
That copyright can be sold so that the new owner can profit from future book sales. The copyright is
therefore both valuable and separable and should be recorded as an intangible asset.
The general meaning of the word intangible is ‘without physical substance’. There are some assets
that may not have physical substance, but are still a valuable resource for an entity.
They enable it to run the business and earn profits in the same manner as tangible assets do.e.g
An entity uses a machine to manufacture a patented product which is a special energy drink formula
that will accelerate bone growth without any known side-effects.
The chemicals and their combination that go into the making of this formula are ‘patented’ i.e.
registered with the patent office.
A ‘patent’ means an exclusive right over a certain design, process etc., which only the entity owning
it can exercise.
The patent is as essential an item as the machine. The patent ensures that no other company can use
a similar machine without permission. This helps the entity get a good price for its product.
As a result, the patent helps the entity generate economic benefits for the entity. Hence, although the
patent does not have any physical substance, it deserves to be recognized as an asset.
om
It is as much of an asset as the machine. This is because it meets the definition of an asset as it
.c
brings future economic benefits, is controlled by the entity and its cost is measurable.
ya
en
The only difference is that patent is an intangible asset while the machine is a tangible asset.
k
ea
om
Another example of an intangible asset is Good will.
.s
w
w
w
Goodwill
A business builds up some reputation after it has continued for some time. If the reputation is good,
it will come to acquire a fixed clientele in the sense that a number of customers will automatically
make their purchases from the firm.
This is a very valuable asset even if one cannot touch or feel or see it. The asset is intangible but not
fictitious.
This asset is known as goodwill and may be defined as the value of the reputation of a firm. Its
tangible effect is extra profit which firms not possessing equal reputation do not earn.
Those who purchase goodwill will acquire the name of the firm and also the site, the patents and
trademarks, etc. and existing contracts. All the factors named above result in extra profits and hence
goodwill will arise only when the business is profitable. A business running into losses will have,
generally, no goodwill.
What has to be particularly remembered is that it is the expectation of profits in future that makes
goodwill a valuable asset.
A firm which has made good profits by virtue of an exceptionally favorable contract, that is not to be
renewed, cannot expect to get much for its goodwill.
Valuation of Goodwill
In this case the profits of the past few years are averaged and adjusted for any change that is
expected to occur in the near future. The average (adjusted) is multiplied by a certain number (two
or three or five) as agreed.
It is expressed, for example, as three years’ purchase of five years’ profits. If, for example, the
om
profits for the years 2009 to 2012 ( inclusive) have been Shs.8,000, Shs.9,000, Shs.7,000, Shs.8,500
.c
and Shs.10,000, the average is Shs. 8,500.
ya
ken
If goodwill is to be valued at three years’ purchase, goodwill will be Shs.25, 500, i.e. 3 x 8,500
ea
om
b. Super Profits Basis
.s
w
w
w
In this case, interest on capital employed at the rate prevailing in the market and also reasonable
salary of the proprietor or partners is deducted from the average profits.
What remains is “Super Profits” or profits which can be attributed to the special advantages of the
firm.
Suppose, in the case discussed above, the capital of the firm is Shs.80, 000 and that seven and a half
per cent is a reasonable return in the industry. The reasonable or normal profit is Shs. 6,000.
The average profits being Shs. 8,500, the super profits in this case come to Shs.2, 500.
Super Profits multiplied by the number of years’ purchase agreed upon gives goodwill. In the
example given above, if goodwill is to be calculated at three years’ purchase, the goodwill is Shs.7,
500, i.e. 2,500 x 3.
c. Capitalization Method
In this method, the value of the whole business is found out by the formula,
100
Then, from this figure, the net assets of the firm are deducted and the remainder is goodwill.
In the example given above, the value of the whole business is or Shs.113, 333.
.
Net assets or capital is Shs. 80,000. Hence, the goodwill is Shs.33, 333, i.e. 113,333 – 80,000
The necessity for the valuation of goodwill in a firm arises in the following cases:
In the last case, obviously, the value of goodwill will be a matter of negotiation between the firm
and the intending purchaser.
In addition, the IAS specifies the following conditions to be satisfied by an asset, in order to be
called an intangible asset:
om
1. Identifiability
.c
ya
2. Control over the asset
en
3. Existence of future economic benefits
k
ea
om
The difference between tangible assets and intangible assets
.s
w
w
From the perspective of physical existence, assets can be of two types, i.e. tangible assets (those
w
with physical substance) and intangible assets (those with physical substance)
A majority of the assets of a business are tangible assets e.g. property, machinery, cars, furniture etc.
These assets have a physical existence i.e. we can see or touch them.
However, there are some assets that do not have a physical existence but are valuable for the
business. E.g. patents, copyrights etc. Such assets are called intangible assets.
Inventories ( IAS 2)
A primary issue in accounting for inventories is the amount of cost to be recognised as an asset and
carried forward until the related revenues are recognised. This Standard provides guidance on the
determination of cost and its subsequent recognition as an expense, including any write-down to net
realisable value. It also provides guidance on the cost formulas that are used to assign costs to
inventories.
Inventories shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business less the
estimated costs of completion and the estimated costs necessary to make the sale.
The cost of inventories shall comprise all costs of purchase, costs of conversion and other costs
incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition.
The cost of inventories shall be assigned by using the first-in, first-out (FIFO) or weighted average
cost formula. An entity shall use the same cost formula for all inventories having a similar nature
and use to the entity. For inventories with a different nature or use, different cost formulas may be
justified. However, the cost of inventories of items that are not ordinarily interchangeable and goods
or services produced and segregated for specific projects shall be assigned by using specific
identification of their individual costs.
When inventories are sold, the carrying amount of those inventories shall be recognised as an
expense in the period in which the related revenue is recognized. The amount of any write-down of
inventories to net realisable value and all losses of inventories shall be recognized as an expense in
the period the write-down or loss occurs. The amount of any reversal of any write-down of
inventories, arising from an increase in net realisable value, shall be recognised as a reduction in the
amount of inventories recognised as an expense in the period in which the reversal occurs.
Other Assets
om
Trade receivables
.c
ya
The term trade receivables refer to the amounts due to a business following the sale of goods or
ken
services to another company. It is a subcategory of Accounts Receivable. Trade receivables are
ea
om
considered a current asset on a company's balance sheet as they can be readily converted into cash.
.s
w
Cash at Bank
w
w
The sum of all coins, currency and other unrestricted liquid funds that have been placed on deposit
with a financial institution. Cash in bank is considered a highly liquid form of current asset, and
when reported on a business balance sheet, it is combined with cash in hand for accounting
purposes.
Cash on hand
Funds that are immediately available to a business, and can be spent as needed, as opposed to assets
that must be sold to generate cash. The amount of cash on hand determines what projects a company
can undertake, or what financial hardships can be absorbed, without going into debt or arranging
other financing.
Accrued income
1) Earned,
2) There is a right to receive the amount, and
3) It has not yet been recorded in the general ledger accounts. One example of accrued income is
the interest earned on a bond investment.
To illustrate, let’s assume that a company invested shs.100,000 on December 1 in a 6% shs.100, 000
bond that pays shs.3, 000 of interest on each June 1 and December 1. On December 31, the company
will have earned one month’s interest amounting to shs.500 (shs.100,000 x 6% per year x 1/12 of a
year, or 1/6 of the semiannual shs.3, 000). No interest will be received in December since it will be
part of the shs.3,000 to be received on June 1. The shs.500 of interest earned during December, but
not yet received or recorded as of December 31 is known as accrued income.
Under the accrual basis of accounting, accrued income is recorded with an adjusting entry prior to
issuing the financial statements. In our example, there will need to be an adjusting entry dated
December 31 that debits Interest Receivable (a balance sheet account) for shs.500, and credits
Interest Income (an income statement account) for shs.500.
Liabilities
Trade payables
Trade payables are also known as accounts payable and refers to money owed to creditors, lenders,
vendors or suppliers for products or services rendered. Payables are considered short-term if due
within 12 months whereas payables due longer than 12 months are considered long-term.
om
.c
Loan
ya
k en
In finance, a loan is a debt evidenced by a note which specifies, among other things, the principal
ea
amount, interest rate, and date of repayment. A loan entails the reallocation of the subject asset(s) for
om
a period of time, between the lender and the borrower.
.s
w
w
w
In a loan, the borrower initially receives or borrows an amount of money, called the principal, from
the lender, and is obligated to pay back or repay an equal amount of money to the lender at a later
time. Typically, the money is paid back in regular installments, or partial repayments; in an annuity,
each installment is the same amount.
The loan is generally provided at a cost, referred to as interest on the debt, which provides an
incentive for the lender to engage in the loan. In a legal loan, each of these obligations and
restrictions is enforced by contract, which can also place the borrower under additional restrictions
known as loan covenants. Although this article focuses on monetary loans, in practice any material
object might be lent.
Acting as a provider of loans is one of the principal tasks for financial institutions. For other
institutions, issuing of debt contracts such as bonds is a typical source of funding.
Prepaid income
Prepaid Income is an accounting concept that refers to a payment that has been received, but the
asset has not yet been fully delivered. The company receives a one-off payment for the asset, but
delivers its full value either in the future or over time. Prepaid Income is found on the Balance Sheet
of a company as a liability (as it is something which is owed), either with its own section or under
Other Current Liabilities.
Accrued expenses
Money spent or cost incurred in an organization's efforts to generate revenue, representing the cost
of doing business.
Expenses may be in the form of actual cash payments (such as wages and salaries), a computed
expired portion (depreciation) of an asset, or an amount taken out of earnings (such as bad debts).
Expenses are summarized and charged in the income statement as deductions from the income
before assessing income tax. Whereas all expenses are costs, not all costs (such as those incurred in
acquisition of income generating assets) are expenses.
om
The objectives of IFRS 5 are to:
.c
1. Classify, measure and present non-current assets held for sale, in particular requiring that
ya
such assets should be presented separately on the face of statement of financial position
ken
2. Present separately the results of discontinued operations.
ea
om
Classification as held for sale.
.s
w
w
w
A non-current asset should be classified as held for sale if its carrying amount will be recovered
principally through a sale transaction rather than through continued use. The following conditions
should apply:
1. The asset must be available for sale in its present condition
2. The sale must be highly probable meaning that
i. Non-current assets held for sale should be measured at the lower of their carrying amount and
fair value less cost to sell.
ii. Held for sale non-current assets should be presented separately on the face of statement of
financial position and should not be depreciated
iii. On presentation on statement of financial position, they will qualify as current assets under
rules of IAS 1
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 16
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Illustration 1:
On 1st January 20x1, john’s pizza company bought a chicken processing machine for ksh.200, 000.
It has an expected useful life of 10 years and a nil residual value. On December 20x2, after 2 years
of using the assets, john’s company decides to sell the machine and starts action to locate a buyer.
The machines are in short supply so john’s is confident that the machine to dismantle the machine
and market it available to the buyer.
Required:
At what value should the machine be stated in john’s company statement of financial position?
Solution:
Carrying amount = 8 x 200,000 = 160,000
or
200,000 0
200,000 2 = 160,000
10
Fair value
= 150,000 5,000
= 145,000
om
.c
The machine qualifies as held for sale, so it should be stated at lower of ksh. 160,000 which is ksh
ya
en
145,000
k
ea
om
The impairment loss of ksh.15, 000 incurred in writing down the machine to fair value less costs to
.s
sell will be charged to the income statement.
w
w
w
Illustration 2:
On January 20x0, XYZ purchased a machine for ksh.100, 000. It was expected that it would have a
useful life of 8 years and a residual value ksh.20.000. However, during 20x1 December, the
directors decided to sell the machine. The company removes the machine from the farm in readiness
for quick disposal and prepares the machine for viewing by potential purchasers. They appoint an
agent to assist with marketing and advertising. The agent advises that the disposal may take two to
six months but should be sold for ksh. 45,000.
Required:
Show the movement on the machine during the year ended 31st 20x1. And describe how the asset
should be disclosed on the statement of financial position at year end.
Solution:
Machine
Opening balance 90,000
Depreciation (10,000)
Closing 80,000
Balance impairment (35,000)
Recoverable amount 45,000
A discontinued operating is a component of an entity that has either been disposed of or is classified
as held for sale and
Discontinued operations are required to be shown separately in order to help users to predict future
performance.
An entity must disclose a single amount on the face of income statement, comprising a total of:
The post-tax profit/loss of discontinued operations.
The post-tax gain or loss recognized on the measurement of fair values less costs to sell on
disposal, of the assets constituting the discontinued operations.
An analysis for this single amount must be presented, either in the notes on the face of income
statement.
om
The revenue, expenses and pretax profit or loss of the discontinued operations
.c
ya
The related income expense
en
The gain or loss recognized on the measurement to fair value less cost to sell, or on the
k
ea
disposal, of the assets constituting the discontinued operations.
om
.s
Illustration:
w
w
w
Valentine produced cards and sold roses. However, halfway through the year ended 31st march 20x6,
the rose business was closed and assets sold of incurring losses on disposal of non-current assets of
$76,000 and redundancy costs of $37,000. The directors reorganized the continuing business at a
cost of $98,000. Trading results may be summarized as follows:
$ ‘000’ $’000’
Turnover 650 320
Cost of sales 320 150
Administration 120 110
Distribution 60 90
Other trading information is as follows:
Interest payable 17
Tax 31
Required:
Draft the income statement for the year ended 31st march 20x6.
Income statement for valentine for the year ended 31st march 20x6
$’000’
Continuing operations 650
Cost of sales (320)
Gross profit 330
Administration costs (120)
Distribution costs (60)
Operating profit 150
Reorganization costs (98)
52
Finance costs(interest payable) (17)
Profit before tax 35
Income tax (31)
Profit for the period from continuing operations 4
Discontinued operations
Loss for the period from total operations (143)
Loss for the period from total operations (139)
In the notes to the accounts disclose analysis of the discontinued operations figure
om
$’000’
.c
ya
Revenue 320
en
Cost of sales (150)
k
ea
Gross profit 170
om
Distribution costs (90)
.s
Operating loss (30)
w
w
Loss on disposal (76)
w
Redundancy costs (37)
Overall loss (143)
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe the accounting treatment for borrowing costs.
Borrowing costs are interest and other costs incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing
of funds.
Benchmark treatment – Borrowing costs shall be recognised as an expense in the period in which
they are incurred.
Allowed alternative treatment – Borrowing costs shall be recognised as an expense in the period in
which they are incurred, except to the extent that they are capitalised in accordance with paragraph
11.
Borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a
qualifying asset shall be capitalised as part of the cost of that asset. The amount of borrowing costs
eligible for capitalisation shall be determined in accordance with this Standard. [Paragraph 11]
A qualifying asset is an asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its
intended use or sale.
To the extent that funds are borrowed specifically for the purpose of obtaining a qualifying asset, the
amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation on that asset shall be determined as the actual
borrowing costs incurred on that borrowing during the period less any investment income on the
temporary investment of those borrowings.
To the extent that funds are borrowed generally and used for the purpose of obtaining a qualifying
asset, the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation shall be determined by applying a
capitalisation rate to the expenditures on that asset. The capitalisation rate shall be the weighted
average of the borrowing costs applicable to the borrowings of the entity that are outstanding during
the period, other than borrowings made specifically for the purpose of obtaining a qualifying asset.
The amount of borrowing costs capitalised during a period shall not exceed the amount of borrowing
costs incurred during that period.
The capitalisation of borrowing costs as part of the cost of a qualifying asset shall commence when:
om
(a) expenditures for the asset are being incurred;
.c
(b) borrowing costs are being incurred; and
ya
en
(c) Activities that are necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use or sale are in progress.
k
ea
om
Capitalisation of borrowing costs shall be suspended during extended periods in which active
.s
development is interrupted.
w
w
w
Capitalisation of borrowing costs shall cease when substantially all the activities necessary to
prepare the qualifying asset for its intended use or sale are complete.
Definitions:
1. Borrowing costs;are interest and other costs incurred by an enterprise in connection with the
borrowing of funds.
2. Qualifying asset; is an asset that necessary takes a substantial of time to get ready for its intended
use/ sale.
Accounting Treatment
Borrowings costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a
qualifying asset must be capitalized as part of the cost of that asset.
The amount of borrowing cost available for capitalization is that actual amount incurred less any
investment income from temporary investment.
Criteria for determining which borrowing costs are eligible for capitalization is as follows:
Difficulties arise however, where the enterprise uses a range of debt instrument to finance a wide
range of assets so that there’s no direct relationship between particular borrowing and a specific
asset.
In a situation where borrowings are obtained generally but are applied in part to obtaining a
qualifying asset, then the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalization is found by applying
the capitalization rate to the expenditure on the asset.
om
The capitalization rate is the weighted average of the borrowing costs applicable to the enterprise’s
.c
borrowings that are outstanding during the period excluding borrowings made specifically to obtain
ya
a qualifying asset.
ken
ea
Presentation of grants related to income
om
.s
w
These grants are credited as either profits or loss but there is a choice in the method of disclosure
w
w
e.g.
In some cases it can be argued that offsetting incomes and expenses in the statement of
comprehensive income is not a good practice it may also be argued that expenses would not have
been incurred and the grant not been available so off -setting the two is acceptable.
Although both methods are acceptable, disclosure of the grant may be necessary for a proper
understanding of the financial statement particularly the effect of any item of income or expense
which is required to be separately disclosed.
If a grant has to be paid it must be accounted for as a revision of an accounting estimate (IAS 8)
a) Repayment of a grant related to income – apply first against any unamortized deferred
income set up in respect of the grant,i.e. any excess should be recognized immediately as an
expense.
b) Repayment of a grant related to an asset- Increase the carrying amount of an asset or reduced
deferred income balance by the amount repayable.
The cumulative additional depreciation that would have been recognized to date in the absence of
the grant should immediately be recognized as an expense.
It’s possible that the circumstances surrounding the repayment may require a review of the asset
value and an impairment of the new carrying amount of the asset.
Government Assistance
Some forms on government assistance are excluded from the financial statement due to the
following:
a) They cannot reasonably have a value placed on them e.g. free technical or marketing advice.
b) There’re transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the entity’s
normal trading transactions e.g. government procurement policy resulting in a portion of the
entity’s sales.
Disclosures of such assistance may be necessary because of its significance i.e. its nature, extent and
om
duration should be disclosed.
.c
ya
Ceasationof Capitalization
ken
ea
Capitalization of borrowing governments’ shall cease when:
om
.s
w
- Substantially all the activities necessary to prepare the qualifying asset for its intended use/
w
w
sale are completed.
- When the construction of a qualifying asset is completed in parts and each part is capable or
being used while construction continues on other parts, capitalization of borrowing costs shall
cease when substantially all the activities necessary to prepare that part for its intended use/
sale are completed.
ILLUSTRATION
On 1/1/2010 XY Ltd borrowed sh.30, 000,000 to finance the production of two assets both of which
were expected to take a year to build. Production started during the year 2011. The loan facility was
drawn down on 1/1/2010 and was utilized as follows, with the remaining funds invested temporarily.
Asset A B
sh sh
1Jan – 30th June 2011 5,000,000 10,000,000
1st July – 31st Dec. 2011 5,000,000 10,000,000
10,000,000 20,000,000
Interest on borrowings was nine percent per annum and idle funds can be invested to earn an interest
of seven percent.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 22
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Required:
Asset A B 450,000
1Jan – 30 June 2011 9% x 5m x 6/12 225,0000 9% x 10m x 6/12 450,000
1st July – 31 Dec. 2011 225,0000 900 000
450 000
Less: Investment Income
1st Jan-30th June (175,000) 7%x10m x 6/12 (350,000)
7%x5mx6/12
om
Cost of the asset 10,000,000 20,000,000
.c
Add; borrowing cost 275,000 550,000
ya
Total cost of the asset 10,275,000 20,550,000
en
k
ea
Commencement of Capitalization
om
.s
w
The capitalization of borrowings costs as part of the cost of an asset shall commence when:
w
a) Expenditure on the asset is being incurred
w
b) Borrowing costs are being incurred
c) Activities that are necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use/ sale are in progress.
Disclosures
The following should be disclosed in the financial statement in relation to borrowing costs:
a) Inventories that require a substantial period of time to bring them to a saleable condition.
b) Manufacturing plants
c) Power generation facilities
d) Investment properties
N/B: Inventories produced in bulk over short periods and on a regular basis are not qualifying assets
nor are assets ready for sale or their intended use when purchased.
Suspension of capitalization
If active developments are interrupted for any extended periods, capitalization for borrowing costs
should be suspended for those periods.
Suspension of capitalization of borrowing costs is not necessary for temporary delays or for periods
when substantial technical or administrative work is taking place.
Temporary delays occur when it’s a necessary process of getting an asset ready for its intended use/
sale.
For example, capitalization continues during extended periods needed for stocks.
om
INVESTMENT PROPERTY ( IAS 40)
.c
ya
Investment property is property (land or a building—or part of a building—or both) held (by the
ken
owner or by the lessee under a finance lease) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather
ea
than for:
om
.s
w
(a) Use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
w
w
(b) Sale in the ordinary course of business.
A property interest that is held by a lessee under an operating lease may be classified and accounted
for as investment property provided that:
(a) It is probable that the future economic benefits that are associated with the investment
property will flow to the entity; and
(b) The cost of the investment property can be measured reliably.
An investment property shall be measured initially at its cost. Transaction costs shall be included in
the initial measurement.
The initial cost of a property interest held under a lease and classified as an investment property
shall be as prescribed for a finance lease by paragraph 20 of IAS 17, i.e. the asset shall be recognised
at the lower of the fair value of the property and the present value of the minimum lease payments.
An equivalent amount shall be recognised as a liability in accordance with that same paragraph.
(c) a fair value model, under which an investment property is measured, after initial
measurement, at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss; or
(d) a cost model. The cost model is specified in IAS 16 and requires an investment property to be
measured after initial measurement at depreciated cost (less any accumulated impairment
losses). An entity that chooses the cost model discloses the fair value of its investment
property.
The fair value of investment property is the price at which the property could be exchanged between
knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s length transaction.
An investment property shall be derecognised (eliminated from the balance sheet) on disposal or
when the investment property is permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefits
are expected from its disposal.
Gains or losses arising from the retirement or disposal of investment property shall be determined as
om
the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and shall be
.c
recognised in profit or loss (unless IAS 17 requires otherwise on a sale and leaseback) in the period
ya
en
of the retirement or disposal.
k
ea
om
.s
w
FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS ( IAS 32)
w
Financial instruments w
A financial instrument gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial liability or equity
instrument of another.
Introduction
If you read the financial press you will probably be aware of rapid international expansion in the use
of financial instrument/These vary from straightforward, traditional instruments, e.g. bonds, through
to various forms of so-called 'derivative instruments'.
We can perhaps summarize the reasons why a project on accounting for financial instruments was
considered necessary as follows.
a) The significant growth of financial instruments over recent years has outstripped the
development of guidance for their accounting.
b) The topic is of international concern; other national standard-setters are involved as well as
the IASB.
c) There have been recent high-profile disasters involving derivatives which, while not caused
by accounting failures, have raised questions about accounting and disclosure practices.
Liabilities are still accounted for in accordance with IAS 39 and assets can also still be accounted for
under IAS 39.
Financial asset:
om
.c
Any asset that is:
ya
ken
(i) Cash;
ea
(ii) An equity instrument of another entity;
om
(iii) A contractual right:
.s
w
To receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or
w
w
To exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that
are potentially favorable to the entity; or
A contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and is:
A non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of
the entity’s own equity instruments; or
A derivative that will or may be settled other than by the exchange of a fixed amount of cash
or another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments.
For this purpose an entity’s own equity instruments does not include instruments that are themselves
contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments.
Financial liability:
Fair value:
The amount for which an asset could be exchanged or a liability settled, between knowledgeable,
willing parties in an arm’s length transaction.
The definition of financial instrument used in IAS 32 is the same as that in IAS 39.
Equity instrument:
It as any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all of its
liabilities.
The definitions of financial assets and financial liabilities may seem rather circular, referring as
they do to the terms financial asset and financial instrument. The point is that there may be a chain
of contractual rights and obligations, but it will lead ultimately to the receipt or payment of cash or
the acquisition or issue of an equity instrument.
om
(b) Options
.c
(c) Shares (when held as an investment)
ya
en
Examples of financial liabilities include:
k
ea
om
(a) Trade payables
.s
w
(b) Debenture loans payable
w
w
(c) Redeemable preference (non-equity) shares.
IAS 32 makes it clear that the following items are non-financial instruments.
a) Physical assets, e.g. inventories, property, plant and Equipment, leased assets and intangible
assets (patents, trademarks etc.)
b) Prepaid expenses deferred revenue and most warranty obligations
c) Liabilities or assets that are not contractual in nature
Financial Instruments has become a very important area in accounting especially because of the
developments in financial markets as far new derivatives and other financial instruments. Many
companies had ignored the recording and accounting for such instruments and this has been
disastrous as big companies like Enron collapsed. There has been an issue with IAS 32 which deals
with Presentation, IAS 39 which deals with recognition and measurement and IFRS 7 which deals
with Disclosure. IFRS 7 applies to periods commencing from 2007 and supersedes the presentation
part of IAS 32.
The main objectives of the three standards are to ensure that financial instruments are properly
accounted for and adequate disclosure is made by the companies. The three standards are very
comprehensive especially IAS 39 which includes detailed illustration on how to treat the financial
instruments in the accounts.
Scope
IAS 32 should be applied in the presentation and disclosure of all types of financial instruments.
Certain items are excluded for example subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, pensions and
insurance contracts.
The main thrust of IAS 32 is that financial instruments should be presented according to their
substance, not merely their legal form. In particular, entities which issue financial instruments
should classify them (or their component parts) as either financial liabilities, or equity.
om
How should a financial liability be distinguished from an equity instrument? The critical feature of a
.c
liability is an obligation to transfer economic benefit. Therefore a financial instrument is a financial
ya
liability if there is a contractual obligation on the issuer either to deliver cash or another financial
ken
asset to the holder or to exchange another financial instrument with the holder under potentially
ea
om
unfavorable conditions to the issuer.
.s
w
Where the above critical feature is not met, then the financial instrument is. an equity instrument.
w
w
IAS 32 explains that although the holder of an equity instrument may be entitled to a pro rata share
of any distributions out of equity, the issuer does not have a contractual obligation to make such a
distribution.
For instance, a company is not obliged to pay a dividend to its ordinary shareholders. Although
substance and legal form are often consistent with each other, this is not always the case. In
particular, a financial instrument may have the legal form of equity, but in substance it is in fact a
liability. Other instruments may combine features of both equity instruments and financial liabilities.
For example, many entities issue preference shares which must be redeemed by the issuer for a fixed
(or determinable) amount at a fixed (or determinable) future date. Alternatively, the holder may have
the right to require the issuer to redeem the shares at or after a certain date for a fixed amount. In
such cases, the issuer has an obligation. Therefore the instrument is a financial liability and should
be classified as such.
The distinction between redeemable and non-redeemable preference shares is important. Most
preference shares are redeemable and are therefore classified as a financial liability.
Some financial instruments contain both a liability and an equity element. In such cases, IAS 32
requires the component parts of the instrument to be classified separately, according to the substance
of the contractual arrangement and the definitions of financial liability and an equity instrument.
One of the most common types of compound instrument is convertible debt. This creates a primary
financial liability of thtis5uer and grants an option to the holder of the instrument to convert it into
an equity instrument (usually ordinary shares) of the issuer. This is the economic equivalent of the
issue of conventional debt plus a warrant to acquire shares in the future.
Although in theory there are several possible ways of calculating the split, IAS 32 requires the
following method:
The reasoning behind this approach is that an entity's equity is its residual interest in lts assets
amount after deducting all its liabilities.
The sum of the carrying amounts assigned to liability and equity will always be equal to the carrying
om
amount that would be ascribed to the instrument as a whole.
.c
ya
ILLUSTRATION 2
ken
ea
Valuation of Compound Instruments
om
.s
w
RuthTimo Company issues 2,000 convertible bonds at the start of 2002. The bonds have a three year
w
w
term, and are issued at par with a face value of Sh. 1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds of Sh.
2,000,000. Interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6%. Each bond
is convertible at any time up to maturity into 250 ordinary shares.
When the bonds are issued, the prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without convers on
optic is 9%.
Required
SOLUTION
The liability component is valued first, and the difference between the proceeds of the bond issue
and the fair value of the liability is assigned to the equity component. The present value of the
liability component is calculated using a discount rate of 9%, the market interest rate for similar
bonds having no conversion right as shown.
Sh.
Present value of the principal: Sh. 2,000,000 payable at the end of three years 1,544,367
(Sh. 2mx 0.772183)
Present value of the interest: Sh. 120,000 payable annually in arrears for three years
(Sh. 120,000x2.5313) 303,755
Total liability component 1,848,122
Equity component (balancing figure) 151,878
Proceeds of the bond issue 2,000,000
These figures can be obtained from discount and annuity tables or simply calculated arithmetically
as follows.
Interest
Year 120,000 + 1.09 110,091
Year 2 110,091 + 1.09 101,002
Year 3 101,002 + 1.09 92,662 303,755
Value of liability component 1,848,122
Equity component (balancing figure) 151,878
Proceeds of bond issue 2,000,000
om
.c
ya
The split between the liability and equity components remains the same throughout the term of the
en
instrument, even if there are changes in the likelihood of the option being exercised. This is
k
ea
because it is not always possible to predict how a holder will behave. The issuer continues to have
om
an obligation to make future payments until conversion, maturity of the instrument or some other
.s
relevant transaction takes place.
w
w
w
ILLUSTRATION 3
Convertible Debt
A company issues Sh. 20m of 4% convertible loan notes at par on 1 January 2009. The loan notes
are redeemable for cash or convertible into equity shares on the basis of 20 shares per Sh.100 of debt
at the, option of the loan note holder on 31 December 2011. Similar but non-convertible loan notes
carry an interest rate of 9%.
The present value of shs 1 receivable at the end of the year based on discount rates of 4% and 9%
can be taken as:
4% 9%
Sh. Sh.
End of year 1 0.96 0.92
2 0.93 0.84
3 0.89 0.77
Cumulative 2.78 2.53
Required;
Show how these loan notes should be accounted for in the financial statements at 31 December
2009.
SOLUTION;
Sh ‘000’
Income statement
Finance costs (W2) 1,568
Non-current liabilities
4% convertible loan notes (W2) 18,192
Workings
Sh. ‘000’
om
3 years interest (20,000 x 4% x 2.53) 2,024
.c
ya
Redemption (20,000 x 0.77) 15,400
en
Liability element 17,424
k
ea
Equity element 2,576
om
Proceeds of loan notes 20,000
.s
w
w
w
2. Loan note balance
Sh. ‘000’
Liability element(W1) 17,424
Interest for the year at 9% 1,568
Less interest paid (20,000 × 4%) (800)
Carrying value at 31 December 2009 18,192
As well as looking at presentation in the statement of financial position, IAS 32 considers how
financial instruments affect the income statement or statement of comprehensive income (and
movements in equity). The treatment varies according to whether interest, dividends, losses or gains
relate to a financial liability or an equity instrument.
a) Interest, dividends, losses and gains relating to a financial instrument (or component part)
classified as a financial liability should be recognized as income or expense in profit or
loss.
Summary
The objective of this IFRS is to require entities to provide disclosures in their financial statements
that enable users to evaluate:
om
.c
ya
(a) The significance of financial instruments for the entity’s financial position and performance;
en
and
k
ea
(b) The nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments to which the entity is
om
exposed during the period and at the reporting date, and how the entity manages those risks.
.s
The qualitative disclosures describe management’s objectives, policies and processes for
w
w
managing those risks. The quantitative disclosures provide information about the extent to
w
which the entity is exposed to risk, based on information provided internally to the entity's
key management personnel. Together, these disclosures provide an overview of the entity's
use of financial instruments and the exposures to risks they create.
The standard does not prescribe the format or location for disclosure of information. A combination
of narrative descriptions and specific quantified data should be given, as appropriate.
The level of detail required is a matter of judgment. Where a large number of very similar financial
instrument transactions are undertaken, these may be grouped together. Conversely, a single
significant transaction may require full disclosure.
IAS 39 Financial instruments: recognition and measurement establishes principles for recognizing
and measuring financial; assets and liabilities. Financial assets are now also accounted for under
IFRS 9.
Scope
IAS 39 and IFRS 9 apply to all entities and to all types of financial Instruments except those
specifically excluded, for example investments in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.
Initial recognition
A financial asset or financial liability should be recognized in the statement of financial position
when the reporting entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.
Notice that this is different from the recognition criteria in the Framework and in most other
standards.
Items are normally recognized when there is a probable inflow or outflow of resources and the item
has cost or value that can be measured reliably.
Derecognition
om
statement of financial position.
.c
ya
An entity should derecognize a financial asset when:
ken
ea
a) The contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire; or
om
b) It transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset to
.s
w
another party.
w
w
An entity should derecognize a financial liability when it is extinguished i.e., when the obligation
specified in the contract is discharged or cancelled or expires.
It is possible for only part of a financial asset or liability to be derecognized. This is allowed if the
part comprises:
For example, if an entity holds a bond it has the right to two separate sets of cash inflows: those
relating to the principal and those relating to the interest. It could sell the right to receive the interest
to another party while retaining the right to receive the principal.
On derecognition, the amount to be included in net profit or loss for the period is calculated as
follows:
Shs Shs
Carrying amount of asset/liability( or the portion of asset/liability) transferred X X
Less; proceeds received/ paid
Any cumulative gain or loss reported in equity X (X)
Difference to net profit/loss
X
Where only part of a financial asset is derecognized, the carrying amount of the asset should be
allocated between the part retained and the part transferred based on their relative fair values on the
date of transfer.
A gain or loss should be recognized based on the proceeds for the portion transferred.
Summary
All financial assets and liabilities should be recognized in the statement of financial position.
Financial assets should be derecognized when the rights to the cash flows from the asset expire
or where substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred to another party.
Financial liabilities should be derecognized when they are extinguished.
om
.c
ya
Financial instruments are initially measured at the fair value of the consideration given or received
en
(i.e., cost) plus (or minus in the case of financial liabilities) transaction costs that are directly
k
ea
attributable to the acquisition or issue of the financial instrument.
om
.s
The exception to this rule is where a financial instrument is designated as at fair value through profit
w
w
or loss (this term is explained below). In this case, transaction costs are not added to fair value at
w
initial recognition.
The fair value of the consideration is normally the transaction price or market prices. If market
prices are not reliable, the fair value may be estimated using a valuation technique (for example, by
discounting cash flows).
After initial recognition, IFRS 9 requires an entity to measure financial assets to either amortized
cost or fair value, based on:
a) The entity's business model for managing the financial assets; and
b) The contractual cash flow characteristics of the financial asset
A financial asset is measured at amortized cost if both of the following conditions are met:
a) The asset is held within a business model whose objective is-to hold assets in order to collect
contractual cash flows
b) The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are
solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding.
After initial recognition, all financial assets other than those held at fair value through profit or loss
should be re-measured to either fair value or amortized cost.
IFRS 9 allows the option to initially measure a financial asset at fair value through profit or loss
where a mismatch would otherwise arise between the asset and a related liability. In this case, the
asset will also be subsequently measured at fair value through profit or loss.
A financial asset or liability at fair value through profit or loss meets either of the following
conditions:
a) It is classified as held for trading. A financial instrument is classified as held for trading if it
is:
i) Acquired or incurred principally for the purpose of selling or repurchasing it in tile near
term;
ii) Part of a portfolio of identified financial instruments that are managed together and for
which there is evidence of a recent actual pattern of short-term profit-taking
b) Upon initial recognition it is designated by the entity as at fair value through profit or loss.
om
.c
IAS 39 is still largely in use as mandatory application of IFRS 9 does not begin until January 2013.
ya
IAS 39 classifies financial assets under the following additional categories:
ken
ea
Held-to-maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable
om
payments and a fixed maturity date, which the entity has the positive intent and ability to hold to
.s
w
maturity.
w
w
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that
are not quoted in an active market.
Both held to maturity investments and loans and receivables are carried at amortized cost.
Available-for-sale financial assets are those financial assets that are not:
Available-for-sale financial assets are carried at fair value with gains and losses recognized directly
in equity (other comprehensive income).
Amortized cost
Assets held at amortized cost is measured using the effective interest method.
Amortized cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which the financial asset or
liability is measured at initial recognition minus principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative
amortization of any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount, and minus any
write- down for impairment or uncollectability.
The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortized cost of a financial instrument
and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period.
ILLUSTRATION 4
Amortised Cost
On 1 January 2001 Abacus Co purchases a debt instrument for its fair value of Sh 1,000. The debt
instrument is due to mature on 31 December 2005. The instrument has a principal amount of Sh
1,250 and the instrument carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. The effective rate of
interest is 10%.
How should Abacus Co account for the debt instrument over its five year term?
SOLUTION
Abacus Co will receive interest of Sh 59 (1,250×4.72%) each year and Sh 1,250 when the
instrument matures.
Abacus must allocate the discount of Sh 250 and the interest receivable over the five year term at a
om
constant rate on the carrying amount of the debt. To do this, it must apply the effective interest rate
.c
of 10%. The following table shows the allocation over the years:
ya
ken
Year Amortised cost Income statement: Interest received Amortised cost
ea
om
at Interest income for year during year (cash at end of year
.s
beginning of (@10%) inflow) Sh
w
year Sh Sh
w
w
Sh
2001 1,000 100 (59) 1,041
2002 1,041 104 (59) 1,041
2003 1,086 109 (59) 1,086
2004 1,136 113 (59) 1,136
2005 1,190 119 (1,250+59) 1,190
Each year the carrying amount of the financial asset is increased by the interest income for the year
and reduced by the interest actually received during the year.
After initial recognition, in accordance with IAS 39, alt financial liabilities should be" measured at
amortised cost, with the exception of financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss. These
should be measured at fair value, but where the fair value is not capable of reliable measurement,
they should be measured at cost.
ILLUSTRATION 5
Galaxy Co issues a bond for Sh 503,778 on 1 January 2002. No interest is payable on the bond, but
it will be held to maturity and redeemed on 31 December 2004 for Sh 600,000. The bond has not
been designated as at fair value through profit or loss. The effective interest rate is 6%.
Required;
Calculate the charge to the income statement of Galaxy Co for the year ended 31 December 2002
and the balance outstanding at 31 December 2002.
SOLUTION
The bond is a 'deep discount' bond and is a financial liability of Galaxy Co. It is measured at
amortised cost.
Although there is no interest as such, the difference between the initial cost of the bond and the price
at which it will be redeemed is a finance cost. This must be allocated over the term of the bond at a
constant/ate on the carrying amount. This is done by applying the effective interest rate.
om
The balance outstanding at 31 December 2002 is Sh 534,004 (503,778 + 30,226).
.c
ya
Gains and losses
ken
ea
Instruments at fair value through profit or loss: gains and losses are recognized in profit or loss (i.e.,
om
in the income statement).
.s
w
w
w
Financial instruments held at fair value: gains and losses are recognized in profit or loss unless the
financial asset is an equity instrument and the entity made an election upon initial recognition to
present gains and losses directly in equity through the statement of comprehensive income.
Dividends from the investment will be recognised in profit or loss.
Financial instruments carried at amortized cost: gains and losses are recognized in profit or toss as a
result of the amortization process and when the asset is derecognized.
LEASES
Most organizations use assets which they’ve not yet paid for them in full. Those assets would either
be taken back to the owner or would remain in possession of the enterprise.
Introduction
Lease is an agreement whereby the lessor conveys to the lessee, in return for rent, the right to use an
asset for an agreed period of time. The lessor remains the owner but lessee has a right to use the
equipment for agreed rentals to be paid over a period. Though the lessee has an unrestricted right of
use of the lease equipment but does not become the owner. The lease contract will cover lease
period, the amount and timing of payments to be made by the lessee, provision of payment of taxes,
insurance, maintenance expenses and provision for renewal of the lease or purchase of asset at the
expiration of the lease period.
This standard shall be applied in accounting for all leases other than:
i) Leases to explore for or use minerals or natural gas and similar non-regenerative resources.
ii) Licencing agreements for such items as motion picture films, video recordings, plays,
patents and copyrights.
Definitions of Terms
1. Lease
om
It’s an agreement whereby the lessor converges to the lessee in return for a payment or a series of
.c
payments. The right to use an asset for a period of time.
ya
ken
2. Finance lease
ea
om
Is an agreement that transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an
.s
w
asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.
w
3. Operating lease
w
This is an agreement that do not transfer all risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an asset.
Title would number be transferred to the other party i.e. the asset remains as owned by the owner
therefore an operating lease is a lease other than a finance lease.
These are payments over the lease term that the lease is or can be required to make excluding
contingent, rent, costs for services and taxes to be paid by and reimbursed to the lessor.
i) For a lessee, that part of the residue value that is guaranteed by the lessee or by a party related to
the lessee (the amount of the guarantee being the maximum amount that would be in even event
become payable)
ii) For a lessor, that part of a residue value that is guaranteed by the lessee or by a third party and
related to the lessor i.e. financial capable of discharging the obligations under the guarantee.
Is that portion of the residual value of the lease asset, the realization of which by the lessor, is not
assured or is guaranteed solely by a party related to the lessor.
This is the discount rate at the inception of the lease causes the aggregate PV of:
om
i) The fair value of the leased asset
.c
ii) Any initial direct cost of the lessor
ya
- Unearned residue:
ken
ea
This is the difference between:
om
.s
w
a. The gross investment to the lease
w
w
b. The net investment to the lease
In general lease means allowing a person to use a property on payment of a certain amount of money
in installment as agreed between the lessor and lessee. A contract of lease may be classified into
three types:
1. Finance lease
2. Leveraged lease
3. Operating lease
It’s a lease under which the present value of the minimum lease payments at the inception of the
lease exceeds or is equal to substantially the whole of the fair value of the leased asset. This method
of financing the asset is similar to that of borrowing for acquisition of an asset. The asset is acquired
immediately without making any payment for it. Contract made under this type of lease is
irrevocable or non-cancellable. The lessor will try to recover his original investment of equipment
plus a reasonable return on such investment during the lease term.
i. The lessor transfers ownership of the asset to the lessee at the end of the lease term.
ii. The lessee has the option to purchase the asset at a price that is expected to be sufficiently
lower than the fair value at the date the option becomes exercisable for it to be reasonably
certain at the inception of the lease that the option will be exercised.
iii. The lease term is for major part of economic life of the asset even if the title is not
transferred.
iv. At the inception of the lease, the present value of minimum lease payment approximates the
fair value above 90%.
v. If the leased asset is of a specialised nature such that it is only the lessee who can use it
without any major modification.
vi. If the lessee cancels the lease agreement at any time, any cancellation losses incurred by the
lessor will be borne by the lessee.
vii. If fluctuations gain or losses in relation to the residue value will be borne by the lessee.
1. A reconciliation between the total future minimum lease payments and their present value.In
addition, an entity shall disclose the total of future minimum lease payments at the balance
sheet dates and their present value for each of the following period: -
i) Not later than one year
om
ii) Later than one year and not later than 5 years
.c
iii) Later than five years
ya
en
2. For each class of assets, the net carrying amount at the balance sheet date.
k
ea
3. Contingent rents recognised as an expense.
om
4. The total of the future minimum sub-leases payment expected to be received under non-
.s
cancellable sub-leases as at the balance sheet date.
w
w
5. A general description of significant leasing arrangements.
The sale price will be shown at the present value of the minimum lease payments deducting from the
same, the cost of sale comprising of the cost of the leased property and other initial direct cost
incidental to the same less the present value of the residual.
The gross investment in the lease depicted by the sum of the minimum lease payments and
the estimated residual value
The difference between the gross investment and its present value as unearned income to be
recognized as earned over the life of the lease
The sale price will be shown at the present value of the minimum lease payments deducting
from the same, the cost of sale comprising of the cost of the leased property and other initial
direct cost incidental to the same less the present value of the residual.
Disclosures should be made of the amount of the assets that are subject of finance leases at
each balance sheet date. Liabilities, differentiating between the current and long-term portions.
Commitments for minimum lease payments under finance leases and under non-cancellable
operating lease with a term of more than one year should be disclosed in summary form giving
the amounts and periods in which the payments will become due.
Disclosures should be made of significant financing restrictions, renewal or purchase options,
contingent rentals and other contingencies arising from leases.
Disclosures should be made of the basis used for allocating income so as to produce a constant
periodic rate of return, indicating whether the return relates to the net investment outstanding
or the net cash investment outstanding in the lease. If more than one basis is used, the bases
should be disclosed.
When a significant part of the lessor’s business comprises operating leases, the lessor should
disclose the amount of assets by each major class of asset together with the related
depreciation at each balance sheet date.
om
.c
Apart from the disclosures recommended above the lessor should disclose the accounting
ya
policies followed with regard to accounting for income under finance lease, valuation of assets
en
given on the lease and charge for depreciation.
k
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
Accounting Entries in the Books ofthe Lessor
a) The minimum lease payments receivable by the lessor under finance leases.
b) Any unguaranteed residue value accruing to the lessor.
This is the gross investment in the lease discounted at the interest rate implicit in the lease i.e. it is
the present value of the gross investment discounted at the interest rate implicit in the lease.
This is the difference between the gross investment in the lease and the net investment in the lease:
NB
i) The lessor should recognise the assets under finance leases in their balance sheet and present
them as receivables at an amount equal to the gross investment.
ii) The initial direct costs that may be incurred by the lessor e.g. legal fees for negotiating and
securing a lease agreement, commission etc. should be included in the initial measurement of
the finance lease receivable. Subsequently, the amounts received by the lessor should be
allocated over the lease term on a systematic basis.
Journal Entries
om
Cr: Rent receivable A/c
.c
At end of first year
ya
ken
When interest becomes receivable
ea
om
Dr: Interest receivable a/c
.s
w
Cr: Interest a/c
w
w
When the amount is received in respect of interest and rent
Dr: Cash a/c
Cr: Rent receivable a/c
Cr: Interest receivable a/c
These entries are repeated in subsequent years
ILLUSTRATION 2
a) A lessor leases out an asset on terms which constitute a finance lease. The primary period is five
years commencing 1 July 2010 and the rental payable is Sh.3, 000,000 per annum (in arrears). The
lessee has the right to continue the lease after the five-year period referred to an indefinite period at a
nominal rent. The cash price of the asset in question as at 1 July 2010 can be assumed to be Sh.11,
372,000. The rate of interest implicit in the lease is 10%.
Required:
Show the accounting entries in the leaser’s books (Apply the requirements of IAS 17-Leases).
SOLUTION
1. Gross investment
5 instalments 5 x 3m = 15 million
Unguaranteed residual value –
om
15 million
.c
2. Net investment
ya
ken
–( . )
ea
5 instalments 3,000,000 × 5 = 11.372,360
om
.
.s
w
3. Unearned finance income
w
w
Gross investment 15,000
Net investment (11,372)
3,628
4. Journal entry 1st July 2010
Dr. Lease rental receivable 15,000,000
Cr. Leased asset 11,372,000
Cr. Unearned finance income (b.f) 3,628,000
To record the inception of a finance lease in the books of the lessor
5. Receipt schedule
Period Cash received Finance income Net invest. Bal. net invest
Shs ‘000' 10% Rec. Shs ‘000'
Shs ‘000' Shs ‘000'
At inception - - - 11,372
30th June 11 3,000 1,137 1,863 9,509
30th June 12 3,000 951 2,049 7,460
30th June 13 3,000 746 2,254 5,206
30th June 14 3,000 521 2,479 2,727
30th June 15 3,000 273 2,727 0
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 43
FINANCIAL REPORTING
6.
30th June 11 30th June 12 30th June 13 30th June 14 30th June15
Dr. cash book 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000
Cr. Leases asset rec. 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000 3,000
Accounting transactions and other events should always be presented in accordance with economic
substance and financial reality and not merely in accordance with the legal interpretation. Although
the legal form of a finance lease is that the title may or may not eventually be transferred to the
lessee.
The following steps should be followed in accounting for finance leases in the books of the lease.
om
a) At the commencement of the lease term the lessee shall recognise the finance lease as an
.c
asset and a liability at amounts equal to their fair value or if lower the present value of the
ya
en
minimum lease payments.
k
ea
(The discounting rate to be used in calculating the present value of minimum lese payment
om
should be the lessor’s implicit interest rate if this is practical to determine. Otherwise the
.s
lessee’s incremental borrowing rate should be used).
w
w
Dr. leased Asset Lower of fair value
w
Cr. Obligation under finance lease PV of minimum lease payment
b) Any initial direct loss of the lease incurred in connection with the leasing activities such as
negotiating and securing a lease agreement is added to the amount recognised as the asset.
c) Minimum lease payment made by the lessee should be apportioned between the
outstanding obligation under the finance lease and the finance cost. The finance cost
should be based on the remaining balance of the liability of each period.
d) Depreciation is to be provided for depreciable leased assets. The depreciation policy for
depreciable leased asset should be consistent with that used for depreciating assets that are
owned (freehold).
Journal Entries
When contract is signed and property acquired and the liability is assumed
om
.c
ya
The above entries are repeated in each of the subsequent years.
ken
ea
ILLUSTRATION 3
om
.s
ABC Ltd initiates the leasing of equipment from XYZ Ltd on 1st Jan 2008. The equipment had
w
w
unexpected useful life of 3 years. It was to revert back to the lessor on the expiry of the lease
w
agreement on 31st Dec 2010.The fair value of the equipment at the inception of the lease was Sh.13.5
million. Three payments are due to the lessor at an amount of Sh. 5 million p.a beginning 31st Dec
2008.An additional sum of Sh. 1 million is paid annually by the lessee for insurance. ABC Ltd
guarantees a Sh. 1 million residue value on 31st Dec 2010 to the lessor ABC Ltd incremental
borrowing rate is 10% and XYZ Ltd implicit rate is unknown. The salvage value of the equipment
was Sh.100, 000.
Required:
i. Relevant journal entries to record the above transactions in the book of ABC Ltd.
ii. Prepare the balance sheet extract as at 31st Dec 2008 to 31st Dec 2010.
SOLUTION
Steps to be followed:
1. The classification: - The lease should be classified as a finance lease since the lease term
equals to the economic useful life.
2. PV of minimum lease payment Vs. fair value
–( . )
- Annual lease 3,000,000 × 5 = 11.372,360
.
- Guaranteed residual value 1m x (1 + 0.1)-3 = 751,315
PV of minimum lease payment 13,185,575
13,185,575
= 98%
13,500,000
The lease should be classified as a finance lease since the PV of minimum lease payment
approximately same as the fair value.
om
3. Journal entry on 1st Jan 2008
.c
ya
en
Dr. Leased asset 13,185,575
k
ea
Cr. Obligation under finance lease 13,185,575
om
To record the inception of a finance lease in the books of the lessee
.s
w
w
4. Repayment schedule
w
Period Cash Finance cost Obligation Bal. of
payment 10% period obligation
At inception - - - 13,185,575
31st Dec 08 5,000,000 13,180,558 3,681,442 9,504,133
31st Dec 09 5,000,000 950,413 4,049,587 5,454,546
31st Dec 10 5,000,000 545,455 4,454,545 1,000,000
5. Depreciation charge
13,185,575
= 4, 361, 858
3
Journal Entries
om
.c
Assets 2008 2009
ya
Leased assets 13,185,575 13,185,575
ken
Accumulated depreciation (4,361,858) (8,723,716)
ea
om
8,823,717 4,461,859
.s
Non-Current Liabilities -
w
Obligation under finance lease 5,454,546
w
w
Current Liabilities 4,049,587 5,454,546
2. Leverage Leases
A leveraged lease is a finance lease which has all the following characteristics:
It involves at least three parties; a lessee, a lessor and one or more long term creditors
The creditor’s recourse to the lessor in the event of default is restricted to the proceeds from
the disposal of the leased asset and any unremitted rentals relating thereto; and
The lessor’s investment in the lease declines in the early years of the lease and rises in later
years before its final elimination.
This is used in those cases where huge capital outlays are required for acquiring assets. In this type
also, the lessee makes contract for periodical payments over the lease period and in turn is entitled to
use the asset over the period of time. Legal ownership of the leased asset remains with the lessor
who is, therefore, entitled to tax deductions such as depreciation and other allowances.
It is appropriate therefore, that the method of finance income recognition on leveraged lease should
take account of the cash flows resulting from the tax benefits. It is proposed to define leveraged
leases and require that finance income from such leases should be recognized using the net cash
investment method.
The net cash investment in the lease is the balance of the cash outflows and inflows in respect of the
lease, excluding flows relating to insurance, maintenance and similar costs rechargeable to the
lessee. The cash outflow includes payments made to acquire that asset, tax payments, interest and
principal on third party financing. Inflows include rentals receipts, receipts from residual values and
grants, tax credits and other savings or repayments arising from the lease.
Under the net cash investment, a lessor recognizes finance income based on a pattern reflecting a
constant periodic return on its net cash investment outstanding in respect of the finance lease.
Lease rentals relating to the accounting period, excluding costs for services, are applied against gross
investment in the lease to reduce the principal and the unearned finance income. Hence, this method
usually involves using a net-of-tax basis for the allocation of income.
The net cash investment method is often considered to be the most appropriate method of accounting
for finance income from lease that have been entered into largely on the basis of the tax benefits that
are expected to flow from the lease.
om
Net Investment Method
.c
ya
The net investment in the lease is the gross investment in the lease less any unearned finance
ken
income. Remaining unearned income is allocated to revenue over the lease term so as to produce a
ea
constant periodic rate of return on the net investment in the lease. The use of the net investment
om
method is usually supported on the basis that the lessor earns income for lending money to the
.s
w
lessee, which at any particular time is the amount of the outstanding net investment in a lease.
w
3. Operating Or (Cancellable Lease) w
A lease is classified as an operating lease if it does not secure for the lessor the recovery of his
capital outlay plus a return on the funds invested during the lease term. Therefore, the asset should
be treated by the lessor as a fixed asset and rentals receivable should be included in income over the
lease term.
Costs, including depreciation, incurred in earning the rental income should be charged to income.
Initial direct costs incurred by lessor in negotiating and arranging the lease should be expensed in
the year in which they are incurred.
Lease rentals in the books of the lessee should be accounted for on accrual basis over the lease term
so as to recognise an appropriate charge in this respect in the profit and loss account with a separate
disclosure thereof. The excess of lease rentals paid over the amounts accrued in respect thereof
should be treated as prepaid lease rental and vice versa.
Financial Accounting Standards Board and International Accounting Standards Committee have
issued a number of guidelines in this regard. The following are the factors to be disclosed in the
financial statements under operating lease by the lessee:
Future minimum rental payment required as on date on the presentation of the balance sheet,
both as aggregate and year wise for the succeeding 5 years
The total minimum rental from lease to be received in future on sub-leases and
Rental expenses for the period to which the income statement relates, classifying the amount
into minimum rental, consignment rental and sub-lease rentals
For finance lease, the gross amount of assets as on the date of balance sheet distinguishing according
to nature and functions disclosed. The amount of accumulated amortization expenses should be
disclosed in full. Again the total amount of future lease payments due in aggregate and for each year
for the succeeding five years is to be stated.
Accounting treatment
The operating lease payments excluding the cost of services i.e. insurance and maintenance cost are
om
recognised as an expense on a straight line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis
.c
that is more representative of the time pattern of the users benefits can be determined.
ya
ken
In the books of the lessee
ea
om
.s
i. The lessee will not recognize the leased asset in the statement of financial position.
w
w
ii. Rentals of operating lease should be charged to P&L on a straight line basis over the term of
w
the lease.
iii. Any difference between the amounts charged and paid should be adjusted to prepayments or
accruals.
iv. Any incentives given by the lessor should also be recognized over the life of the lease on a
straight line basis.
ILLUSTRATION 1
Leasing ltd had entered into a 6 year lease for a factory building. The lease period was agreed for 6
years since Leasing Ltd felt that at the end of that time period they would have expanded to a certain
extent that would require a larger premise. When leasing Ltd entered into the lease agreement on 1 st
January 2008,their business was experiencing cash flow problems, the leaser being reasonably
certain that leasing Ltd.’s cash flows would improve in future agreed to charge a lower rental in the
first 2 years and then increase the rent for the remaining 4 years. The lease rental P.a for the first 2
years was
Sh. 500,000 and the lease rental p.a for the remaining 4 years was Sh. 800,000.
Required:
SOLUTION
1. Classification
om
.c
3. Annual lease payment
ya
en
4,200,000
k
= . 700 000 .
ea
6
om
.s
w
4. Journal entries
w
w
2008 2009
Following factors are to be disclosed by the lessor under operating lease in financial
statements:
He will recognize the asset as a non-current asset in its statement of financial position and
depreciation in the normal way.
Rental income from operating leases will be recognized in P&L on a straight line basis over
the term of the lease.
Any difference between the amounts charged and paid should be adjusted to receivables or
deferred incomes
The initial direct cost of the lease could be spread over the life of the lease or charged when
incurred.
Any incentive given by the lessor should be recognized over the life of the lease on a straight
line basis.
om
.c
ya
When insurance/maintenance/taxes are paid
en
Dr: Insurance/maintenance/taxes A/c
k
ea
Cr: cash A/c
om
.s
w
w
w
Calculation of interest
The rate of interest implicit in the lease is the incremental rate of interest that would arise if the lease
was to borrow the same amount or money elsewhere to acquire the asset in cash.
Where the rate of interest isn’t given the following two methods would be used to ascertain the rate:
i. Actuarial method
Under this method the amount of loan advanced to the lessee would be divided by the annual rental
payments and the resultant figure is checked.
For under the annuity table account base period. The loan advanced is usually the cash price or the
lower of the fair value and the present value(pv) of the minimum lease payment less any deposits.
It’s normally applicable where actuarial method isn’t possible. It approximates the exact rates as
would be ascertained by the actuarial method.
Under this method the total interest payable on the lease agreement is spread in the years of the lease
term according to the weights.
The amount of interest apportioned for any given year would be divided by the balance of the
principle to ascertain the rate of interest.
ILLUSTRATION
On 1/1/2010 Bujumbura ltd a wine merchant owned by Qatar in ivory coast buys a small bottling &
leveling machine from Bagbor ltd co. under finance lease.The cash price of the machine was
sh.7,710,000 while the amount to be paid was sh.10,000,000.The agreement required an immediate
repayment of sh.2,000,000 with balance being settled in four equal annual installments commencing
1/12/2010.The interest charge was 15% p.a calculated on the remaining balance of the liability
during each accounting period
Required;
a) Loan armotisation schedule
b) Calculate interest using actuarial method
SOLUTION
Interest calculation Sh
om
.c
Amount paid in cash 7,710,000
ya
Less;downpayment
en
(2,000,000)
k
Amount loaned 5,710,000
ea
om
Interest for 2010 856,500
Less;installment to be paid(1st installment)
.s
(2,000,000)
w
w
Balance 31/12/2010 4,566,500
w
Interest 15%x 4,566,500 684,975
Less; 2nd installment (2000,000)
Balance 3,251,475
Interest 15%x3,251,475 487,721
Less;installment 3rd (2000,000)
balance 1,739,196
interest 15%x 1,739,19 260,879
less; 4th installment (2000,000)
NIL
Year amount at beginning instalments instalments paid principle amt bal b/d
2010 5,710,000 2,000,000 856,500 1,143,500 4,566,500
2011 4,566,500 2,000,000 684,975 1,315,025 3,251,475
2012 3,251,475 2,000,000 487,721 1,512,279 1,739,196
2013 1,739,196 2,000,000 260,879 1,739,121 -
LIABILITIES
2010
Non-current liabilities
Finance lease 3,251,475
Current liabilities
Finance lease 1,315,025
4,566,500
2011
Non-current liabilities
Finance lease 1,739,196
Current liability
Finance lease 1,512,279
3,251,475
Liabilities
2012
Current liability
Finance lease 1,739,121
om
Sale and Leaseback Transactions
.c
ya
en
In a sale and leaseback transaction, an asset is sold by a vendor and then the same asset is leased
k
ea
back to the same vendor. The lease payment and sale price are normally interdependent because they
om
are negotiated as part of the same package. The accounting treatment for the lessee or seller should
.s
be as follows, depending on the type of lease involved.
w
w
w
a) In a sale and leaseback transaction which results in a finance lease, any apparent profit or loss
(that is, the difference between the sale price and the previous carrying value) should be
deferred and amortized in the financial statements of the seller/lessee over the lease term. It
should not be recognized as income immediately.
b) If the leaseback is an operating lease:
i. Any profit or loss should be recognized immediately, provided it is clear that the transaction
is established at a fair value.
ii. Where the sale price is below fair value, any profit or loss should be recognized
immediately except that if the apparent loss is compensated by future lease payments at
below market price it should to that extent be deferred and amortized over the period for
which the asset is' expected to be used.
iii. If the sale price is above fair value, the excess over fair value should be deferred, and
amortized over the period over which the asset is expected to be used.
In addition, for an operating lease where the fair value of the asset at the time of the sale is less than
the carrying amount, the loss, (carrying value less fair value) should be recognized immediately.
The buyer or lessor should account for a sale and leaseback in the same way as other leases.
The disclosure requirements for both lessees and lessors should force disclosure of sale and
leaseback transactions, IAS 1 should be considered.
ILLUSTRATION
QUESTION 5
(a) Leasing is important to Holcombe, a public limited company as a method of financing the
business. The Directors feel that it is important that they provide users of financial statements with a
complete and understandable picture of the entity's leasing activities. They believe that the current
accounting model is inadequate and does not meet the needs of users of financial statements.
Holcombe has leased plant for a fixed term of six years and the useful life of the plant is 12 years.
The lease is non-cancellable, and there are no rights to extend the lease term or purchase the
machine at the end of the term. There are no guarantees of its value at that point. The lessor does not
have the right of access to the plant until the end of the contract or unless permission is granted by
Holcombe.
Fixed lease payments are due annually over the lease term after delivery of the plant, which is
maintained by Holcombe. Holcombe accounts for the lease as an operating lease but the directors are
om
unsure as to whether the accounting treatment of an operating lease is conceptually correct.
.c
ya
Required;
ken
ea
(i) Discuss the reasons why the current lease accounting standards may fail to meet the needs of
om
users and could be said to be conceptually flawed.
.s
w
(ii) Discuss whether the plant operating lease in the financial statements of Holcombe meets the
w
w
definition of an asset and liability as set out in Conceptual Framework for Financial
Reporting.
(b) Holcombe also owns an office building with a remaining useful life of 30 years. The carrying
amount of the building is shs.120 million and its fair value is shs.150 million. On 1 May 2004,
Holcombe sells the building to Brook, a public limited company, for its fair value and leases it back
for five years at an annual rental payable in arrears of shs.16 million on the last day of the financial
year (30 April). This is a fair market rental. Holcombe's incremental borrowing rate is 8%,
On 1 May 2004, Holcombe has also entered into a short operating lease agreement to lease another
building. The lease will last for three years and is currently shs.5 million per annum. However an
inflation adjustment will be made at the conclusion of leasing years 1 and 2. Currently inflation is
4% per annum.
Required;
i. Show the accounting entries in the year of the sale and lease back assuming that the operating
lease is recognized as an asset in the statement of financial position of Holcombe.
ii. State how the inflation adjustment on the short term operating lease should be dealt with in
the financial statements of Holcombe
SOLUTION
The different accounting treatment of finance and operating leases has been criticized for a number
of reasons.
om
.c
(1) Many users of financial statements believe that all lease contracts give rise to assets and
ya
en
liabilities that should be recognized in the financial statements of lessees. Therefore these
k
ea
users routinely adjust the recognized amounts in the statement of financial position in an
om
attempt to assess the effect of the assets and liabilities resulting from operating lease
.s
contracts.
w
w
(2) The split between finance leases and operating leases can result in similar transactions being
w
accounted for very differently, reducing comparability for users of financial statements.
(3) The difference in the accounting treatment of finance leases and operating leases also
provides opportunities to structure transactions so as to achieve a particular lease
classification.
It is also argued that the current accounting treatment of operating leases is inconsistent with the
definition of assets and liabilities in the lASB's Conceptual Framework. An operating lease contract
confers a valuable right to use a leased item. This right meets the Conceptual Framework's
definition of an asset, and the liability of the lessee to pay rentals meets the Conceptual
Framework's definition of a liability. However, the right and obligation are not recognized for
operating leases.
Lease accounting is scoped out of IAS 32, IAS 39 and IFRS 9, which means that there are
considerable differences in the treatment of leases and other contractual arrangements.
The IASB is addressing this matter. An Exposure Draft Leases was issued in August 2010. The
proposed changes would put in place a consistent approach to lease accounting for both lessees and
lessors - a 'right-of-use' approach. Among other changes, this approach would result in the liability
for payments arising under the lease contract and the right to use the underlying asset being included
in the lessee's statement of financial position, thus providing more complete and useful information
to investors and other users of financial statements.
The lASB Conceptual Framework definesan asset as 'a resource controlled by the entity as a result
of past events and from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity'.
Holcombe's leased plant would appear to meet this definition:
1. Holcombe has the right to use the leased plant as an economic resource, which is to generate
cash inflows or reduce cash outflows.
2. Holcombe can be said-to control the resource because the lessor does not have the right of
access to the plant until the end of the contract without Holcombe's permission.
3. The control results from past events that are the signing of the lease contract.
4. Future economic benefits are expected to flow to Holcombe during the lease term.
The Conceptual Framework definesa liability as 'a present obligation of the entity arising from
past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the entity of resources
embodying economic benefits'. Applying this to Holcombe's lease of plant:
om
1. There is a present obligation to pay rentals.
.c
2. The lessor has no contractual right (unless Holcombe breaches the contract) to take
ya
possession of the plant before the end of the contract, and similarly. Holcombe has no
ken
contractual right to terminate the contract and avoid paying rentals.
ea
om
3. The obligation to pay rentals arises from a past event, namely the signing of the lease.
.s
4. The obligation is expected to result in an outflow of economic benefits in the form of cash
w
payments.
w
w
In conclusion, the leased plant meets the Conceptual Frame work'sdefinition of a liability.
This is a sale and leaseback transaction involving an operating lease. It is assumed that the operating
lease is being treated as an asset, and will therefore be accounted for using the same principles as
IAS 17 currently uses for finance leases. It will be accounted for as follows in the financial
statements of Holcombe for the year ended 30 April 2005:
om
.c
Being recognition of payment of rentals
ya
ken
DEBIT Finance cost Kshs.5.11m
ea
CREDIT Lease obligation Kshs.5.11m
om
.s
w
Being recognition of interest expense (Kshs.63.89m ×8%)
w
w
DEBIT Depreciation expense Kshs.12.78m
CREDIT Operating lease asset Kshs.12.78m
Being recognition of depreciation of operating lease asset over five years (shs.63.89m ÷ 5)
In Holcombe's statement of financial position, the operating lease asset will be shown at a carrying
value of shs.63.89m (initial recognition) less shs.12.78m (depreciation) = shs.51.11.
Inflation adjustments are not included in the minimum lease payment calculations. Instead they are
effectively contingent rent, defined in IAS 17 Leases as 'that part of the rent that is not fixed in
amount, but based on the future amount of a factor that changes other than with the passage of time'.
They should be recognized in the period in which they are incurred.
Year1
Shs.5 million
Year 2
Shs.5 million plus (shs.5m×4%) = shs.5.2m
Year 3
Shs.5.2 million plus (shs.5.2m × 4%) = shs.5.408m
om
.c
(a) Permanent differences
ya
en
They do not reverse in any period as therefore they do not give rise to deferred tax e.g.
k
some items may be used in accounting profit yet they are not reflected for tax.
ea
om
.s
(b) Temporary difference
w
w
They reverse in the future therefore resulting into deferred tax.
w
Methods of accounting for income taxes, they are of two broad categories.
i. Actual taxes payable method/flow through method/nil provision
Accounts for current taxes at corporation tax rates
iii. Deferred tax accounting methods
Account for future tax consequences (deferred tax)
Temporary differences include differences between the fair values and the tax values of assets and
liabilities acquired and the effect of revaluing assets and liabilities acquired and the effect of
revaluing assets for accounting purposes.
Current and deferred tax is recognized in the income statement unless the tax arises from a
business combination that is an acquisition or a transaction or event that is recognized in
equity. The tax consequences which accompany a change in the tax status of an enterprise or
its controlling or significant shareholder should be taken to income, unless these consequences
directly relate to changes in the measured amount of equity.
Only those tax consequences that directly relate to changes in the measured amount of equity
in the same or different period should be charged or credited to equity and not taken to the
income statement.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities should be measured at the tax rates that are expected to
apply to the period when the asset is realized or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and
tax laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.
Discounting of deferred tax assets and liabilities is not permitted.
The measurement of deferred tax assets and liabilities should reflect the tax consequences that
would follow from the manner in which the enterprise expects, at the balance sheet date, to
recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities.
When a non-depreciable asset under IAS 16 (PPE) is re-valued, the deferred tax arising from
that revaluation is determined based on the tax applicable to the recovery of the carrying
amount of that asset through sale.
An enterprise should recognize a deferred tax asset for all deductible temporary differences to
the extent that it’s probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible
temporary difference can be utilized. The same principles apply to recognition of deferred tax
assets for unused tax losses carried forward.
For presentation purposes, current tax assets and liabilities should be offset if and only if the
enterprise has a legally enforceable right to set off and intends to either settle on a net basis, or
to realize the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. An enterprise is able to offset
deferred tax assets and liabilities if and only if it is able to offset current tax balances and the
deferred balances relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority.
Disclosures
om
Tax expense (income) must be shown separately on the face of the income statement, with
.c
ya
separate disclosure made of its major components and any tax expense (income) relating to
en
extra ordinary items.
k
ea
Tax expense (income) relating to the gain or loss on discontinuance for discontinued
om
operations and to the profit or loss from the ordinary activities of the discontinued operation
.s
w
for the period must also be disclosed.
w
w
An explanation is required of the relationship between tax expense (or income) and accounting
profit either of numerical reconciliation between the average effective tax rate and the
applicable tax rate. An explanation is required of any changes in the applicable tax rate(s)
compared to the previous period.
The aggregate amount of temporary differences for which both deferred tax assets and
liabilities have not been recognized (i.e. for unremitted “re-invested” earnings of subsidiaries
should be disclosed. For each type of temporary difference and for unused tax losses and
credits, disclosure is required of the amount of deferred tax assets and liabilities recognized
and the amount of deferred tax income or expense recognized.
The amount of any deferred tax asset and evidence supporting its recognition must be
disclosed when its utilization is dependent on future taxable profits in excess of the profits
arising from the reversal of existing taxable temporary differences, and the enterprise has
suffered a loss in the current or previous period in the tax jurisdiction to which the deferred tax
asset relates. Separate disclosure is also required of the aggregate current and deferred tax
relating to items that are charged or credited to equity.
In accounting for income taxes, the principle issue is how to account for the current tax liability as
well as the future tax consequences (deferred tax).
The accounting income is the aggregate income or loss for a particular period including extra
ordinary items based on accounting assumptions, principles and procedures reported to the
shareholders before deducting the related tax charge. Taxable income (tax adjusted profits) is the
income for a period on which tax is assessed or ascertained in accordance with the rules established
by the tax authorities and upon which a provision for tax is determined and paid.
The reasons behind the differences between the accounting profits and taxable profits may broadly
be classified into two;-
- Permanent differences
- Temporary differences
Permanent differences
Are differences that arise from the items that are considered in one calculation but excluded in the
other i.e. items of income and expenses being included in accounting profits but are excluded from
taxable profits.
om
.c
They do not reverse in any period therefore they do not give rise to deferred tax.
ya
ken
They usually arise from the following.
ea
om
a) Certain types of income recognized in determining the accounting profits but no assessed
.s
w
pretax purposes e.g. gains on disposed of capital assets, windfall gains, donations and
w
w
grants especially if not related to business.
iii) Certain types of expenditure recognized is determination of accounting profits but are not
allowed as expenses for tax purposes e.g. entertainment allowance not related to business
from expenditure, loss on disposal of capital assets etc.
Temporary differences
They reverse on the foresee period and therefore they give rise to deferred tax (future tax
consequences)
IAS 12 (Revised) defines temporary differences as differences between the carrying amount of
assets or liabilities in the statement of financial position and then tax base that are not of a
permanent nature.
The tax base of an asset or a liability is that amount attributed to that asset or liability for tax
purposes.
The carrying amount of an asset or a liability is the value of such asset or liability as per the draft
financial statements.
This is the amount that will be deductible for tax purposes against any factors taxable economic
benefit that will flow to the enterprise when it recovers the carrying amount of that asset. In other
words, this is the amount on which future capital allowances will be based.
NB: If the economic benefits will not be taxable, then the tax base of the asset equals to its carrying
amount.
ILLUSTRATION 1
An item of PPE costs Kshs 650,000 Kshs 275,000 WTA has already been deducted in the amount
and prior period for tax purposes. The revenue generated from the use of the asset is taxable if the
carrying amount of the item in the account is Kshs 520,000, what is its tax base?
om
.c
SOLUTION
ya
k en
Cost Accounts Tax
ea
Depreciation 650,000 650,000
om
(130,000) (275,000) WTA
.s
w
520,000 375,000 WDV
w
w
The tax base of the item is Kshs 375,000. This is because that will be allowable for tax purposes in
future when the taxable economic benefit flows into the enterprises shs 375,000 i.e. the amount on
which future WTA will be based.
Interest income receivable has a carrying amount of shs. 250,000. If the related finance income is
taxed on cash basis, what is the tax base of the interest income receivable?
SOLUTION
The tax base will be nil because the economic benefit that will flow to the enterprise from the
interest income receivable will be taxable when the related cash will be received. Therefore no
amount will be deductible or allowable against interest income receivable for tax purposes.
If the trade receivables have a carrying amount of shs 300,000, what is the taxation base for
the trade receivable?
SOLUTION
The tax base of trade receivables is the shs 300,000. This is because the economic benefits that will
accrue to the enterprise upon the recovery of trade receivables (receipt of cash) are not taxable
therefore the tax base is equal to the carrying amount.
A loan receivable has a carrying amount of shs 600,000. What is its tax base?
SOLUTION
The tax of the loan receivable is shs 600,000 because the benefits that will accrue for the repayment
of the loan are not taxable.
Inventory has a carrying amount of shs 320,000. What is its tax base?
SOLUTION
The tax base of the inventory is shs 320,000 because the amount that the tax authorities will allow
for tax purposes in future as opening stock shs 320,000
om
This is the carrying amount of a liability less any amount that will be deductible or allowable for tax
.c
purposes in respect of that liability in future periods.
ya
en
Tax base of a liability = carrying value –amounts deductible for tax purposes in respect in
k
ea
om
of a liability the liability in future
.s
w
w
w
NB : In case of revenue received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying
amount less any amount of revenue that will not be taxable in future periods.
ILLUSTRATIONS 2
1. Current liabilities of an enterprise included accruals for expenses with a carrying amount of shs.
200,000 which was deductible for tax purposes on cash basis. What is the tax base of the accruals?
SOLUTION
The tax base of accruals will be nil because the carrying amount is shs. 200,000 and the amount that
will be allowed for tax purposes in future when the cash will be paid is also sh. 200,000 (i.e. shs.
200,000 – shs. 200,000=0).
2. Revenue received in advance has a carrying value of shs. 160,000. The related revenue was taxed
on cash basis. What is the tax base of revenue received in advance?
SOLUTION
The tax base of revenue received in advance is nil. This is because the carrying amount is sh.
160,000 and there is no amount of revenue that will be taxable in the future i.e. the revenue was
assessed for tax purposes when it was received in advance on cash basis.
3. A loan payable has a carrying amount of sh. 600.000. What is its tax base?
SOLUTION
The tax base of loan payable is sh. 600,000. This is because the carrying amount is sh. 600,000 and
there is no amount that will be allowable in respect of loan payable for tax purposes in the future.
Some items have a tax base but are not recognized as assets or liabilities e.g. research costs are
recognized as an expense in determination of a/c profit in the period in which they are incurred but
may not be permitted as allowable expenses in determination of taxable profit until a later date. This
gives rise to a temporary difference.
om
(a) Taxable temporary differences
.c
(b) deductible temporary differences
ya
ken
1. Taxable Temporary Difference
ea
om
There are differences that will result in taxable amounts in the future when the carrying amounts of
.s
w
the assets are recovered or the liabilities are settled. They give rise to deferred tax liability balances
w
w
at the year end.
Deferred tax liabilities are amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of taxable
temporary differences.
IAS 12 (Revised) requires that a deferred tax liability be recognized for all taxable temporary
differences except to the extent that the deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of
good will or the initial recognition of an asset or a liability in a transaction in which either is not a
business combination or at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting profits nor the
taxable profits.
- Interest revenue received in arrears and included in accounting profit on the basis of time
apportionment. It is included in taxable profit, however, on a cash basis.
- Sale of goods revenue is included in accounting profit when the goods are delivered, but only
included in taxable profit when cash is received.
- Depreciation of an asset may be accelerated for tax purposes. When new assets are purchased,
allowances may be available against taxable profits which exceed the amount of depreciation
chargeable on the assets in the financial accounts for the year of purchase.
- Development costs which have been capitalized will be amortized in profit or loss, but they
were deducted in full from taxable profit in the period in which they were incurred.
- Prepaid expenses have already been deducted on a cash basis in determining the taxable profit
of the current or previous periods.
· Depreciation of an asset is not deductible for tax purposes. No deduction will be available for
tax purposes when the asset is sold/ scrapped.
· A borrower records a loan at proceeds received (amount due at maturity) less transaction
costs.
· The carrying amount of the loan is subsequently increased by amortization of the transaction
costs against accounting profit. The transaction costs were, however, deducted for tax
om
purposes in the period when the loan was first recognised.
.c
· A loan payable is measured on initial recognition at net proceeds (net of transaction costs).
ya
en
The transaction costs are amortized to accounting profit over the life of the loan. Those
k
ea
transaction costs are not deductible in determining the taxable profit of future, current or prior
om
periods.
.s
· The liability component of a compound financial instrument (e.g. a convertible bond) is
w
w
measured at a discount to the amount repayable on maturity, after assigning a portion of the
w
cash proceeds to the equity component (see IAS 32). The discount is not deductible in
determining taxable profit.
Current investments or financial instruments are carried at fair value. This exceeds cost, but
no
equivalent adjustment is made for tax purposes.
Property, plant and equipment is revalued by an entity (under IAS 16), but no equivalent
adjustment is made for tax purposes. This also applies to long-term investments.
The standard also looks at the deferred tax implications of business combinations and
consolidations. will There are two circumstances given in the standards where the rule that all
taxable temporary differences give rise to a deferred tax liability does not apply.
a) The deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill.
b) The deferred tax liability arises from the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction
which:
Try to understand the reasoning behind the recognition of deferred tax liabilities on taxable
temporary
differences.
(a) When an asset is recognised, it is expected that its carrying amount will be recovered in
the form of economic benefits that flow to the entity in future periods.
(b) If the carrying amount of the asset is greater than its tax base, then taxable economic
benefits will also be greater than the amount that will be allowed as a deduction for tax
purposes.
(c) The difference is therefore a taxable temporary difference and the obligation to pay the
resulting income taxes in future periods is a deferred tax liability.
(d) As the entity recovers the carrying amount of the asset, the taxable temporary difference
will reverse and the entity will have taxable profit.
(e) It is then probable that economic benefits will flow from the entity in the form of tax
payments, and so the recognition of all deferred tax liabilities (except those excluded
above) is required by IAS 12.
om
ILLUSTRATION 3
.c
ya
en
Taxable Temporary Differences
k
ea
om
A company purchased an asset costing shs.1,500 at the end of 2008 the carrying amount is
.s
shs.1,000. The cumulative depreciation for tax purposes is shs.900 and the current tax rate is 25%.
w
w
w
Required;
SOLUTION
Firstly, what is the tax base of the asset? It is shs.1,500 – shs.900 = shs.600.
In order to recover the carrying value of shs.1,000, the entity must earn taxable income of shs.1,000,
but it will only be able to deduct shs.600 as a taxable expense. The entity must therefore pay income
tax of shs.400 × 25% = shs.100 when the carrying value of the asset is recovered.
The entity must therefore recognize a deferred tax liability of shs.400×25% = shs.100, recognizing
the difference between the carrying amount of shs.1,000 and the tax base of shs.600 as a taxable
temporary difference.
Revalued assets
Under IAS 16 assets may be revalued. If this affects the taxable profit for the current period, the tax
base of the asset changes and no temporary difference arises.
If, however (as in some countries), the revaluation does not affect current taxable profits, the tax
base of the asset is not adjusted. Consequently, the taxable flow of economic benefits to the entity as
the carrying value of the asset is recovered will differ from the amount that will be deductible for tax
purposes. The difference between the carrying amount of a revalued asset and its tax base is a
temporary difference and gives rise to a deferred tax liability or asset.
A temporary difference can arise on initial recognition of an asset or liability, e.g. if part or all of the
cost of an asset will not be deductible for tax purposes, The nature of the transaction which led to the
initial recognition of the asset is important in determining the method of accounting for such
temporary differences.
If the transaction affects either accounting profit or taxable profit, an entity will recognise any
deferred tax liability or asset. The resulting deferred tax expense or income will be recognised in
profit or loss,
Where a transaction affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit it would be normal for an
entity to recognise a deferred tax liability or asset and adjust the carrying amount of the asset or
liability by the same amount (unless exempted by IAS 12 as under Paragraph 3,3 above), However,
IAS 12 does not permit this recognition of a deferred tax asset or liability as it would make the
financial statements less transparent. This will be the case both on initial recognition and
om
subsequently, nor should any subsequent changes in the unrecognized deferred tax liability or asset
.c
as the asset is depreciated be made.
ya
ken
2. Deductible temporary differences
ea
om
.s
They are temporary differences that will result in amounts that are tax deductible in the future when
w
the carrying amounts of assets are recovered or the liabilities are settled.
w
They give rise to deferred tax asset balances at the year end. w
Deferred tax assets are amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of;
1. The carrying amounts of assets are less than their tax bases.
2. The carrying amounts of liabilities exceed their tax bases
Retirement benefit costs (pension costs) are deducted from accounting profit as service is
provided by the employee. They are not deducted in determining taxable profit until the entity
pays either retirement benefits or contributions to a fund. (This may also apply to similar
expenses.)
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 66
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Current investments or financial instruments may be carried at fair value which is less than cost, but
no equivalent adjustment is made for tax purposes.
om
.c
ya
Other situations discussed by the standard relate to business combinations and consolidation
ken
ea
Recognition of deductible temporary differences
om
.s
As with temporary taxable differences, there are also circumstances where the overall rule for
w
w
recognition of deferred tax asset is not allowed.
w
This applies where the deferred tax asset arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a
transaction which is not a business combination, and at the time of the transaction, affects neither
accounting nor taxable profit/ tax loss.
Let us layout the reasoning behind the recognition of deferred tax assets arising from deductible
temporary differences.
a) When a liability is recognised, it is assumed that its carrying amount will be settled in the
form of outflows of economic benefits from the entity in future periods.
b) When these resources flow from the entity, part or all may be deductible in determining
taxable
profits of a period later than that in which the liability is recognised.
c) A temporary tax difference then exists between the carrying amount of the liability and its
tax base.
d) A deferred tax asset therefore arises, representing the income taxes that will be recoverable
in future periods when that part of the liability is allowed as a deduction from taxable profit.
e) Similarly, when the carrying amount of an asset is less than its tax base, the difference gives
rise to a deferred tax asset in respect of the income taxes that will be recoverable in future
periods.
ILLUSTRATION 4
Paratha Co recognises a liability of shs.10,000 for accrued product warranty costs on 31 December
2007.
These product warranty costs will not be deductible for tax purposes until the entity pays claims.
The tax rate is 25%.
Required
SOLUTION
What is the tax base of the liability? It is nil (carrying amount of shs.10,000 less the amount that will
be deductible for tax purposes in respect of the liability in future periods).
When the liability is settled for its carrying amount, the entity's future taxable profit will be reduced
by shs.10,000 and so its future tax payments by shs.10,000 × 25% = shs.2,500.
The difference of shs.10,000 between the carrying amount (shs.10,000) and the tax base (nil) is a
om
deductible temporary difference. The entity should therefore recognise a deferred tax asset of
.c
shs.10,000 × 25% = shs.2,500 provided that it is probable that the entity will earn sufficient taxable
ya
profits in future periods to benefit from a reduction in tax payments.
ken
ea
Taxable profits in future periods
om
.s
w
When can we be sure that sufficient taxable profit will be available against which a deductible
w
w
temporary difference can be utilised? IAS 12 states that this will be assumed when sufficient taxable
temporary differences exist which relate to the same taxation authority and the same taxable entity.
These should be expected to reverse as follows.
a) In the same period as the expected reversal of the deductible temporary difference.
b) In periods into which a tax loss arising from the deferred tax asset can be carried back
or forward. Only in these circumstances is the deferred tax asset recognised, in the
period in which the deductible temporary differences arise.
What happens when there are insufficient taxable temporary differences (relating to the same
taxation
authority and the same taxable entity)? It may still be possible to recognize the deferred tax asset,
but only to the following extent.
a) Taxable profits are sufficient in the same period as the reversal of the deductible temporary
difference (or in the periods into which a tax loss arising from the deferred tax asset can be
carried forward or backward), ignoring taxable amounts arising from deductible temporary
differences arising in future periods.
b) Tax planning opportunities exist that will allow the entity to create taxable profit in the
appropriate periods.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 68
FINANCIAL REPORTING
With reference to (b), tax planning opportunities are actions that an entity would take in order to
create or increase taxable income in a particular period before the expiry of a tax loss or tax credit
carry forward. For example, in some countries it may be possible to increase or create taxable profit
by electing to have interest income taxed on either a received or receivable basis, or deferring the
claim for certain deductions taxable profit.
In any case, where tax planning opportunities advance taxable profit from a later period to an earlier
period, the utilization of a tax loss or a tax credit carry forward will still depend on the existence of
future taxable profit from sources other than future originating temporary differences.
If an entity has a history of recent losses, then this is evidence that future taxable profit may not be
available
An entity may have unused tax losses or credits (i.e. which it can offset against taxable profits) at the
end of a period. Should a deferred tax asset be recognised in relation to such amounts? IAS 12 states
that a deferred tax asset may be recognised in such circumstances to the extent that it is probable
future profit will be available against which the unused tax losses/credits can be utilized.
The criteria for recognition of deferred tax assets here is the same as for recognizing deferred tax
assets arising from deductible differences. The existence of unused tax losses is strong evidence,
om
however, that future taxable profit may not be available. So where an entity has a history of recent
.c
tax losses, a deferred tax asset arising from unused tax losses or credits should be recognised only to
ya
en
the extent that the entity has sufficient taxable temporary differences or there is other convincing
k
evidence that sufficient taxable profit will be available against which the unused losses/credits can
ea
om
be utilized by the entity.
.s
w
In these circumstances, the following criteria should be considered when assessing the probability
w
w
that
taxable profit will be available against which unused tax losses/credits can be utilized.
To the extent that it is not probable that taxable profit will be available, the deferred tax asset is not
recognised.
For all unrecognized deferred tax assets, at each year end an entity should reassess the availability of
future taxable profits and whether part or all of any unrecognized deferred tax assets should now be
recognised. This may be due to an improvement in trading conditions which is expected to continue.
IAS 12(Revised) additionally requires that a deferred tax asset be recognized for all deductible
temporary differences to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against
which deductible temporary differences will be utilized until the deferred tax assets arises from the
initial recognition of an asset or a liability in a transaction that is not a business combination or at the
time of the transaction affects neither the accounting profits nor the taxable profits.
Timing differences
Some temporary differences arise when incomes and expenses are included in accounting profits in
one period but are included in the taxable profits in another period. Some temporary differences that
arise when incomes and expenses as included in accounting profits in one period but are included in
taxable profits in a different period.
They are said to originate where there is a benefit in terms of tax savings arising i.e. where the tax
depreciation are less than the accounting depreciation. This implies a tax income.
1. Interest revenue or expense included in accounting profits on accrual basis but included in
taxable profits on cash basis.
2. Depreciation used in determining taxable profits may differ from the one used in determining
the accounting profits.
om
3. Development costs may be capitalized and amortized over future periods in determining the
.c
accounting profits but may be deducted in determining the taxable profits in the period in
ya
en
which they are incurred.
k
ea
om
Additionally, temporary differences arise when,
.s
w
i. The cost of a business combination is allocated by recognizing the identifiable assets acquired
w
w
and liabilities assumed at their fair value but no adjustment is made for tax purposes.
ii. Assets are revalued and no corresponding adjustments are made to their tax bases.
iii. The tax base of an asset or a liability on initial recognition differs from the initial carrying
amount. E.g. when an entity benefit from a taxable government grant related to the asset
interest joint venture becomes.
iv. The carrying amount of investment in subsidiaries, branches, associates or interest in joint
ventures becomes Goodwill arising from business combination. Goodwill has a tax base of nil
and therefore the difference between the carrying amount of goodwill of the tax base of nil is
a taxable temporary difference that will give rise to a tax liability difference.
However, IAS 12 (Revised) does not allow the recognition of the resulting deferral tax liability
arising from good will.
Income tax expense is the aggravate amount included in determination of profit or loss for the period
in respect of current tax is deferred tax.
The income tax charge for the year recognized is limited to the tax payable (legal tax liability) for
that period.
No provision (nil provision) is made for deferred tax for the period.
The extent of and the potential tax effects of temporary differences (future tax consequences) are
sometimes disclosed in the financial statements by a way of notes to the accounts.
The main advantage of flow through method is that it is straight forward and concurs with the
simplicity cannon of taxation.
The main set back of this method is that it can lead to large fluctuations of tax charge and does not
allow for recognition of temporary differences that may give rise to deferred tax liabilities in the
om
future.
.c
ya
Deferred Tax Accounting Methods
ken
ea
Under these methods, the income tax is considered to be an expense incurred by an organization in
om
earning its income thus the tax charge is to be recognized in the same period that the related
.s
w
revenues is recognized.
w
w
The tax effect of temporary differences (deferred tax) is incorporated in the income tax charge for
the year in the income statement of financial position. The deferred tax element in the income tax
charge may be calculated under;
a) Full provision
b) Partial provision
Full provision
This approach requires that full tax effects of temporary differences be recognized whether the
temporary differences will reverse in future or not. This is the most preferred approach under AIS 12
(Revised) of accounting for deferred taxes.
The effects of future taxes are accounted for in full i.e. the contingencies that may or may not arise
are recognized or accounted for in the financial statements.
The full provision approach concurs with the prudence concept of accounting where expenses or
losses are recognized whether incurred or contingent.
Partial provision
The partial provision method also starts from the premise that the future reversal of timing
differences gives rise to a tax asset or liability. However, rather than focusing on the individual
components of the tax computation, the partial provision method emphasizes the interaction of those
components in a single net assessment. To the extent that timing differences are expected to
continue in future (i.e. the existing timing differences being replaced by future timing differences as
they reverse), the tax is viewed as being deferred permanently.
Where, for example, fixed asset expenditure attracts tax deductions before the fixed assets are
depreciated, timing differences arise. The timing differences increase with time under conditions of
inflation or expansion, with the result that new timing differences more than replace those that
reverse. In consequence, effective tax rates are reduced. The partial provision method allows the
lower effective tax rates to be reflected in the profit and loss account, to the extent that the reduction
om
is not expected to reverse in future years.
.c
ya
en
The attraction of the partial provision method is that it reflects an entity’s ongoing effective tax rate.
k
It results in tax charges that reflect the amount of tax that it is expected will actually be paid and
ea
om
excludes amounts that are expected to be deferred ‘permanently’.
.s
w
w
Reasons for rejecting the partial provision method
w
The partial provision method allowed companies to avoid creating provisions for tax that they
argued they were unlikely to pay. However, by the early 1990s, concerns were being expressed
about the method and the way in which it was being applied. It was noted in particular that:
1. The recognition rules and anticipation of future events were subjective and inconsistent with
the principles underlying other aspects of accounting.
2. The partial provision method had not been regarded as appropriate for dealing with the long-
term deferred tax assets associated with provisions for post-retirement benefits. As a result,
SSAP 15 had been amended in 1992 to permit such assets to be accounted for on a full
provision basis. The amendment introduced inconsistencies into SSAP 15.
3. There were variations in the way in which SSAP 15 was applied in practice. Different
entities within the same industry and with similar prospects seemed to take quite different
views on the levels of provisions necessary. There was evidence that some companies
provided for deferred tax in full for simplicity’s sake rather than because their circumstances
required it. The different approaches being taken reduced the comparability of financial
statements.
4. Because of its recognition rules and anticipation of future events, the partial provision
method was increasingly being rejected by standard-setters in other countries. The US
Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) had issued a standard FAS 109 ‘Accounting
for Income Taxes’ requiring full provision. The International Accounting Standards
Committee (IASC) had published proposals for similar requirements and other standard –
setters had started to move in the same direction.
When rejecting the partial provision method, the FASB and IASC argued in particular that:
a) Every tax timing difference represented a real liability, since everyone would reverse and,
whatever else happened, an entity would pay more tax in future as a result of the reversal than
it would have done in the absence of the timing difference.
b) It was only the impact of new timing differences arising in future that prevented the total
liability from reducing. It was inappropriate (and inconsistent with other areas of accounting)
to take account of future transactions when measuring an existing liability.
c) The assessment of the liability using the partial provision method relied on management
intentions regarding future events. Standard setters were uncomfortable with this, having
already embodied in a number of other standards the principle that liabilities be determined on
the basis of obligations rather than management decisions or intentions.
In view of the criticisms of the partial provision method, the Board decided to review SSAP 15. In
1995 it published a Discussion Paper, ‘Accounting for Tax’. The Discussion Paper proposed that
SSAP 15 should be replaced with an FRS requiring full provision for deferred tax.
Most respondents to the Discussion Paper opposed the move to full provision at that stage,
om
preferring instead to retain the partial provision method. In the meantime however, IASC had
.c
approved its standard, IAS12 (revised, 1996) ’Income Taxes’, which required use of the full
ya
en
provision method. The Board reconsidered the arguments and arrived at the view that:
k
ea
Whilst it did not agree with all of the criticisms of the partial provision method expressed
om
internationally and could see the logic for all three methods of accounting for tax, it shared
.s
some of the concerns regarding the subjectivity of the partial provision method and its
w
w
reliance on future events; and
w
As more companies adopted international accounting standards, the partial provision method
would become less well understood and accepted, particularly as it was regarded as less
prudent than the internationally accepted method. Hence, the retention of the partial provision
method in the UK could damage the credibility of UK financial reporting.
The deferred tax accounting methods may further be grouped into two main categories;
1. Deferral method
2. Liability method
1. Deferral method
The tax effects of temporary differences (deferred tax) originating in the previous period as well as
reversing in the current period are generally determined using the tax rate originally applied.
The deferred tax balance in the statement of financial PSN is viewed as a deferred tax revenue or
expenditure and therefore it is not adjusted to reflect any change in the tax rate or imposition of new
taxes.
Under this method, the income tax expenses for the year comprises of two elements.
NB : IAS 12 (revised) prohibits the use of the deferral method in accounting for deferred taxation.
om
2. Liability method
.c
ya
It is considered to be the most appropriate method of accounting for future taxes payable when
en
calculating the deferred tax balance.
k
ea
om
This method differs from the deferral method in the sense that the balances appearing in the deferred
.s
w
tax account is considered either to be a liability for the taxes payable in the future or an asset
w
w
representing prepaid taxes. The deferred tax balance must therefore be adjusted from time to time to
represent the actual liability or prepaid taxes as at the reporting date.
Under this method, the income tax charge for the year comprises of the following:
(a) The provision for taxes payable for the year (current tax)
(b) The amount of taxes expected to be payable in the future or considered to be prepaid in
respect of temporary differences originally or reversing during the period.
(c) The adjustments to the deferred tax balances in the statement of financial position necessary
to reflect either a change in the tax rate or imposition of new taxes.
(a) Income statement based liability method – which focuses on timing differences. It analysis
the items of incomes and expenses in accounting for deferred taxation which either originate
or reverse.
(b) Statement of financial position based liability method – which focuses on temporary
differences other than timing differences
It accounts for future tax consequences through the analysis of assets and liabilities by comparing
their carrying amounts with their tax bases in determination of temporary differences which are
either taxable or deductable.
IAS 12 (revised) recommends the use of statement of financial position based liability method.
As period IAS 16 (PPE) where an item of Property, Plant and Equipment is revalued giving rise to a
revaluation surplus, the whole surplus may be realized on the retirement (derecognition) of such
item of Property, Plant and Equipment. In such a case, the revaluation surplus included in the equity
is transferred directly as a gain on disposal.
However, some of the revaluation surplus may be realized as the asset is being used by the
enterprise. This revaluation gain realized will be in terms of the increment in revenue generation by
the revalued asset.
Therefore a provision for future taxes should be made on this gain realized on the usage of the asset
as it is likely to reverse in the future. Therefore the advantage of providing for deferred tax on
revaluation gain is the amount of gain transferred direct to equity is not assessed for tax purposes in
the income statement.
om
.c
ya
Argument against providing for deferred tax on revaluation of fixed assets.
ken
ea
Where the asset has been revalued downwards giving rise to a revaluation loss, the loss is not
om
considered as an allowance expense for tax purposes and therefore the provision for deferred tax on
.s
w
revaluation loss is not appropriate.
w
ILLUSTRATION 5 w
a) Maji Limited had a deferred tax liability of Sh. 105 million as at 1 June 2010. During the year
ended 31 May 2011, the company had the following items with regard to estimating deferred tax:
1. The carrying amount of property, plant and equipment as at 31 May 2011 was Sh.980 million.
This included some buildings which were revalued upwards by Sh 50 million at 31 May 2010
which had a remaining useful life of 10 years at that date. The company's accounting policy is
to treat revaluation surpluses as realised on disposal of the revalued assets. The tax base of
property, plant and equipment as at 31 May 2011 was Sh 640 million.
2. Deferred development expenditure amounted to Sh.45 million at year end (Sh.40 million as at
31 May 2010). Sh.10 million of additional development expenditure was incurred during the
year and the remaining difference between 2010 and 2011 figures relates to development
expenditure amortised for products that have started being commercially produced. All
development expenditure is allowed for tax purposes.
3. Included in current assets is an amount of Sh.40 million due in respect of some patent
royalties on one of the company's older products which is now being produced by other
companies. Patent royalties are taxed only when received.
4. The company’s tax rate proposals.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 75
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Required:
i) The deferred tax balance as at 31 May 2011 and the relevant journal entry.
ii) The directors of Maji Limited have proposed that deferred tax should be discounted and also
provided on the share of post-acquisition profits in its subsidiary and associate companies.
SOLUTION
a) i.
om
Increase in deferred tax 22.5M
.c
ya
ken
ea
Journal entry:
om
Dr. Income statement Sh 22.5M Sh. 21
.s
w
CR Referred tax account 1.5
w
w
CR Revaluation reserve (5 x 30%)
NB: Annual depreciation charge on revalued amount = =5
This is not allowed under IAS 12 “Income Taxes” because deferred tax balance is not exactly known
in terms of cash and time.
The holding company has a potential tax liability on post-acquisition profits because there is a
possibility of receiving them when dividends are paid. However, IAS 12 prohibits providing
deferred tax in the case of subsidiary because the holding company has control on when these should
be paid. For Associates, a provision can be made.
The objective of this Standard is to ensure that appropriate recognition criteria and measurement
bases are applied to provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets and that sufficient
information is disclosed in the notes to enable users to understand their nature, timing and amount.
IAS 37 prescribes the accounting and disclosure for all provisions, contingent liabilities and
contingent assets, except:
(b) Those resulting from executory contracts, except where the contract is onerous. Executory
contracts are contracts under which neither party has performed any of its obligations or
both parties have partially performed their obligations to an equal extent;
(c) Those covered by another Standard.
Provisions
Recognition
om
(a) An entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;
.c
(b) It is probable (ie more likely than not) that an outflow of resources embodying economic
ya
benefits will be required to settle the obligation; and
ken
(c) A reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation. The Standard notes that it is
ea
only in extremely rare cases that a reliable estimate will not be possible.
om
.s
w
In rare cases it is not clear whether there is a present obligation. In these cases, a past event is
w
w
deemed to give rise to a present obligation if, taking account of all available evidence, it is more
likely than not that a present obligation exists at the balance sheet date.
Measurement
The amount recognised as a provision shall be the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle
the present obligation at the balance sheet date. The best estimate of the expenditure required to
settle the present obligation is the amount that an entity would rationally pay to settle the obligation
at the balance sheet date or to transfer it to a third party at that time.
Where the provision being measured involves a large population of items, the obligation is estimated
by weighting all possible outcomes by their associated probabilities. Where a single obligation is
being measured, the individual most likely outcome may be the best estimate of the liability.
However, even in such a case, the entity considers other possible outcomes.
Contingent liabilities
(a) A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed only
by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within
the control of the entity; or
(b) At present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognised because:
(i) it is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be
required to settle the obligation; or
(ii) The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability.
An entity should not recognise a contingent liability. An entity should disclose a contingent liability,
unless the possibility of an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits is remote.
Contingent assets
A contingent asset is a possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be
confirmed only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the entity.
An entity shall not recognise a contingent asset. However, when the realisation of income is virtually
om
certain, then the related asset is not a contingent asset and its recognition is appropriate.
.c
ya
ken
ea
REVISION EXERCISE
om
.s
w
QUESTION 1
w
w
Julian recognized a deferred tax liability for the year end 31 December 2003 which related solely to
accelerated tax depreciation on property, plant and equipment at a rate 30%. The net book value of
the property, plant and equipment at that date was Shs. 310,000 and the tax written down value was
Shs. 230,000.
i) At the end of the year the carrying value of property, plant and equipment was Shs. 460,000
and their tax written down value was Shs. 270,000. During the year some items were revalued
by Shs. 90,000. No items had previously required revaluation. In the tax jurisdiction in which
Julian operates revaluations of assets do not affect the tax base of an asset or taxable profit.
Gains due to revaluations are taxable on sale.
ii) Julian began development of a new product during the year and capitalized Shs. 60,000 in
accordance with IAS 38. The expenditure was deducted for tax purposes as it was incurred.
None of the expenditure had been amortized by the year end.
iii) Julian's income statement showed interest income receivable of Shs. 55,000, but only Shs.
45,000 of this had been received by the year end. Interest income is taxed on a receipts basis.
iv) During the year, Julian made a provision of Shs. 40,000 to cover an obligation to clean up
some damage caused by an environmental accident. None of the provision had been used by
the year end. The expenditure will be tax deductible when paid.
The corporate income tax rate recently enacted for the following year is 30% (unchanged from the
previous year).
The current tax charge was calculated for the year as Shs. 45,000. .
Current tax is settled on a net basis with the national tax authority.
Required;
a) Prepare a table showing the carrying values, tax bases and temporary differences for each for
the items above at 31 December 2004.
b) Prepare the income statement and statement of financial position notes to the financial
statements relating to deferred tax for the year ended 31 December 2004.
Solution:
om
Property, plant and equipment 460 270 190
Development expenditure 60 60
.c
ya
Interest receivable (55 - 45) 10 10
en
Provision (40) (40)
k
ea
220
om
.s
b) Notes to the statement of financial position
w
w
w
Deferred tax liability
Sh ‘000’
Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes [(190 - 90)×30%] 30
Product development costs deducted from taxable-profit (60 ×30%) 18
Interest income taxable when received (10 ×30%) 3
Provision for environmental costs deductible when paid (40 × 30%) (12)
Revaluations (90 ×30%) 27
66
Sh ‘000’
At 1 January 2004 [(310 - 230) ×30%] 24
Amount charged to income statement (balancing figure) 15
Amount charged to equity (90 ×30%) 27
At 31 December 2004 (220×30%) 66
Sh ‘000’
Current tax 45
Deferred tax 15
60
QUESTION 2
IAS 32 “Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation” states that the purpose of the
disclosures required by this standard is to provide information that will enhance understanding of the
significance of on-balance-sheet and off-balance-sheet financial instruments to an enterprise’s
financial position, performance and cashflow and assist in assessing the amounts, timing and
certainty of future cashflows associated with those instruments.
State and briefly describe three types of financial risks described in the standard, in relation to
transactions in financial instruments.
Solution:
Price risk. There are three types of price risk. Namely:- currency risk, interest risk and market risk.
om
.c
ya
1. Currency risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument will fluctuate due to changes in
en
foreign exchange rates.
k
2. Interest risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument will fluctuate due to changes in market
ea
om
interest rates.
.s
3. Market risk is the risk that the value of a financial instrument will fluctuate as a result of changes in
w
market prices whether those changes are caused by factors specific to the individual security or its
w
w
issuer or factors affecting all securities traded in the market.
Credit risk: The risk that is partly to a financial instrument will fail to discharge an obligation and cause the
other party to incur a financial loss.
Liquidity risk (or funding risk): The risk that an enterprise will encounter difficulty in raising funds to
meet commitments associated with financial instruments.
Cash flow risk: The risk that future cash flows associated with a monetary financial instrument will
fluctuate in amount.
QUESTION 3
a) In the context of IAS 17 (Leases), briefly explain the meaning of the following terms:
i) Finance lease.
ii) Guaranteed residual value.
iii) Contingent rent.
b) Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. has entered into an agreement with a finance company,
to lease a machine for a four year period. Under the terms of the agreement, the machine is to be
made available to Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. on 1 January 2005, when an immediate
payment of Sh. 2,550,000 will be made, followed by seven semi-annual payments of an equivalent
amount.
The fair market price of the machine on 1 January 2005 is expected to be Sh. 16,320,000. The
estimated life of this type of machine is four years. The implicit rate of interest in the transaction is
6.94% payable semi-annually and the corporate tax rate is 30%. Silversands Manufacturing
Company Ltd. has a policy of depreciating machines of this type over a four year period on the
straight line basis.
Required:
i) Show how the above transactions will be reflected in the profit and loss account of
Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. for each of the four years ending 31 December
2005, 2006, 2007 and 2008.
ii) Balance sheet extracts of Silversands Manufacturing Company Ltd. as at 31 December 2005
and 2006.
(Use the actuarial method to allocate the interest charge)
om
.c
ya
ken
Solution:
ea
om
(a) In IAS 17 context:
.s
w
w
w
(i) Finance lease
This is a lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incident to ownership of an
asset. Title may or may not eventually be transferred.
- In the case of the lessee, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee or by
a party related to the lessee (the amount of the guarantee being the maximum amount that
could, in any event become payable).
- In the case of the lessor, that part of the residual value which is guaranteed by the lessee or by
a third party unrelated to the lessor who is financially capable of discharging the obligations
under the guarantee.
This is that portion of the lease payments that is not fixed in amount but is based on a factor other
than just the passage of time (e.g. percentage of sales, amount of usage, price indices and market
rates of interest).
Shs. ‘m’
Fair value of leased asset 16,320
Initial payment (2,550)
Balance 13,770
om
Payable (instalment) = 13,770
.c
ya
1 – (1 + 0.0347)- 7 = 2250
ken
0.0347
ea
om
.s
Change to P & L AC.
w
w
Year Expenses Cost Depreciation Total
w
2005 894 4080 4974
2006 640 4080 4720
2007 367 4080 4447
2008 75 4080 4155
om
2008 4,932.38 2,550 2,382.38 165.24 2,547.62
.c
2,547.62 2,550 (2.38) 2.38 NIL
ya
20,400 4,080
en
Fair value of leased asset 16 320
k
ea
=
Estimated useful life 4
om
.s
w
Gives sh.4 080 000 depreciation per annum
w
Charge to the profit and loss account w
Year Finance Depreciation Total Charge against Timing
charge Sh. ‘000’ taxable profits Difference
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
2005 1,800.64 4,080 5,880.64 5,100 780.64 O
2006 1,326.68 4,080 5,406.68 5,100 306.68 O
2007 785.06 4,080 4,865.06 5,100 (234.94) R
2008 167.62 4,080 4,247.62 5,100 (852.38) R
4,080__ 16,320 20,400 20,400 NIL
2005 2006
(b)(i) (b) (ii)
Sh. ‘000’ Shs. ‘000’
Balance sheet
Deferred taxation account 406.13 589.90
Non-current assets
Cost 16,320 16,320
Depreciation to date 4,080 8,160
Net book value 12,240 8,160
Leasing Commitments
om
Minimum leasing commitments
.c
ya
2005 5,100 -
en
2006 5,100 5,100
k
ea
2007 5,100 5,100
om
15,300 10,200
.s
Less: Finance allocated to future periods 2,279.36 905.42
w
w
13,206.64 9,294.58
w
Current obligations under finance leases 3,603.32 4,371.55
* Non-current obligations under finance leases 9,417.32 4,922.52
* Contingent liability 2,279.36 905.42
Based on amount on premature cancellation of contract = Interest allocated to future periods or otherwise
specifically stated in terms of the lease.
TOPIC 2
FURTHER ASPECTS OF PARTNERSHIPS
DISSOLUTION OF A PARTNERSHIP
Introduction:
The dissolution of partnership among all the partners of a firm is called the Dissolution of the Firm.
Dissolution of Partnership involves a change in the relation of partnership business, if the remaining
partners resolve to continue the concern. In such cases there will be a new partnership but the firm
will continue in a reconstituted form.
Dissolution of firm means complete breakdown of the relation of partnership among all the partners.
When all the partners resolve to dissolve the partnership, the dissolution of firm occurs, i.e. the firm
is wound up.
If the business comes to an end, it is said that the firm has been dissolved. Dissolution of firm means
the closing down of the business. Firm’s dissolution implies partnership dissolution but not vice
versa.
om
.c
ya
That is dissolution of partnership does not mean dissolution of firm, but the dissolution of firm
en
will be dissolved on any one of the following ways:
k
ea
om
(a) Dissolution by Agreement
.s
w
w
A firm may be dissolved at any time with the consent of all partners. For instance, when a firm does
w
not expect good prospects in the future, a firm can be dissolved by mutual consent of all partners.
A firm is compulsorily dissolved by operation of law when all the partners except one become
insolvent or when all the partners become insolvent or when business becomes illegal or when the
number of partners exceeds twenty in case of ordinary business or ten in case of banking.
A firm is dissolved, in the absence of contrary, in the event of any of the following
circumstances:
Where a partnership is at will, the firm may be dissolved by any partner giving notice in writing to
all the other partners of his intention to dissolve the firm.
The court is empowered to order the dissolution of a firm consequent on a suit by a partner in
the following cases:
om
the management, refusal to attend matters of business, absence of cooperation etc. among
.c
the partners. (The court has wide discretionary powers).
ya
ken
Liability for Acts Done After Dissolution
ea
om
.s
When a firm is dissolved a public notice must be given of the dissolution. If it is not done, the
w
partners continue to be liable as such to third parties for any act done by any of them after the disso-
w
w
lution, and in such a case, the act of a partner done after dissolution is deemed to be an act done
before the dissolution.
Settlement of Accounts
As soon as a firm is dissolved, it ceases to transact normal business. The mode of settlement of
accounts between partners after the dissolution of a firm is determined by the partnership agreement.
In the absence of any specific agreement as to the mode of settlement of accounts after the dissolu-
tion of the firm, the Partnership Act laid down the following provisions for settlement of accounts.
a) Losses, including deficiencies of capital, shall be paid first out of profit, next out of capital,
and lastly, if necessary, by the partners individually in their profit-sharing ratio.
b) The assets of the firm including any sums contributed by the partners to make up deficiencies
of capital shall be applied in the following manner and order:
i) In paying the debts of the firm to third parties.
ii) In paying each partner rateably what is due to him from the firm for advances.
iii) In paying to each partner rateably what is due to him on account of capital, and
iv) (iv)The surplus, if any, will be divided among the partners in their profit sharing ratio.
Dissolution Accounts:
When a business is discontinued, the firm is said to be dissolved. As a result, all the accounts be
closed. It is, therefore, necessary to open Realisation Account, Cash or Bank Account and Partners
Capital Accounts.
1. Realisation Accounts is opened for all transactions relating to realisation of assets and
payment of liabilities. That is, on dissolution, it is essential to make sale of assets of the
firm, realize cash and paying off the liabilities.
Realisation of assets and settlement of liabilities are centred round the Realisation
Account. It is a nominal Account. The transactions – realisation and settlement – are over,
the difference, being gain or loss will be transferred to Capital Accounts.
2. Cash/Bank Account is opened to record all cash transactions. When the purpose is over
the Cash Account shows a balance, which is equal to the amounts due to partners.
3. Capital Accounts are opened to make all entries connected with the partners’ accounts.
Current Accounts, if any, are transferred to Capital Accounts. Finally the Capital
Accounts are closed by receiving or paying cash.
Journal Entries
om
Dr: Partner’s current account xx
.c
Cr: Partner’s capital account xx
ya
ken
b. If a debit balance:
ea
om
Dr: Partners’ Capital account xx
.s
Cr: Partner’s Current account xx
w
w
w
2. Close all assets at book values except cash bank to the realization account.
Thus:
Dr: Realization a/c xx
Cr: Individual assets a/c xx
Dr.Realization a/c xx
Cr: Partner’s Capital a/c xx
8. After all above adjustments the balances in the bank a/c and the partners’ capital a/c should
om
be opposite and equal. If this is the case, then pay the partners by:
.c
ya
Dr. Partner’s capital a/c xx
en
Cr.Bank a/c xx
k
ea
a. If one of the partners has a debit balance then he will be required to pay the same. Thus:
om
Dr. Bank a/c xx
.s
Cr. Partner Capital a/c xx
w
w
b. If the partner has a debit balance and he’s unable to pay for the same. Then apply the rule of
GARNER VS MURRAY
If, at the time of dissolution, a partener owes a sum of money to the firm, he has to pay it to the firm.
But if he is insolvent, he will not be able to do so, at least not fully.
The sum which is irrecoverable from an insolvent partner is, therefore, a loss. The question arises
whether this loss is like the ordinary loss to be shared by the solvent partner in the profit sharing
ratio or whether it is an extraordinaryloss. Before the decision in Garner vs. Murray was made, such
a loss was treated as ordinary loss.
Illustration 1
Akinyi and Chinedu were in partnership sharing profit and losses in the ratio of 3:2 respectively.
Their statement of financial position as at 31 December 2010 was as follows:
Current assets
Inventory 600,000
Trade receivable 2,000,000
Less: provision for bad debts (100,000)
Bank 1,900,000
Total Assets 1,150,000
7,850,000
Capital & Liabilities
Capital & Reserves 1,000,000
Capital: Akinyi 800,000
Chinedu 500,000
Accumulated profits (750,000)
om
Owner’s equity 1,550,000
.c
ya
en
Liabilities
k
ea
Non-Current Liabilities
om
Loan from Akinyi 1,500,000
.s
w
Loan from KCB 1,000,000
w
w
Current Liabilities
Creditors 3,800,000
7,850,000
Additional information
On 1st Jan 2011 the partners decided to dissolve the partnership after serious disagreements and the
following information was provided:
1. Akinyi took over the investment at Sh 800,000 and also agreed to pay the loan from KCB.
2. The assets realised the following amounts:
Stocks sh 500,000
Trade receivables sh 1,850,000
Fixtures & fittings sh 450,000
Plant & machinery sh 2500,000
3. Dissolution expenses amounted to sh 110,000
4. Creditors were paid an amount less 2.5% discount.
5. The loan from Akinyi was paid in full
Required
a) Realisation account
b) Capital account
c) Bank account
Realisation Account
om
Bank (Distribution exp.) 110,000 Capital – Akinyi (Investment) 800,000
.c
ya
Inventory 600,000 Discount received (2.5% x 3.8m) 95,000
en
Capital: Akinyi 365,000
k
ea
_____ Chinedu 246,000
om
6,810,000 6,810,000
.s
w
w
Bank Account w
When dissolving a partnership firm distinction should be made between fixed capital balances and
fluctuating capital balances.
If the partnership agreement allows the use of fixed capital balances on dissolution, then no
adjustment is required by interest on capital interest on drawings, profit share, partners’ salaries etc.
However, if fluctuating capital balances have been agreed upon then you will be required to make
adjustment to the capital balances with interest on capital, interest on drawings, profit share,
partner’s salaries etc.
For purposes of dissolution fluctuating capital balances are normally used in sharing the debit
balance of one of the partners in case it arises.
It has so far been presumed that dissolution which involves selling the firm’s assets takes a single
day. However, in actual practice, selling the firm’s assets may take some time then thereafter all
expenses are paid, creditors and other loans.
om
.c
The following is the procedure of making payments on dissolution as and when realization has been
ya
made.
ken
a) Pay all dissolution expenses first
ea
b) The firm’s creditors are then paid
om
c) Partner’s loans
.s
w
d) Partner’s capital balances are finally paid
w
w
Cash distributions are then made to the partners as and when realization is made using the either of
the following two approaches:
Under this method the maximum possible loss is calculated after outside creditors and partners’
loans have been paid off. This loss is transferred to the capitals and thus the amount payable to a
partner would be known. If a partner’s share of the loss is more than the capital, he should be treated
as “insolvent” and, in accordance with Garner vs Murray, the loss should be transferred to the other
parnters in the ratio of the capitals just before dissolution.
The amount to the credit of partners will be equal exactly to the cash in hand and the cash will be
distributed among the partners according to the figure now resulting.Such calculation of of
maximum loss, whenever an instalment of cash is received, will show how much is to bepaid to
various partners.
Steps:
1. Pay off the dissolution expenses, creditors, partners’ loans and other liabilities first.
2. Then the partnership Capital balances are to be paid using the cash available. Find out the
difference between the cash available and partner’s capital balances. This difference is called
the maximum potential loss.
3. Distribute the maximum possible loss to the individual partners using the profit & loss ratio.
That is deducting the maximum possible loss from the individual capital balances.
4. If the balances from Step 3 are all credit balances then cash is distributed to partners using the
same balances but if one of the partners has a debit balance, then step 5.
5. If a debit balance, then share the debit balance among the remaining solvent partners using the
rule of Garner vs. Murray. If the rule of Garner vs. Murray is not applicable then share the debit
balance using the profit & loss ratio of the remaining solvent partners.
6. As and when realizations are made the above procedure is repeated (Step 2 – Step 4/5)
ILLUSTRATION 1
Nyoike, Kemei, Lasoi and Mutuku, who have been partners in a tile manufacturing business sharing
profits and losses in the ratio 4:3:2:1, had a serious disagreement on 15 January 2004 which
necessitated dissolution of the partnership.
For the purpose of dissolution, their accountant extracted a balance sheet as at 1 February 2004 as
follows:
om
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
.c
Non – current assets:
ya
en
Land and buildings 21,250.0
k
ea
Plant and machinery 19,802.5
om
Furniture and fittings 7,500.0
.s
Investments 5,000.0
w
w
53,552.5
w
Current assets:
Inventory 15,870.0
Debtors 9,602.5
Balance at bank 782.5 26,255.0
Total assets 79,807.5
Current liabilities:
Creditors 17307.5
79,807.5
Additional information:
1. The assets, which were sold on piecemeal basis, realized cash as follows:
Sh. ‘000’
10 February 2004 Inventory (partial) 8,750.00
16 February 2004 Debtors (partial) 7,330.00
27 February 2004 Investments 6,050.00
03 March 2004 Furniture and fittings 5,000.00
20 March 2004: Land and buildings 17,500.00
Debtors (partial) 1,250.00
Inventory (balance) 6,875.00
15 April 2004: Plant and machinery debtors (balance) 16,400.00
877.50
2. The partners agreed to set aside Sh. 1.25 million to meet realization expenses.
Any cash available for distribution thereafter was to be shared immediately the
3. creditors were paid in full.
The realization expenses which amounted to Sh. 1 million were paid on 15 April
2004.
Required:
om
.c
(b) Realization account and capital account to close off the book f the partners.
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
SOLUTION
w
w
w
Cash Distribution Statement
Total Nyoike Kemoi Lasoi Mutuku
Sh. ‘000’ Sh.‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Bal. b/d 78.2
10 Feb 04 Realisation 8750
16 Feb 04 Realisation 7330
27 Feb 04 Realisation 6050
Total cash 22912.5
Less: Dissolution expenses (1250)
Creditors (17307.5)
Cash available 4355
Capital bal. 45,000 10,000 17500 10,000 7500
General reserves (4:3:2:1) ____ 7,000 5250 3500 1750
62500 22750 13500 9250
Less: Cash available (4355)
M.P.L (4: 3:2:1) 58145 (23,258) (17443.5) (11629) (5814.5)
(6258) 5306.5 1871 3435.5
Share the debt bal. (N) (22.75:13.5:9.25) 6258 (3129) (1856.8) (1272.2)
st
1 Cash distribution 4355 _____ 2177.5 14.2 2163.3
om
- 2177.5 14.2 2163.3
Bank 2nd cash
.c
- 2500 1593.4 906.6
ya
Bank 3rd cash 5992 9816.5 6388.4 3428.1
en
Bank 4th cash 7011 5258.2 3505.5 1752.7 ____ ____ ____ ____
k
ea
17000 227750 13500 9250 17,000 22750 13500 9250
om
.s
w
Realisation Account
w
w
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Land and building 21,250 10 Feb 04 Bank 8,750
Plant and machinery 19,802.5 16 Feb 04 Bank 7,330
Furniture and fittings 7,500 27 Feb 04 Bank 6,050
Investments 5,000 3 March 04 Bank 5,000
Inventory 15,870 20 March 04 Bank 25,625
Debtors 9,602.5 15 April 04 Bank 17,277.5
Bank (Distribution exp.) 1,000 Capital: Nyoike 4/10 x 9992.5 3,997
_ Kemei 3/10 x 9992.5 2,997.8
Lasoi 2/10 x 9992.5 1,998.5
____ Mutuku 1/10 x 9992.5 999.3
80,025 80,025
Bank Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
10 Feb 04 realisation 8,750 Dissolution exp. realisation 1,000
16 Feb 04 realisation 7,330 Creditors 17,307.5
27 Feb 04 realisation 6,050 Capital: Nyoike -
3 March 04 realisation 5,000 1st cash Kemei 2,177.5
20 March 04 realisation 25,625 Lasoi 14.2
15 April 04 realisation 17,277.5 Mutuku 2,163.3
nd
_ 2 cash Nyoike -
Kemei 2,500
Lasoi 1,593.4
Mutuku 906.6
rd
3 cash Nyoike 5,992
Kemei 9,816.5
Lasoi 6,388.4
Mutuku 3,428.1
4th cash Nyoike 7011
Kemei 5,258.2
Lasoi 3,505.5
____ Mutuku 1,752.7
70,815 70,815
om
.c
ILLUSTRATION2
ya
The trial balance extracted from the books of Newel, Omar, Pokka and Tamar on 30 April 2009 was
en
as follows:
k
ea
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
om
.s
Freehold property (Net book value) 6,000
w
Plant and equipment (NBV) 1,395
w
w
Office equipment (NBV) 2,030
Vehicles (NBV) 1,075
Stocks 3,405
Debtors 1,590
Creditors 785
Bank overdraft 210
Capital account : Newel 6,750
Omar 4,050
Pokka 2,700
Tamar 2,700
The business has been steadily declining in the past few years. The partners have been trying to sell
the business as a going concern but have been unable to do so. They decided to sell the assets on a
piece-meal basis, and cash would be distributed to partners as soon as possible in amounts which
would ensure that no partner would be called upon to repay any moneys he had received. In the
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 95
FINANCIAL REPORTING
partnership agreement, profits and losses were shared between Newel, Omar, Pokka and Tamar in
the ratio 4:3:2:1 respectively and the application of the rule in Garner, v Murray was excluded.
15 May 2009 All the motor vehicle were sold at the car bazaar for sh 975,000 net of selling
costs. The money was put into the bank account.
31 May 2009 Cash collected from debtors sh 122,000 and stock sold to realise sh 1, 070,000
after costs. All creditors were paid and the first cash distribution was made.
30 June 2009 Cash collected from debtors sh 248,000 and stock sold to realise sh 955,000 net
second cash distribution was made.
31 July 2009 Cash collected from debtors sh 1,100,000 and from sale of stock (net) sh
1,465,000. Third cash distribution was made.
31 August 2009 Office equipment sold for sh 1,950,000 (net) and plant and equipment sold for
sh 1,610,000. Fourth cash distribution was made.
31 October 2009 The freehold property was sold for sh 6,600,000. Various distribution
experiences of sh 200,000 were paid, the final distribution of cash took place.
Required;
Using surplus capital method and maximum possible loss method prepare.
om
b) Summary bank, realisation and partners’ capital accounts
.c
ya
en
Amount payable to partners
k
ea
om
Newel Omar Pokka Tamar
.s
w
Capital account 6750 4050 2700 2700
w
w
Current account (250) (1350) (300) 200
Amount payable 6500 2700 2400 2900
Sh. 000 Sh. 000 Sh. 000 Sh. 000 Sh. 000
Capital bal 14,500 6.500 2700 2400 2900
Cash available 1,172 (5331.2) (3998.4) (2665.6) (1332.8)
Debit balances 13,328 1168.8 (1298.4) (265.6) 1569.2
Share of debit bal ____ (1251.2) (1209.4) (265.6) (312.2)
Newel debt bal 1,174 52.4 - - 1254.4
1st cash dist 13,328 52.4 ____ _____ 52.4
Cash bal 1,203 - - - 1172
30/6/09 – realization 12,125 6500 2700 2400 1728
Max. possible loss ____ (4850) (3637.5) (2425) (1212.5)
Share of debit bal 1,203 1650 (937.5) 251 515.5
2nd cash dist 12,125 (770) (937.5) (25) 192.5
Capital bal 2565 880 - - 323
31/7/2009 – realization 9560 5620 2700 2400 1405
1,100 + 1,465 ____ (3824) (2868) (1912) (956)
Share of debit balance 2,565 1796 (168) 488 446
3rd cash distribution 9560 96 (168) (48) (24)
Capital bal b/d 3560 1,700 - 440 425
31/8/09 1950 + 1610 6000 3920 2700 1960 980
om
4th cash dist 3560 (2400) (1800) (1200) (1600)
.c
ya
Capital bal b/d 6000 1520 900 760 380
en
31/10/09 (6600 – 200) 6400 2400 1800 1200 600
k
ea
Current account 400 160 120 80 40
om
Amount payable 2560 1920 1280 640
.s
w
w
w
Realisation Account
Sh. 000 Sh.000
Freehold property 6000 Bank account 975
Plant and equipment 1395 15/5/2009 1192
Office equipment 2030 31/5/2009 1203
Vehicle 1075 30/06/2009 2565
Stock 3405 31/7/2009 3560
Debtors 1590 31/8/2009 6000
Bk realisation expenses 200 31/10/2009 _
Capital account 160
Newel 4/10 x 400 120
Omar 3/10 x 400 80
Pokka 2/10 x 400 40 __
Jamar 1/10 x 400 16,095 16,095
Bank Account
Sh. 000 Sh.000
Realisation 975 Bal b/d 210
account 1192 Creditors 785
15/5/2009 1203 Realisation exp 200
31/5/2009 2565 Capital account 6660
30/06/2009 3560 Newel 2820
31/7/2009 6000 Omar 2480
31/8/2009 ___ Pokka 2940
31/10/2009 16095 Tamar 16095
om
.c
ya
Under this approach, cash distributions are made to the partners’ capital balances are made to the
en
partners so as to bring their capital balances in the same ratio as their P&L sharing ratio.
k
ea
om
This is achieved by making payments to the strongest partner with the greatest capital per unit or
.s
profit an amount that will make them equal to the second.
w
w
w
Strongest partner is that partner with the greatest capital per unit/ profit, is assumed to less likely to
fall into a debit balance as compared to the second strongest partner.
After payment has been made to the strongest partner then there will be two partners with the same
capital per unit or profit balance.
Cash distributions are made to the two strongest partners so as to make them equal to the third
strongest ranking partner.
This procedure is repeated until all the capital balances are the same. Once this has been achieved
then thereafter cash distributions is made to the partners using their profit & loss sharing ratio as and
when realizations are made.
Under this method, distribution of cash are made to partners so as to bring their capital balance
(amount payable) as at the date of dissolution into the ratio in which they share the profits and
losses.
Divide this amount payable by the profit or loss sharing ratios of the partners.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 98
FINANCIAL REPORTING
The resultant fig is the capital per unit of profit. Rank the partners based on this capital per unit of
profit with the greatest capital per unit of profit being ranked the first and the one with the least as
last.
The partner with the greatest capital per unit of profit is assumed to be least likely to fall into a debit
capital balance.
Payment is made to the first ranking partners so as to make his capital balances to be in their profit
and loss ratio to that of the 2nd ranked partner.
Payment is made to the two partners whose capital balances are in their profit sharing ratio so as to
make their capital balances to be in their profit and loss ratio to that of the 3rd ranked partners.
This process is repeated until the capital balances of all the partners are in tier profit and loss sharing
ratios.
Any other cash, should be distributed to partners using their profit and loss sharing ratio
om
Solution
.c
ya
Determine the amount payable to each partner
ken
ea
Newel Omar Pokka Tamar
om
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
.s
w
Capital Account 6750 4050 2700 2700
w
w
Current Account (250) (1350) (300) 200
Amount payable 6500 2700 2400 2900
Summary of payment
1st Payment
Bank b/d 210
Creditors 785 995
Distribution to partners
1st distribution – tamar (1275 x 1) 1275
2nd distribution
Tamar 425 x 1 = 425
Pokkar 425 x 4 = 1700 2,125
3rd distribution
Tamar 300 x 1 = 300
Pokka 300 x 2 = 600
Newel 500 x 4 = 1200 2,100
6,495
Any cash in excess of sh 6,495,000 should be distributed to partners using profit or loss sharing
ratios.
om
765
.c
ya
31/5 – Realisation 1,192
en
1,957
k
ea
Less creditors 1,172
om
1st distribution Jamar bal (103) (1,172)
.s
w
30
w
w
30/6 – Realisation (248 + 455) 1,203
Payment to Tamar bal (103) (103)
1,100
Payment to:
Tamar 1/5 x 1100 = 220 bal 205 (1,100)
Newel 4/5 x 1100 = 880 bal 820 -
2,565
31/7 Realisation (110 + 1465)
3rd distribution
Newel bal 520
Tamar bal 205 (1,025)
1,540
Newel 4/7 x 1540 = 880 bal (320)
Pokka 2/7 x 540 = 440 bal (180)
Tamar ¼ x 1540 = 220 bal 80 1,540
AMALGAMATION
When two or more firms are carrying on business of a similar nature, it would be natural if they
amalgamate their businesses to avoid competition. It is usual to revalue all assets and liabilities so
that true capital brought into the new firm by each of the partners is ascertained. Therefore-
(a) Each firm should prepare a Revaluation Account relating to its own assets and liabilities
om
and transfer the balance to the partners' capital accounts in the profit-sharing ratio.
.c
ya
(b) Entries for raising Goodwill should be passed.
en
(c) Assets and liabilities not taken over by the new firm should be transferred to the capital
k
ea
accounts of partners in the ratio of capitals.
om
(d) The new firm should be debited with the difference between the value of assets and
.s
liabilities taken over by it, the assets should be credited and liabilities debited.
w
w
(e) Partners' capital accounts should be transferred to the new firm's account.
w
The above steps will close the books of the old firm. To open the books of the new firm, the
following entry will be required:
e. With the balancing figure in the revaluation account being either, a profit or a loss, share it
among the partners using their old P & L sharing ratio.
om
.c
ya
i. If a profit
en
Dr. Revaluation a/c xx
k
ea
Cr: Partner’s capital a/c xx
om
.s
ii. If a loss
w
w
Dr. Partners’ capital a/c xx
w
Cr. Revaluation a/c xx
5. With the assets neither taken over by a partner nor taken over by the new firm but instead
sold by the old partnership. Thus,
a. If a profit:
b. If a loss:
Dr. Individual asset a/c xx
Cr. Partner’s capital a/c xx
6. If a liability is not taken over by either a partner or the new firm and instead settled by the
old firms.
om
.c
ya
7. To record assets transferred to the new firm
ken
ea
8. With the liabilities taken over by the new firm
om
Dr. Individual liabilities a/c xx
.s
Cr. New firm a/c xx
w
w
w
9. To record partner’s capital balances transferred to the new firm, thus:
Dr. Partner’s capital a/c xx
Cr. New firm a/c xx
N/B: If a question has current a/c, then close them to their capital a/cs accordingly.
3. To recognize the partner’s capital balances transferred from the old firms. Thus:
Dr. Business purchase a/c xx
Cr. New Partner’s capital a/c xx
5. If a partner withdraws from the new partnership, then with the withdrawal
Dr. New Partner’s capital a/c xx
Cr. Bank a/c xx
6. It is the policy of the new firm not to maintain goodwill a/c and hence it’s written off. Thus:
Dr. New partner’s capital a/c xx
Cr. Goodwill a/c (with new P&L ratio) xx
om
.c
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
ILLUSTRATION
Old firms A B C D
New firm 4 3 3 2
6 5 4 3
As at 31 December 2010 the statement of financial positions of the firms was as follows:
A and B Retailers C and D Traders
Sh. Sh. Sh. Sh.
Non-current assets
Property 740,000 1,000,000
Fixtures and fittings 180,000 140,000
Motor vehicles 300,000 180,000
1,220,000 1,320,000
Current assets :
Stock 830,000 660,000
Investments 80,000 -
Debtors 680,000 580,000
Bank balance 340,000 -
1,930,000 1,240,000
Current liabilities
Creditors (520,000) (600,000)
Bank overdraft - 1,410,000 (90,000) 550,000
Net asset 2,630,000 1,870,000
Capital accounts
A 1,500,000 C 1,100,000
om
B 1,050,000 D 700,000
.c
ya
en
Current accounts
k
ea
A 30,000 C 30,000
om
B 50,000 80,000 D 40,000 70,000
.s
w
2,630,000 1,870,000
w
The agreement to amalgamate the firms contained the following provisions: w
1. Provision for bad and doubtful debts at the rate of 5% was to be made in respect of debtors and a
provision for discounts receivable at the rate of 2 ½ % was to be made in respect of creditors.
2. ABC and D enterprises was to take over the old partnerships’ assets at the following values:
Required
a) The relevant accounts to close off the books of A and B Retailers and C and traders.
b) The opening statement of financial position of ABC and D Enterprises as at 1 January 2011.
Solution;
Closing books of A and B Retailers
Revaluation Account
om
.c
ya
Provision for bad and doubtful debt Account
en
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
k
ea
New firms 34000 Revaluation dc 34000
om
____ ____
.s
w
34000 34000
w
Provision for discount receivable Account
w
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Revaluation ½ % x 5200 13000 New firm 1300
____ ____
13000 13000
Capital Account
A B A B
Goodwill Account
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Capital account New firm 630,000
A 4/7 x 630000 360,000
B 5/7 x 630000 270,000 ____
630,000 630,000
om
.c
ya
Revaluation Account
en
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
k
ea
Provision for bad debts 510 x 58000 29,000 Provision for discount rec. 15,000
om
Stock 21,000 Capital account
.s
Motor vehicle 50,000- C 3/5 x 85000 51,000
w
w
Fixtures& Fittings ____ D 2/5 x 85000 38,000
w
100,000 100,000
Goodwill account
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Capital account 270,000 New firm 450,000
C = 3/5 x 450,000 180,000 ______
D = 2/5 x 450,000 450,000 450,000
Capital Account
C D C D
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Revaluation 51,000 34,000 Bal b/d 1,100,000 700,000
New firm 1,475,000 970,000 Revaluation 126,000 84,000
Goodwill 270,000 180,000
_____ ____ Current account 30,000 40,000
1,526,000 1004000 1,526,000 1004000
Cash Account
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
om
Disposal 135000 Bal b/d 90,000
.c
______ New firm 1260,000
ya
en
1350,000 1,350,000
k
ea
om
Requisition Account
.s
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
w
w
Property 1,000,000 Cash 1,350,000
w
Fixtures& Fittings 140,000
Capital Account
C 3/5 x 210,000 126,000
D 2/5 x 210,000 84,000 ______
1,350,000 1,350,000
om
.c
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
ya
B/s Purchase 1,600,000 Capital Account 210,000
ken
Capital 1160,000 A = 275,000
ea
B ______ C= 70,0000
om
1,716,000 D = 1,161,000
.s
w
Bal c/d 1,716,000
w
ABCD Enterprise w
Statement of Financial Position as at 1/1/2011
Shs
Assets
Non-Current
Goodwill 1080,000
Properties 1000,000
Motor vehicle 410,000
Furniture and fixtures 160,000
Current Assets
Trade Rec (1260 – 63) 1197000
Inventories stock 1484,000
Cash / Bank 1161,000
6492,000
Capital and liabilities
Capital Account
A 1800,000
B 1500,000
C 1200,000
D 900,000
Liability
Creditors 1160 – 28 1092,000
6492,000
Introduction
Frequently a private business is converted into a limited company. The partners give up their
partnership stakes in exchange for shares in the company. This conversation is usually seen as a
necessary stage of development of the growth of the business. A later stage may see the conversation
of the private company into a public limited company.
om
iii. Realization account
.c
ya
iv. Purchasing company account debtors
en
v. Shares and debenture account
k
ea
om
Journal entries in the books of Partnership
.s
w
w
1. Close all assets to the realization account at book values. Thus:
w
Dr. Realization a/c xx
Cr.Individual assets a/c xx
5. The balancing figure in the realization account is either a profit or a loss. Then share it
among the partners using these P&L ratios.
a. If profit:
Dr. Realization a/c xx
Cr. Individual partners’ capital a/c xx
b. If a loss:
Dr. Individual’s partners a/c xx
Cr.Realization a/c xx
6. With the liabilities not taken over but paid by the firm. Thus:
Dr. Individual’s liabilities a/c xx
Cr. Bank a/c xx
8. Upon receipt of purchase consideration paid in form of cash, shares, debentures. Thus:
Dr. Bank/ Shares/ Debentures a/c xx
Cr. Purchasing company a/c xx
om
9. Distribute the shares or/ and debentures received among the partner’s using the agreed
.c
ya
proportion thus:
en
Dr. Individual partners’ capital a/c xx
k
ea
Cr. Shares/ Debentures a/c xx
om
10. The partners’ capital balances must be cleared by either a receipt from the partners or
.s
payment to the partners.
w
w
a. If a partner’s capital balance is a credit balance, then pay the partners thus:-
w
Dr. Partners’ capital a/c xx
Cr.Bank a/c xx
b. If a partner’s capital balance is a debit balance then the individual partner would be
required to pay for the debit. Thus:
Dr. Bank a/c xx
Cr. Individual Partner’s Capital a/c xx
NOTE: if a question has current accounts, close them accordingly to the partner’s capital account.
1. If the purchase consideration is more than the net assets taken over:
2. If the purchase consideration is less than the net assets taken over then: (i.e. the business
om
was purchased at a profit)
.c
Dr. Business purchase a/c xx
ya
en
Cr. Capital reserve xx
k
3. With payment of cash consideration to the seller by either sh. / Debentures thus:-
ea
om
Dr. Sellers/ Vendors a/c xx
.s
Cr. Bank/ Debentures a/c xx
w
w
w
4. If purchase consideration was settled in terms of ordinary shares at a premium, thus:-
Alternatively (6 a & b)
Using this approach, purchase consideration is usually agreed at a particular and specific amount
between the buyers and sellers.
Under this approach purchase consideration is calculated by taking the total assets at agreed values
(taking over values) then subtracts the total taking over values of liabilities.
3. Payment method
Under this approach, purchase consideration is calculated by adding together all modes of payments,
e.g. cash, debentures and shares
Illustration Question
The following is the statement of financial position of financial position of Shika and Adabu who
share profits and losses to the ratio of 2:3 respectively.
om
Shika and Adabu Enterprises
Statement of Financial Position as at 31st December 2010
.c
ya
Sh.
ken
Assets 960,000
ea
om
Non Current Assets 250,000
.s
Motor vehicle 1,110,000
w
Furniture 2,820,000
w
w
Investments
Current Assets
Stocks 3,420,000
Debtors 2,070,000
Bank 1,170,000
6,660,000
9,480,000
Capital liabilities
Capital – Shika 4,500,000
- Adabu 3,000,000
7,500,000
Liabilities
Current liabilities 1,920,000
Creditors 60,000
Electricity owing 1,980,000
9,480,000
Additional Information
On 31st December 2010 Shika Adabu Ltd was incorporated to take over the business of Shika..
1. All assets except cash at bank and all liabilities except for electricity owing to be taken over by
the company electricity owing was paid by the partnership firm.
2. Assets taken over by the company have been revalued as follows:
Kshs.
Motor vehicles 900,000
Furniture 300,000
Stocks 2,700,000
Debtors 1,800,000
Investment 1,620,000
3. The purchase consideration in Ksh 6,900,000 to be settled by issue of 240,000 ordinary shares of
Ksh 20 each at a premium of 20% fully paid and balanced in cash .
4. The company also invited the members of the public to subscribe for 150,000 ordinary shares of
Ksh 20 each at a premium of 25% the issue was fully subscribed and paid for in full.
5. The shares issued to the partners were distributed among the partners according to their P & L
sharing ratio.
Required
om
i) Entries in the books of partnership.
.c
a) Entries in the books of the company.
ya
b) An opening balance sheet of the company as at 1st January 2011.
ken
ea
om
Solution
.s
w
w
Shika and Adabu Enterprises
2) Cash (Bal.)
(6,900,000 – 5,760,000) = 1,140,000
6,900,000
om
Bank (bal. fig) 2400,000 - Realisation 204,000 306,000
.c
_____ _____ Bank (bal. fig) _____ 150,000
ya
en
4704,000 3456,000 4704,000 3456,000
k
ea
om
Bank Account
.s
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
w
w
Bal. b/d 1170,000 Electricity owing 60,000
w
Purchasing company 1140,000 Capital: Shika 2400,000
Capital: Adabu 150,000 ______
2460,000 2,460,000
Shares Account
Bank Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
om
Ordinary share capital 3750,000 Sellers / vendors 1140,000
.c
_____ Bal. c/d 2610,000
ya
en
3,750,000 3,750,000
k
ea
om
Ordinary Share Capital Account
.s
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
w
w
Bal. c/d 7,800,000 Sellers / vendors account 4,800,000
w
_____ Bank a/c 3,000,000
7,800,000 7,800,000
4,320,000
Current Assets:
Stocks 2,700,000
Bank 2,610,000
Debtors 1,800,000
Total Assets 7,110,000
11,430,000
Capital and Liabilities
Capital and Reserves 7,800,000
Ordinary share capital 1,710,000
Share premium 9,510,000
Current liabilities
Creditors 1,920,000
Total capital and liabilities 11,430,000
Illustration
Kamau Maneno and Rotino have carried on partnership for several years, sharing profits and losses
equally after allowing for annual salaries as follows:
Sh .
om
Kamau 1,500,000
.c
ya
Maneno 900,000
en
Rotino 900,000
k
ea
om
They decided to convert the partnership into limited company; Kamaro Ltd.as at 30 November 2001,
.s
the following terms:
w
w
1. Goodwill to be valued at Sh.13,500,000
w
2. Other assets to be valued as follows:
Shs.
Freehold property 27,000,000
Furniture and fittings 2,400,000
Motor Vehicles 6,000,000
3. Each partner is becoming director of the company at the same salary as that previously allowed in
the partnership.
4. Maneno’s loan is to converted into share capital at par.
5. Shares are to be issued to each partner at parin respect of the amounts of their equity holdings at
30 November 2001.
6. The financial year of partnership ends on 30 May .No action has been taken to carryout the terms
of conversionof partnership into the limited company in the books of accounts.On 31 May 2002,
the trial balance showed the following position:
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Capital accounts at 1 June 2001
Kamau 18,000
Maneno 9,000
Rotino 6,000
Stock -31 May 2002 14,400
Cost of sales 36,000
Sales 60,000
Administrative expenses 6,000
Selling expenses 3,000
Accounting &Audit expense 1,200
Incorporation expenses 600
Drawings:
Kamau 1,500
Maneno 900
Rotino 900
Freehold property at cost 25,800
Furniture and fittings at cost 6,000
Accumulated depreciation 3,600
Debtors and Creditors 9,000 7,200
Prepayments and Accruals 600 300
Loan from Maneno(10% interest per annum) 9,000
om
Motor Vehicles at cost 12,000
.c
ya
Accumulated depreciation 3,600
en
Bank balance ______ 1,200
k
ea
117,900 117,900
om
.s
w
Additional information;
w
w
i. The sales during the second half of the year were 60% of the total sales though the gross
profit percentage remained the same throughout the year.
ii. The selling expenses were proportional to the sales for each period. All the expenses were
incurred evenly throughout the year.
iii. Salary drawings were made evenly. Drawing made after incorporation were to be treated as
director’s salaries.
iv. There were no purchases or sales of fixed assets during the year .Depreciation is to be
provided on cost as follows;
v. No dividends are paid or proposed but it is decided to write off the incorporation expenses
and also Sh.3,500,000 of the goodwill.
Required
(a) Trading and profit and loss account for Kamaro Ltd. for the six months ended 31 May 2002
(b) Calculation showing the value of shares to be issued to each partner.
Solution
om
Appropriation Account
.c
Partner’s Salaries: Kamau 750
ya
en
Maneno 450
k
Rotino 450 (1,650)
ea
om
1,200
.s
Profit to be shared equally Kamau 400
w
w
Maneno 400
w
Rotino 400 (1,200)
Nil
Purchase consideration working by use of Net Asset Method Statement of affairs as at 1st
December 2001.
Sh. “000”
Assets:
Freehold property 27,000
Furniture and fittings 2,400
Motor vehicles 6,000
Goodwill 3,500
48,900
Less: Liabilities: Maneno’s loan (9,000)
Purchase consideration 39900
Realisation Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Freehold property 25800 Maneno’s loan 9,000
Furniture and fittings 2100 Purchase consideration 3,990
Motor vehicles 7200
Capital: Kamau 1/3 4600
Maneno 1/3 4600
Rotino 1/3 4600 _____
48,900 48,900
om
.c
Books of the Company (Kamaro Ltd)
ya
en
Business Purchase Account
k
ea
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
om
Purchase consideration 3,990 Freehold property 27000
.s
Maneno’s loan 9,000 Furniture and fittings 2400
w
w
Motor vehicles 6,000
w
_____ Goodwill 13500
48,900 48900
Kamaro Ltd
Statement of Financial Position as at 31st May 2002
Sh. “000”
Assets:
Non-Current Assets
Freehold property 2,700
Furniture and fittings 2400 – (10% x 2400 x 6/12) 2,280
Motor vehicle 6000 – (20% x 600 x 6/12) 5,400
Goodwill (13500 – 3500) 10,000
44,680
Current Assets
Stock 14,400
Debtors 9,000
Prepayments 600
Total Assets 24,000
Capital and Liabilities 68,680
Capital and reserves
Illustration
A and B are in partnership selling necklace at the Malaysia market. They have agreed to share
profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2. The draft statement of financial position is as follows:
om
Fixtures and fittings 100
.c
ya
Motor vehicles 300 3,400
ken
ea
Current assets
om
Account receivable 2,000
.s
Cash in bank 60 2,060
w
w
5,460
w
Equity and liability
Capital and Reserves
Capital accounts A 2,000
B
Current accounts A 250 2,250
B 300
50 350
Non-current Liabilities 1,600
Loan from A
Current Liabilities
Accounts payables 1,260
5,460
Additional Information
AB Ltd was incorporated on 1st July 2010, for the purpose of taking over, the business of the
partnership. It is to acquire the freehold premises at sh 4,000,000 and other assets with the exception
of cash and motor vehicles at book values.
The current liabilities are also to be taken over by the new company the purchase consideration is sh
6 million and it is to be settled by issue of 20,000 ordinary shares whose par value is sh 100 each in
AB Ltd and a cash payment of Sh 3 million which AB Ltd plans to raise through a bank loan. A is to
take over the car at a valuation of sh 250,000. The partners have agreed to divide the shares received
in the ratio in which they share profits and losses. The loan from A is to be paid by the partnership.
Required
Solution
Closing books of A and B
Realisation discount
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Freehold premises 3000 Capital account 250
Fixtures& Fittings 100 Accounts payable 1260
Motor vehicle 300 Purchasing co. 6000
Account Received 2000
Capital account
A 3/5 x 2110 1266
B 2/5 x 2120 844 ____
om
7510 7510
.c
ya
en
Cash / Book Account
k
ea
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
om
Bal b/d 60 Loan from A 1600
.s
w
Purchasing co. 3000 Capital account A 1766
w
w
Capital account - B 306 ____
3366 3366
Capital Account
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Realisation A/C - 250 Bal b/d 2000 250
Shares 1800 1200 Realisation profit 1260 844
1766 - Current account 300 50
_____ ____ Cash ____ 306
3566 1450 3566 1450
Purchasing Co A and B Ltd Account
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Realisation 6,000 Cash 3,000
____ Shares 3,000
3,366 3,366
Shares in AB Ltd
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Purchasing Co. 3,000 A 3/5 x 3000 1,800
____ B 2/5 x 3000 1,200
3,000 3,000
om
.c
AB Ltd
ya
en
Statement of financial position
k
ea
Sh. ‘000’
om
Assets
.s
Non-current
w
w
Freehold premises 4000
w
Fix and fit 100
Goodwill 1160
Current assets
Account receivable 2000
7260
Equity and liabilities
Ordinary share capital 2000
S/ Premium 1000
Current liabilities
Account payable 1260
7260
REVISION EXERCISES
QUESTION 1
Aand B Advocates and M and N Advocates were practicing firms of advocates. On 1 January 2006,
they agreed to amalgamate the partnerships into one firm, Able and Mine Advocates. The accounts
of the separate partnerships have been prepared annually to 31 December 2005.
The agreed profit and loss sharing ratios in the old and the new firms were as follows:
A B M N
Old firms 3 2 2 1
New firms 4 3 2 1
The balance sheets extracts of the partnerships as at 31 December 2005 were as follows:
A and B Advocates M and N Advocates
Sh. '000' Sh. '000'
Non-current assets
Motor vehicles 10,000 9,000
Office equipment 4,000 3,000
Goodwill 14,000 12,000
6,000 5,000
Current assets:
Investments 7,500 -
Accounts receivable 20,000 13,000
om
Cash 2,500 -
.c
Total assets 30,000 13,000
ya
50,000 30,000
en
k
Capital and liabilities:
ea
Capital accounts:
om
A 25,000 -
.s
w
B 15,000 -
w
w
M - 15,000
N - 10,000
25,000
Current liabilities:
Client account 40,000 -
Accounts payable 5,000 -
Bank overdraft 5,000 3,500
Total capital and liabilities - 1,500
10,000 5,000
50,000 30,000
Additional information:
1 Provision or bad and doubtful debts was to be made at 5% of the accounts receivable.
2 Able and Mine Advocates was to take over the assets of the partnership at the following agreed
values:
Required:
i. Realization accounts
ii. Capital accounts
iii. Cash accounts
iv. Able and Mine Advocates account
Solution:
b) 1)
om
.c
A&B M and A& B M and
ya
en
Advocates NAssociates Advocates Associates
k
ea
om
Sh,000 Sh 000 Sh 000 Sh 000
.s
Motor vehicles 10,000 9,000 Motor vehicles 9,000 8,000
w
Office equipment 4,000 3,000 Office equip 3,500 3,000
w
w
Goodwill 6,000 5,000 Goodwill 7,500 5,000
Investments 7,500 - Acc Receivables 19,000 12,350
Accounts receivable 20,000 13,000 39,000 28,350
Cash Investment 8,000 -
47,000 28,350
Loss
A3 300
B2 200
M2 1,100
N1 550
47,500 30,000 47,500 30,000
ii)
Capital accounts
A B M N A B M N
Sh
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’ ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Realization account 300 200 1,100 550 Ba b/d 25,000 15,000 15,000 10,000
Cash 1,950 Cash 5,300 7,700 1,100
Transfer to Able and
mine Advocates 30,000 22,500 15,000 7,500
30,300 22,700 16,100 10,000 30,300 22,700 16,100 10,000
om
B 7,700 Capital N 1,950
.c
ya
M 1,100 Able and Mine
en
Able and mine Advocates 13,500
k
ea
Advocates 5,850
om
23,500 6,950 23,500 6,950
.s
w
w
iv)Able and Mine Advocates
QUESTION 2
Jembe and Panga were sole traders manufacturing farm implements. On 31 March 2004, they
amalgamated and traded as partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2. One year later on
31 March 2005, they converted the partnership into a limited liability company called Shamba Ltd.
No. adjustments have been made to record the amalgamation and conversion but the balance sheets
for the sole traders as at 31 March 2004 and the partnership as at 31 March 2005 were as follows:
om
Liabilities
.c
Accounts payable (6,800) (4,000) (9,920)
ya
en
Bank overdraft - - (5,625)
k
ea
7,1000 5,650 14,350
om
.s
Additional Information:
w
w
w
1. On 1 April 2004, the partners agreed to take up the assets and liabilities of the individual traders at
book values except for freehold property, plant and equipment and fixtures and fittings which were
to be revalued as follows:
Jembe Panga
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Freehold property 2,000 1,500
Plant and equipment 6,500 5,500
2. During the year ended 31 March 2005, Jembe made drawings of Sh. 2,390,000 while Panga drew
Shs. 610,000.
3. The partnership was converted into a limited company on the following terms:
i. The freehold property and accounts receivable were revalued to Sh.6,000,000 and
Sh.5,670,000 respectively.
ii. Jembe and Panga were to receive 15% unsecured debentures at par so as to provide each
partner with income equivalent to a 6% return on capital employed based on capital
balances as at 31 March 2005 (that is after accounting for the profit, drawings and
revaluation in note (i) above).
iii. Shamba Ltd. Authorized share capital was made up of 150,000 ordinary shares of Sh.50
each. Out of which 130,000 shares were to be issued to the partners in their profit sharing
ratio.
iv. Any balances in the partners’ capital accounts were to be settled in cash.
Required:
a) A computation showing the value of debentures and ordinary shares to be issued to the
partners.
b) Partners capital accounts as at 31 March 2005.
c) Balance sheet of Shamba Ltd. As at 31 March 2005 after completing the above transactions.
Solution:
om
Jembe Panga Partnership
.c
Assets less liabilities to partnerships Shs. ‘000’ Shs. ‘000’ Shs. ‘000’
ya
Freehold property 2,000 1,500 3,500
en
Plant and equipment 6,500 5,500 12,000
k
ea
Fixtures and fittings 1,500 1,500 3,000
om
Inventory 1,800 350 2,150
.s
Accounts receivable 1,900 1,000 2,900
w
w
Balance at bank 300 150 450
w
14,000 10,000 24,000
Accounts payable (6,800) 4,000 10,800
Capital balances 1.4.04 7,200 6,000 13,200
Compute the capital balances as at 31 March 2005 before conversion takes place.
Jembe Panga
Shs. ‘000’ Shs. ‘000’
Capital balance as at 1.1.04 7,200 6,000
Profit for year
(Net assets as at 31.3.05 – Total capital b/d + Drawings)
(14,350 – 13,200 + 2,390 + 610) = Sh. 4,150
Share in PSR 3:2 2,490 1,660
9,690 7,660
Less drawings: (2,390) (610)
Capital balance at 31.3.05 7,300 7,050
Bond to be issued
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Capital balance as at 31.5.05 7,300 7,050
Add Revaluation gain
(6,000 + 5,670 – 4,000 – 6,420)1,250
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 128
FINANCIAL REPORTING
om
Less: opening capital 13,200
.c
ya
Change in capital 1,150
en
Add: Drawings 3,000
k
ea
Profit for the year 4,150
om
Profit share Jembe 2,490
.s
1,660
w
w
Jembe Panga Total
w
Capital employed 7,200 6,000 13,200
Bal b/d 2,490 1,660 4,150
Add: share of profit 750 500 1,250
Add: revaluation (2,390) (610) (3,000)
Less: drawings 8,050 7,550 15,600
Debentures issued 3,220 3,020 6,240
Shares 3,900 2,600 6,500
Shares to be issued:
Jembe Panga
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Total per value
130,000 x 50 = Sh. 6,500,000
Based on PSR 3:2 3,900,000 2,600,000
Capital account
J P J P
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Drawings 2,390 610Balance b/d 7,200 6,000
Bond 3,220 3,020Profit 2,490 1,660
Share capital 3,900 2,600Revaluation
Bank 930 1,930Gain 750 500
10,440 8,160 10,440 8,160
(c)
Shamba Ltd
Balance sheet as at 31 March 2005
Non-current assets Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Freehold property 6,000
Plant and equipment 13,000
Fixtures and fittings 3,000
22,0000
Current assets
Inventory 3,350
Accounts receivable 5,670
Bank 125 9,145
Total assets 31,145
Share capital 6,500
om
Non-current liabilities
.c
ya
15% Bond 6,240
en
Current liabilities
k
ea
Accounts payable 9,920
om
Bank overdraft 8,485 18,405
.s
31,145
w
w
w
Workings
Bank overdraft
Sh. ‘000’
Balance as at 31 May 2005 (5,625)
Less: Jembe 930
Panga 1,930
8,485
TOPIC 3
SPECIALISED TRANSACTIONS
Meaning of ‘revenue’
‘The gross inflow of economic benefits during the period arising in the course of the ordinary
activities of an entity when those inflows result in increases in equity, other than increases relating to
contributions from equity participants’
a) Revenue should be stated before deduction of costs of sale. For example if goods are sold for
ksh.100 000 that cost the seller ksh.60 000 to manufacture the revenue is ksh.1 000 00, not
ksh.40 000.
om
b) Revenue is recognised on the provision of goods and services that relate to the ordinary
.c
activities of the entity. If an entity disposes of property, plant and equipment at the end of its
ya
en
useful economic life the proceeds of disposal are not revenue for the entity. Instead the profit
k
ea
or loss on disposal is treated as a deduction from operating expenses (or as a separate line
om
item in the statement of profit or loss, if it is sufficiently material).
.s
w
c) Sales taxes that are collected from the customer and remitted to the relevant authorities are
w
w
not ‘revenue’. For example if goods are sold for ksh.110 000, inclusive of recoverable sales
taxes of 10%, the revenue is $100 000, not ksh.110 000.
d) If the seller is acting as agent, rather than as the principal, in a transaction, the revenue the
seller should recognise is the amount of commission receivable rather than the gross amount
collected from the customer. For example, if a travel agent sells a holiday to a customer for
ksh.10,000 plus a commission of ksh.1000, so that the customer pays ksh.11,000 and the
travel agent remits ksh.10,000 to the entity actually providing the holiday, then the travel
agent recognises revenue of ksh.1000.
1. Sale of goods:
Revenue is recognised when all the following conditions have been satisfied (2):
a) The seller has transferred the significant risks and rewards of ownership of the goods to the
buyer.
b) The seller does not retain control over the goods or managerial involvement with them to the
degree usually associated with ownership.
c) The amount of revenue can be measured reliably.
d) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the seller
e) The costs incurred or to be incurred by the seller in respect of the transaction can be measured
reliably.
As far as these conditions are concerned, it is notable that:
A number of the conditions ((a) and (b) particularly) are subject to a degree of interpretation
and therefore there can be some uncertainty about whether or not revenue should be
recognised.
The conditions are such that all are likely to be satisfied at a particular point in time and so
there is a critical point at which all the revenue from the sale of goods would be recognised.
This approach contrasts with the approach taken to the recognition of revenue from the
provision of services (see below):
2. Provision of services:
As stated above, there is a different approach taken to the recognition of revenue from the provision
of services. IAS 18 states that ‘where the outcome of a transaction involving the rendering of
services can be estimated reliably, associated revenue should be recognised by reference to the stage
om
of completion of the transaction at the end of the reporting period’. In other words, the revenue is
.c
recognised gradually, rather than all at one ‘critical point’, as is the case for revenue from the sale of
ya
en
goods. IAS 18 further states that the outcome of a transaction can be estimated reliably when all the
k
ea
following conditions are satisfied:
om
.s
a) The amount of revenue can be measured reliably.
w
w
b) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the seller.
w
c) The stage of completion of the transaction at the end of the reporting period can be measured
reliably.
d) The costs incurred to date for the transaction and the costs to complete the transaction can be
measured reliably.
IAS 18 does not prescribe one single method that should be used for determining the stage of
completion of a service transaction. However the standard does provide some examples of suitable
methods (4):
a) Surveys of work performed.
b) Services performed to date as a percentage of total services to be performed.
c) The proportion that costs incurred to date bear to the estimated total costs of the transaction.
If it is not possible to reliably measure the outcome of a transaction involving the provision of
services (perhaps because the transaction is in its very early stages) then revenue should be
recognised only to the extent of costs incurred by the seller, assuming these costs are recoverable
from the buyer (5).
Construction contracts
IAS 18 does not adequately address the issue of revenue recognition on a construction contract.
However, IAS 11 applies the basic principles we have already identified to such contracts, which are
defined in IAS 11 as follows (6):
‘Contracts specifically negotiated for the construction of an asset or a combination of assets that are
closely interrelated or interdependent in terms of their design, technology and function or their
ultimate purpose or use’.
Most construction contracts are ‘fixed price contracts’. In such contracts the seller agrees to a fixed
contract price, or a fixed rate per unit of output, which in some cases could be subject to cost
escalation clauses (6).
Whilst a construction contract relates to the supply of goods, the ‘critical event basis’ used in IAS 18
as a means of determining the timing of the recognition of revenue on the supply of goods is not
really suitable. This is because the ‘supply’ by the seller in the case of a construction contract takes
place gradually over the term of the contract. Therefore IAS 11 basically requires that, where the
outcome of a construction contract can be recognised reliably, revenue on such contracts should be
recognised according to the stage of completion of the contract (7). IAS 11 imposes conditions very
similar to the ones included in IAS 18 for the provision of services (3) that need to be satisfied
om
before the outcome of a construction contract can be recognised reliably (8):
.c
ya
en
a) Total contract revenue can be measured reliably.
k
ea
b) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the contract will flow to the seller.
om
c) Both the seller’s costs to complete the contract and the stage of contract completion at the
.s
w
end of the reporting period can be measured reliably.
w
w
d) The seller’s costs to date attributable to the contract can be clearly identified and measured
reliably so that actual costs incurred can be compared with prior estimates.
As is the case with service revenue recognition in IAS 18, IAS 11 does not prescribe one single
method of computing the stage of completion of a construction contract. IAS 11 provides the
following examples of methods that might be suitable (9):
a) The proportion that contract costs incurred for work performed to date bear to total estimated
contract costs.
b) Surveys of work performed.
c) Completion of a physical proportion of the contract work.
In another similarity with the treatment of revenue from the rendering of services under IAS 18, IAS
11 states that (10):
‘Where the outcome of a construction contract cannot be estimated reliably revenue shall be
recognised only to the extent of contract costs incurred that it is probable will be recoverable’.
In summary, then, IAS 11 very much applies the principles set out in IAS 18 (for the recognition of
revenue on the rendering of services) to the recognition of revenue from construction contracts.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 133
FINANCIAL REPORTING
IAS 18 states that entities should recognise revenue from the use of their assets yielding interest,
royalties and dividends when (11):
a) It is probable that the economic benefits associated with the transaction will flow to the entity.
b) The amount of the revenue can be measured reliably.
The exact basis for the recognition of revenue from the use by others of the ‘seller’s’ assets depends
on the type of transaction (12):
om
.c
HIRE PURCHASE
ya
en
In hire purchase transactions, the buyer will be required to pay a deposit and the remaining balance
k
ea
to be paid in form of installments.
om
.s
w
As a result, the total amount paid by the buyer is called the Hire Purchase Price (H.P.P)
w
w
Accounting for Hire Purchase transactions will require both books of the buyer and the seller be
maintained.
i. Asset account
ii. Hire Purchase Liability account/ Hire Purchase vendor account/ Hire Purchase sellers account.
iii. Interest expense account
iv. Depreciation account (provision)
om
- Hire Purchase Debtors a/c
.c
ya
- Hire Purchase sales a/c
en
- HP trading a/c
k
ea
- Interest income/ receivable a/c
om
- Repossession a/c
.s
- Provision for unrealized profit a/c
w
w
w
Accounting Entries in the books of the seller
N/B: The main challenge in Hire Purchase transactions is writing off of the Hire Purchase interest.
In this method, the number of installments are allocated interest accordingly to the digits of that
installment. Installments with the highest digit being allocated to the first installment and the
smallest digit to the last installment.
om
.c
3. Actuarial method ( reducing balance method)
ya
ken
In this method, interest is written / apportioned on a reducing balance basis.
ea
om
To recognize interest, two methods are applicable:
.s
w
w
w
a. Installment method:
This is where interest is to be apportioned/ recognized in the income statement where it’s actually
written off i.e. amount written off is similar to the amount recognized for that installment period.
b. Suspense method
In this method, the whole interest is first recognized in the interest suspense account and transfered
to the HP liability a/c.
However, for income statement purposes only the amount that’s to be charged in the year is treated
as expense.
According to this method, no profit is recognized until the total cost is recovered.
b. Installment Method
According to this method gross profit is recognized on the basis of the installment paid.
N/B: The installment method is preferred to the cost recovery method because it agrees with the
matching concept of accounting.
ILLUSTRATION
On 1st January 2010 during a very dry season, Mr. Sonko Ltd bought an equipment without fear or
favour from Masikini Ltd an HP systems. The cash price of the equipment was Sh 680,000. The HP
terms provided for a deposit of Sh 200,000 and the balance in 3 equal annual installments of sh
240,000 payable on 31st December each year. Using the sum of digit method to apportion interest
and suspense method to recognize interest, prepare the necessary accounts in the books of the buyer
om
and seller.
.c
ya
en
For revision purposes.
k
ea
a) Apportion interest using straight line method
om
b) Sum of year digits
.s
c) Actuarial method
w
w
w
Solution
240 000
= . 80 000
3
c) Actuarial Method
Cash price 680,000
Less: Deposit (200,000)
Loan amount 480,000
Add: Interest rate 10% (480,000 x 10%) 48,000
Less: 1st Installment (240,000)
Balance 288,000
2nd Interest (10%) 28,800
Less: 2nd installment (240,000)
Balance 76,800
Add: 3rd interest (10%) 7,680
Less: 3rd installment (240,000)
Balance
Equipment Account
Sh. Sh.
om
2010 2010
.c
HP vendor account 680,000 Bal c/d 680,000
ya
2011 2011
ken
Bal b/d 680,000 Bal c/d 680,000
ea
2012 2012
om
Bal b/d 680,000 Bal c/d 680,000
.s
w
w
w
HP Vendor (Masikini Ltd) Account
Sh. Sh.
2010 2010
Bank (deposit) 200,000 Equipment account 680,000
Bank (Installment) 240,000 Interest suspense account 240,000
Bal c/d 480,000 920,000
920,000
2011 2011
Bank (Installment) 240,000 Bal b/d 480,000
Bal c/d 240,000 ______
480,000 480,000
2012 2012
Bank (Installment) 240,000 Bal b/d 240,000
om
Books of the Seller
.c
ya
Interest Suspense Account
ken
ea
Sh. Sh.
om
.s
2010 2010
w
w
HP sales account 680,000 Bank (deposit) 200,000
w
Int. suspense account 240,000 Bank (installment) 240,000
______ Bal c/d 480,000
920,000 920,000
2011 2011
Bal b/d 480,000 Bank (Installment) 240,000
Bal c/d 240,000
480,000
2012 240,000 2012
Bal b/d Bank (installment) 240,000
HP Sales
Sh. Sh.
2010 680,000 2010 680,000
HP trading account HP debtors Account
om
Illustration
.c
ya
Tajiri Mjanja Ltd bought two motor vehicles at a garage without fear during a dry spell of 1st
ken
January 2006 from Masikini Mjinga on Hire purchase system. The cost of each vehicle was sh
ea
800,000 which was payable with a deposit of sh 170000 and the balance in three equal installment
om
plus interest at the rate of 10%. The original cost of each of the vehicles from the manifacturerwas
.s
w
640,000.Prepare the necessary accounts in the books of both the buyer and the seller.
w
w
NB: The actuarial method is used to apportion interest and installment method to recognize interest.
Sh. Sh.
2006 2006
H.P liability account 16,00,000 Bal. c/d 1,600,000
2007 2007
Bal. b/d 1,600,000 Bal. c/d 1,600,000
2008 2008
Bal. b/d 1,600,000 Bal c/d 1,600,000
om
Bank (deposit) 340,000 Motor vehicle account 1,600,000
.c
Bank (installment) 546,000 Interest expenses account 126,000
ya
Bal. c/d 840,000 ______
ken
1,726,000 2007 1,726,000
ea
2007 Bal. c/d
om
.s
Bank (installment) 504,000 Interest expenses account 840,000
w
Bal. b/d 420,000 2008 84,000
w
w
924,000 924,000
2008 Bal c/d
Bank (installment) 462,000 Interest expenses account 420,000
______ 42,000
462,000 462,000
om
.c
Interest Income Account
ya
Sh. Sh.
ken
2006 2006
ea
om
Profit and loss account 126,000 HP debtor’s account 126,000
.s
2007 2007
w
w
Profit and loss account 84,000 HP debtor’s account 84,000
w
2008 2008
Profit and loss account 42,000 HP debtor’s account 42,000
Realized profits:
2006
= .
320 000
= 152,000
2007
Realized profit = 320 000
= 236,000
2008
Realized profit 320 000
= 320,000
Unrealized profits
.
2006
840 000
320 000 = 168 000
1 600 000
2007
420 000
320 000 = 84 000
1 600 000
2008 =
Provision for Unrealised Profits Account
Sh. Sh.
2006 2006
P & L (Realised profit) 152,000 Bal. c/d -
Bal c/d 168,000 HP Trading account 320,000
320,000 320,000
2007 2007
P & L Realised profit 84,000 Bal. c/d 168,000
om
(236 – 152) 84,000 ______
.c
ya
Bal. b/d 168,000 168,000
en
2008 2008
k
ea
P & L (Realised) 84,000 Bal. b/d 84,000
om
.s
w
Balance Sheet Extract
w
w
Sh. Sh.
Assets:
Current Assets
2006
HP debtors 840,000
Less: provision for unrealized profits (168,000) 672,000
2007
HP debtors 420,000
Less: Provision for unrealized profits (84,000) 336,000
REPOSSESSION
This is when an asset purchased on Hire Purchase system by the buyer is taken back to the owner
(seller) basically because the buyer has contradicted the Hire Purchase terms e.g. defaulting to pay
any one given installment.
When the buyer defaults in payment of any installment, the vendor has a right to repossess the goods
sold on Hire Purchase.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 143
FINANCIAL REPORTING
i. Complete repossession
1. The entries for Hire Purchase interest would be passed as usual to the date of default.
2. The buyer will close the account of the seller by transferring the balance in the asset account.
Thus;
Dr. HP vendor a/c xx
Cr. Asset a/c xx
3. The buyer will also close the accumulated depreciation account by transferring it to the
a/c.Thus
Dr.Accumulated depreciation a/c
Cr.Asset a/c.
4. Any remaining balance in the asset a/c will be closed to the p/l a/c as either a profit or loss
1. The entries for hire purchase entries and repossession will be passed to the books of the buyer
as usual.
2. The buyer will close the a/c of the seller.
3. The buyer will adjust the asset at cost a/c to reflect a balance to be carried forward which
should be equal to the historical cost of the not repossessed.
om
4. All the account balances will be close into asset account and profit or loss ascertained.
.c
ya
en
Books of the seller
k
ea
om
1. On repossession the seller will close the a/c of the buyer by transferring the balance to goods
.s
reposed a/c or repossession a/c.Thus;
w
Dr.Repossesion a/c
w
w
Cr.HP debtors a/c with balance amount unpaid
2. The repossession a/c will further be debited with repair overhaul or reconditioning expense and
it will also be credited with a resale if any. Thus
a)with repair cost overhaul/reconditionig
Dr.Repossession a/c
Cr.Bank a/c
b)with cash proceeds on resale
Dr.Bank a/c
Cr.Repossession a/c
om
.c
ya
Required
en
k
ea
Prepare the necessary account in the books of the seller and bonus of the buyer.
om
.s
NB: Interest was apportioned on straight line basis.
w
w
w
Solution
Tractor Account
Sh. Sh.
2006 2006
H.P vendor account 2000,000 Depreciation 400,000
_______ Bal. c/d 1600,000
2000,000 2,000,0000
2007 2007
Bal. b/d 1,600,000 Depreciation 400,000
_______ Bal. c/d 1200,000
1,600,000 1,600,000
2008 2008
Bal. b/d 1200,000 Depreciation 400,000
______ HP vendor account 600,000
1,200,000 P & L (Bal. fig) 200,000
1,600,000
HP Vendor Account
Sh. Sh.
om
2006 2006
.c
Bank (deposit) 680,000 Tractor account 2000,000
ya
Bank (installment) 600,000 Interest expense account 160,000
en
Bal. c/d 880,000 _____
k
ea
2,160,000 2,160,0000
om
2007 2007
.s
w
Bank (installment) 600,000 Depreciation 880,000
w
w
Bal. b/d 440,000 Bal. c/d 160,000
1,040,000 1,040,000
2008 2008
Bank (installment) 600,000 Bal b/d
HP Debtors Account
Sh. Sh.
2006 2006
HP sales account 2000,000 Bank (deposit) 680,000
Interest income account 160,000 Bank (installment) 600,000
_______ Bal. c/d 880,000
2,160,000 2,160,000
2007 2007
Bal. b/d 880,000 Bank (installment) 600,000
Interest income account 160,000 Bal. b/d 440,000
1,040,000 1,040,000
2008 2008
Bal. b/d 440,000 Repossession account 600,000
Interest income account 160,000
Repossession Account
Sh. Sh.
2008 2008
om
HP Debtors account 600,000 Bank (Resale) 1,000,000
.c
Bank (repair) 200,000
ya
P & L (Profit) 200,000 ______
en
1,000,000 1,000,000
k
ea
om
Interest Income Account
.s
w
Sh. Sh.
w
w
2006 2006
Profit and loss account 160,000 HP debtors account 160,000
2007 2007
Profit and loss account 160,000 HP debtors account 160,000
2008 2008
Profit and loss account 160,000 HP debtors account 160,000
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
It’s a contract for the construction of an asset or of a combination of assets, which together
constitutes a single project. e.g. buildings, roads bridges etc. that often requires more than one year
to complete.
Features of a contract
1. A unique property is produced at the site.
2. The contract is obtained by bidding or negotiation.
3. The WIP is owned by the customer
4. The contract is financed by the client through progress biddings.
5. The original contract may be modified through changes in inflation rate. I.e. Escalation clause
is included that allows the adjustments of the contract price entries upwards or downwards.
Accounting Issues
1. Revenue recognition: there’s a problem of allocation of revenue and cost to the accounting
period i.e. the problem of how and when to recognize revenue
2. Revaluation of stock and work in progress(wip)
3. The treatment of progress biddings.
om
.c
ya
ken
TYPES OF CONTRACTS
ea
om
1. Fixed price contract
.s
w
w
w
It’s a contract that provider for a single price to all works performed by the contractor.
It’s ideal for short term contract.
This contract includes a fixed price for each unit of output under the contract.
It’s possible where the contract is divisible into standard unit.
It provides for reimbursement of specified cost incurred by the contractor plus a percentage of the
cost on a fixed fee for the contractor.
It provides a fixed rate for the contract already on labor hours plus payment for cost or materials and
other specified items.
Accounting Approaches
According to this method, revenue is recognized on the basis of completion at the end of accounting
period i.e. based on percentage of completion.
om
d. Value approach
.c
ya
work certi ied
en
100
Contract price
k
ea
N/B:
om
1. Physical inspection of the project may be required to substantiate the percent of completion
.s
w
estimated by the forgone method.
w
w
2. If the percent of completion is less than 20%, no profit should be recognized but losses
recognized in full.
3. Where completion stage is above 99% then contract is substantially completed and revenues
are recognized in full.
1. it’s consistent with the actual concept of accounting (matching concept) i.e. it recognizes
revenue when earned and not when received and expenses when incurred and hence it also
obeys the accrual concept.
2. It’s ideal for long-term contracts
3. It complies with prudence principle as far as losses are concerned i.e. any anticipated loss is
recognized in full.
Definition of Terms
1. Retention money
It’s the amount retained by the client to be paid after the completion of the contract. It will be seen
as an asset to the contracting entity.
2. Escalation clause
It’s a clause that allows for the adjustments on the contract price due to changes in prices.
The objective is to protect both the client and the contractor due to advance changes in prices.
Under this method, revenue and profits are recognized when the contract is completed or
substantially completed i.e. when remaining costs and potential risks are insignificant in amount.
Costs and progress payments received are accumulated during the course of the contracts but profit
is not recognized until the contract activity is substantially completed.
om
.c
a. A contractor has primarily short-term contract which are completed in one year or less.
ya
b. If estimates of input/ output measures of completion are not reasonably dependable.
en
k
ea
Features of completed contract method
om
.s
w
1. Construction in progress is valued at cost.
w
w
2. No profit is recognized until the contract is completed and the work accepted.
3. During the year when the project is under construction. Only losses are reported to the
external operating expenses.
4. All other construction costs appear in the balance sheet as stock (WIP)
5. In the year when the contract is completed the entire profit is recognized although only a
small proportion of work would have been done that year.
The principle advantage of the completed contract method is that it is based on results as determined
when the contract is completed, or substantially completed rallies than on estimated which may
require subsequent adjustment as a result of unforeseen cost and possible losses.
The risk of recognizing profit that may have been earned is therefore minimized.
The completed contract is inconsistent with the accrual of accounting because the period the income
is reported does not reflect the period of activity on contract during the period.
Key terms
1. Government
Government agencies and similar bodies whether local, national or international e.g. Japan
International corporation Agency (JICA), Darnish International Development Corporation Agency
and Canadian Development Agency (CIDA)
2. Government Assistant
Is the government action i.e. assistance to give an economic benefit specifying to an entity under
certain criteria
3. Government Grants
They’re government assistance in the form of transfer of resources to an entity in return for past or
future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operations of an entity.
om
These are grants whose primary conditions are that an entity qualifying for them should purchase,
.c
construct or otherwise acquire non-current assets.
ya
en
5. Grants related to income
k
ea
om
Are grants other than those related to assets e.g. grants to pay operating expenses or particular
.s
w
project/ contract.
w
w
6. Forgivable loans
These are loans which the lender undertakes to waive repayment with certain prescribed conditions.
An entity should not recognize government grants until it has reasonable assurance that the entity
will comply with any conditions attached to the grant and the entity will actually receive the grant.
Receiving a grant does not mean that prove that conditions attached to it.
The manner of receipt of the grant is irrelevant i.e. the treatment of the government is the same
whether received in cash or given as reduction in liability.
For a forgivable loan, it should be treated in the same way as a government grant. When there’s a
reasonable assurance that the entity will need the relevant term and for the forgiveness.
There are two methods by which the government grants can be accounted for:
i. Capital approach
ii. Income approach
i) Capital approach
Credit the grants directly to the shareholder’s interest. Arguments for this approach under IAS 20
are:
a. Grants are not earned they’re incentives without related costs so it will be wrong to post them
in the profit & loss account.
b. Grants are a financing device so they should be posted to the statement of financial position.
Here grants are credited to the profit & loss over one or more periods.
a) Grants aren’t received from shareholders so they should not Credit to the shareholders
interest.
b) Grants aren’t given or receipt for nothing, they are earned by compliance with.
c) Grants are an extension for fiscal policies and so like income taxes and other taxes which are
om
charged against income. Then grants should be credited to income.
.c
ya
IAS 20 requires grants to be recognized under the income approach and hence match them with
ken
related costs which they have been received to compensate.
ea
om
It will be against the accrual assumption to credit grants to income on a receipt basis so a systematic
.s
w
basis of matching must be used.
w
Non-Monetary Government Grants
w
A Non-monetary asset may be transferred by the government to an entity as a grant e.g. a piece of
land or other resources.
The fair value of such an asset is usually assessed and this is used to account for the assets and the
grant.
There are two choices here on how government grants related to assets (including non-monetary
grants at fair value) should be shown in the statement of financial position.
Capital Approach
1. On receipt of government grant:
Dr. Cash a/c
Cr. Grant a/c
om
2. To record the acquisition
.c
Dr. Asset a/c
ya
en
Cr. Cash a/c
k
ea
om
3. To record the depreciation for the period of the asset
.s
Dr. Grant a/c
w
w
Cr. Asset a/c
Illustration: w
A company receives a 20% grants towards the cost of a new item which costs Shs. 100,000 and has
a useful life of four years and a nil residue value.
The expected profit of the company is Sh. 50,000 per annum before accounting for depreciation in
each year.
Required:
Profit & loss account extract and statement of financial position extracts by:
a) Deducting the grant in arriving at the carrying amount of the asset. ( Capital Approach)
b) Set up the grant as a deferred income (Income approach)
SOLUTION
a. Capital approach
= = 20 000
om
Statement of financial position (Extract)
.c
ya
en
Assets Yr1 Yr2 Yr3 Yr4
k
ea
Non-current assets
om
Property,plant & equip 80,000 80,000 80,000 80,000
.s
w
Less:acc dep (20,000) (40,000) (60,000) (80,000)
w
NBV 60,000 40,000 20,000
Income Approach w
Grant = 20%×100,000=20,000
Loans at a low or zero interest rates area form of government assistance but the computation of
interest does not fully quantity the benefit received.
Disclosure
om
.c
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
REVISION EXERCISES
QUESTION 1
a) Distinguish between “leasing” and “hire purchase” highlighting how each is accounted for.
b) Kopesha Limited has been in business for several years dealing in electronic goods. All the firm’s
goods are sold on hire purchase terms. The following trial balance extracted from the books of the
firm as at 31 March 2006:
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Ordinary share capital 53,200
Cash at bank and in hand 1,800
Accounts payable 5,000
Operating expenses 16,000
Property, plants and equipment (1 April 2005) 55,000
Depreciation (1 April 2005 20,000
Hire purchase installments receivable 34,200
Hire purchase sales 55,200
Purchases 24,600
Inventory (1 April 2005) 1,800 -
133,400 133,400
om
Additional information:
.c
ya
1. Inventory as at 31 March 2006 was valued at sh.2,400,000.
en
2. Property, plant and equipment should be depreciated at sh.5,000,000 for the year ended 31 March
k
ea
2006.
om
3. Each unit was sold on hire purchase basis on the following terms:
.s
w
Sh.
w
w
Cash price 40,000
Deposit (10,000)
Interest 30,000
6,000
36,000
4. Assume that all sales are made at the end of each quarter. The quarters end on 31 march, 30 June ,
30 September and 31 December respectively. The balance due on each hire purchase sale is
payable in four equal installments of Sh. 9,000 per quarter payable at the end of each quarter and
commencing in the quarter following that in which the sale was made.
5. The number of units sold during each quarter were made as follows:
6. The sum of digits method is to be used to apportion interest, the appropriate amount being
credited to the quarter in which an installment is received.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 156
FINANCIAL REPORTING
7. Included in the operating expense is a lease rental payment of Sh.2,000,000 paid at the
commencement of the financial year. This relates to equipment whose fair value is Sh.8,000,000.
The payment has been treated as an operating lease whereas it is a finance lease . The duration of
the lease is 5 years and interest is at 10% er annum. Lease rentals are paid in advance.
Required:
i) Trading, profit and loss account for the year ended 31 March 2006.
ii) Balance sheet as at 31 March 2006
Solution:
a) Leasing:
The Rights to use an asset by one party called the lessee in return for rentals paid to another party
called the lessor. The lessor retains ownership of the asset throughout the period of lease.
Hire Purchase:
An asset is acquired by way of installment payment, whereby ownership eventually passes to the
buyer when the last installment has been paid.
Accounting issues:
om
Leasing:
.c
The main issues in leases is making a distinction between an operating lease and a finance lease, and
ya
en
in addition in a finance lease how to deal with the interest i.e allocating in the interest over the lease
k
period.
ea
om
.s
Hire Purchase:
w
w
In hire purchase the main issue is on how to allocate Gross profit and interest over the installment
w
period by the seller and how to account for interest by the buyer.
b)
Kopesha limited
Trading profit and loss account for the year ended 31 March 2006.
Sh
Sales (55,200 – 7,200) 48,000
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 1,800
Purchase 24,600
Closing inventory 26,400
Gross profit (2,400) (24,000)
Interest on Hire Purchase sales 24,000
2,100
Expenses: 26,100
Depreciation: Property, Plant and equipment 6,600
Other operating expenses (16,000- 2,000) 14,000
Interest in finance lease (8,000-2,000) x 10% 600 (21,200)
Net profit 4,900
Kopesha limited
balance sheet as at 31 March 2006
Non-current assets: Sh’000’ Sh’000’
Property, Plant and Equipment: (55000+8000) 63,000
Depreciation (20000+5000+16000) (26,000)
36,400
Current Assets:
Inventory 2,400
Receivables (34200-5100) 29,100
Cash at bank and in hand 1,800 33,300
Total Assets 69,700
om
Workings:
.c
ya
en
i) interest included in hire purchase sales (in thousands of shillings)
k
ea
(100+200+300+600) x 6000) = Sh. 7,200
om
.s
ii) Sum of digits for instalments
w
w
(4 x (4+1))/2=10
w
iii) Interest earned
Shs ‘000’
Quarter ended June ((4+3+2)/10x (100x6000) 540
Quarter ended September ((4+3)/10x (200x6000) 840
Quarter ended December ((4/10x (300x6000) 720
Total interest on hire purchase 2,100
7,200
Less: Reported to profit and loss (2,100)
Interest outstanding (Deducted from Receivables) 5,100
(iv)
Finance lease: Sh’000’
Profit and Loss Expense
Balance of Liability at 1.4.05 8,000
Less:instalment paid (2,000)
Balance outstanding 6,000
Interest at 10% per annum 600
Balance sheet Liability: Sh’000’
QUESTION 2
a) Explain the difference between the cost-recovery method and the instalment method of
recognising gross profit from instalment sales.
b) Bontex Enterprises sells its goods, both new and repossessed, on an instalment plan basis and
recognises gross profit on the sales using the instalment method.
Given below is the information extracted from the books of the business for the two financial years
ended 31 December 2001 and 2002:
2002 2001
om
Sh. Sh.
.c
Instalment sales 800,000 480,000
ya
Purchases 560,000 324,000
ken
Opening stock 180,000
ea
om
Closing stock 140,000 120,000
.s
Operating expenses 34,500
w
Depreciation charge 20,000
w
w
Instalment debtors:
From sales of year ended 31 December 2001 60,000 180,000
From sales of year ended 31 December 2002 280,000 -
1. When a customer defaults on his payments, the goods are repossessed and recorded at their
approximate market value in a separate inventory account.
• Repossessions made in the year of sale are valued at 50% of the original sale price.
• Repossessions made from the sales of previous years are valued at 30% of the original sale
price.
3. There were no defaults in the year ended 31 December 2001 but in the year ended 31
December 2002, defaults occurred as follows:
Required:
a) Instalment debtors account and provision for unrealised gross profit account for the sales
made in the years to 31 December 2001 and 2002 as at 31 December 2002.
b) Repossessed goods account as at 31 December 2002.
c) Profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2002.
Solution:
om
- Cost recovery method is a method whereby gross profit on an instalment sale is recognised after
.c
collecting enough cash from the debtors to cover the cost of sale.
ya
- No profit is recognised on an instalment sale before cash equal to the cost of sale is collected.
en
- Realised gross profit is any amount collected from the debtors over and above cash collected to cover
k
ea
the cost of sale.
om
- Instalment sales method is a method whereby every cash collected from a debtor covers both gross
.s
w
profit and cost of sales based on the gross profit percentage.
w
- Gross profit is not recognised on any uncollected debtors.
(b) (i) w
Bontex Enterprises Debtors Account
Sh. Sh.
Debtors A/c 4,000 Balance b/d (20% x Sh.180,000) 36,000
P & L A/c (20% x Sh.100,000) 20,000
Bal c/d (10% x 60,000) 12,000 _____
36,000 36,000
om
.c
ya
Bontex Enterprises Unrealised Gross Profit A/c (2002)
ken
ea
Sh. Sh.
om
Debtors A/c 18,000 Profit and loss a/c 88,000
.s
w
Bal c/d (25% x Sh.280,000) [25% x Sh.(800,000 – 448,000)]
w
w
70,000 _____
88,000 88,000
Sh. Sh.
Debtors A/c 2001 12,000 Trading A/c 60,000
2002
48,000 _____
60,000 60,000
(iii)
Bontex Enterprises
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31 December 2002
om
.c
ya
Note: The trading account for the year 2001 is prepared to help determine gross profit for calculation of
en
gross profit percentage.
k
ea
om
Workings:
.s
w
w
(a) Calculation of gross profit percentage:
= 20%
= 25%
(b) Calculation of net unrealised profit deducted from gross profit for the year 2002:
Shs
Unrealised gross profit in debtors of 2002 c/d (25% of 280,000) 70,000
Unrealised gross profit on defaulted debts of 2002 (25% of 72,000) 18,000
Unrealised gross profit b/d 88,000
Less: Realised gross profit on collections from debtors of 2001
(20% of 100,000) 20,000
Net unrealised gross profit 68,000
QUESTION 3
a) Explain the difference between a fixed price contract and a cost plus contract.
b) Jenga Ltd., is a construction company whose financial year ends on 31 March. The information
provided below was extracted from the books of the company in connection with the three
construction contracts undertaken by the company during the financial year ended 31 Mach
2005.
om
the contract to date
.c
General administration expenses 60 120 30
ya
en
k
Required:
ea
om
.s
Using the percentage of completion method of accounting for long-term construction contracts:
w
w
w
a) Calculate the profit or loss realised on each contract for the year ended 31 Marcy 2005.
b) Prepare profit and loss account extracts for each contract for the year ended 31 March 2005.
c) Prepare balance sheet extracts as at 31 March 2005.
Solution:
i) A fixed price contract is a construction contract which has either a fixed price for the whole contract
or per unit.
ii) Due to variations in the prices of inputs a fixed price contract may have a cost escalation clause
iii) A cost plus contract is a construction contract in which the contractor is refunded the cost incurred on
the contract and then added some amount agreed upon computed as proportion of the cost.
iv) The method is useful in a case where it is not possible to determine the cost of the contract at the
beginning especially when input prices are changing frequently.
b)
Sh. ‘000’
Contract No. 468 120
Contract No.469 (430)
Contract No.470 194
CONTRACT
Contract Contract No.469 Contract
No.470
No. 468
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Gross profit/(loss) 120 (430) 194
Less: General administration costs 60 120 30
Net profit/ (loss) 60 (550) 164
Alternative method
Revenue 720 570 694
Cost of sales (cost incurred in the year) 600 1,000 500
om
Gross profit/(loss) 120 (430) 194
.c
ya
Less: General administration expenses 60 120 30
en
Net profit/(loss) 60 (550) 164
k
ea
om
Comment
.s
w
w
Revenue for each contract is the sum of costs incurred in the year and realized gross profit or loss for the
w
year.
CONTRACT
Contract Contract No.469 Contract
No.470
No. 468
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Cost incurred to date 2,400 4,000 2,000
Add/(less)
Gross profit/(loss) realized to date 480 (400) 174
2,880 3,600 1,826
Less: Total billings to date 2,800 4,500 1,800
Work in progress 80 (900) 26
Comment
Contract number 469 has no work in progress but instead excess billings over work in progress and is
therefore treated as current liability.
CONTRACT
Contract Contract No.469 Contract
No.470
No. 468
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Total billings to date 2,800 4,500 1,800
Less: Total cash received 2,600 4,200 1,700
Debtors 200 300 100
Balance Sheet Extract Sh. ‘000’
Current assets
Work in progress (80 + 26) 106
Debtors 600
706
Current liability
Excess of billings over work in progress 900
Comment
Debtors balance is alternatively called “due from customers” while excess of billings over work in progress
om
is alternatively called “due to customers”.
.c
ya
en
Workings
k
ea
om
Contract Contract Contract
.s
No. 468 No.469 No.470
w
w
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
w
Contract price 3,600 4,800 2,500
Cost incurred upto 31 March 2004 1,800 3,000 1,500
Costs incurred I the year 600 1,000 500
Total costs incurred to date (ii) + (iii) 2,400 4,000 2,000
Estimated total cost of contract 3,000 5,200 2,300
Estimated total gross profit/(loss) on the contract (i) – 600 (400) 200
(v)
Gross profit/(loss) realized to date (vi) x (iv) ÷ (v) 480 (400) 174
Profit /(loss) reported to date on contract 360 30 (20)
Realized profit/(loss) for the year (vii) – (viii) 120 (430) 194
TOPIC 4
FARMING
Agriculture-related definitions
The following terms are used in this Standard with the meanings specified:
Agricultural activity is the management by an entity of the biological transformation and harvest of
om
biological assets for sale or for conversion into agricultural produce or into additional biological
.c
ya
assets.
ken
ea
Agricultural produce - is the harvested product of the entity’s biological assets.
om
A biological asset - is a living animal or plant.
.s
Biological transformation -comprises the processes of growth, degeneration, production,
w
w
and procreation that cause qualitative or quantitative changes in a biological asset.
w
A group of biological assets - is an aggregation of similar living animals or plants.
Harvest is the detachment of produce from a biological asset or the cessation of a biological
asset’s life processes.
Costs to sell are the incremental costs directly attributable to the disposal of an asset,
excluding finance costs and income taxes
Agricultural activity covers a diverse range of activities; for example, raising livestock, forestry,
annual or perennial cropping, cultivating orchards and plantations, floriculture, and aquaculture
(including fish farming). Certain common features exist within this diversity:
Capability to change
Living animals and plants are capable of biological transformation;
Management of change
Management facilitates biological transformation by enhancing, or at least stabilising,
conditions necessary for the process to take place (for example, nutrient levels, moisture,
temperature, fertility, and light). Such management distinguishes agricultural activity from
other activities. For example, harvesting from unmanaged sources (such as ocean fishing and
deforestation) is not agricultural activity; and
Measurement of change
The change in quality (for example, genetic merit, density, ripeness, fat cover, protein content,
and fibre strength) or quantity (for example, progeny, weight, cubic metres, fibre length or
diameter, and number of buds) brought about by biological transformation or harvest is
measured and monitored as a routine management function.
Initial recognition
Measurement
Biological assets within the scope of IAS 41 are measured on initial recognition and at
subsequent reporting dates at fair value less estimated costs to sell, unless fair value cannot be
reliably measured.
Agricultural produce is measured at fair value less estimated costs to sell at the point of
harvest. Because harvested produce is a marketable commodity, there is no 'measurement
om
reliability' exception for produce.
.c
ya
The gain on initial recognition of biological assets at fair value less costs to sell, and changes
en
in fair value less costs to sell of biological assets during a period, are included in profit or
k
ea
loss.
om
A gain on initial recognition (e.g. as a result of harvesting) of agricultural produce at fair
.s
value less costs to sell are included in profit or loss for the period in which it arises.
w
w
All costs related to biological assets that are measured at fair value are recognised as
w
expenses when incurred, other than costs to purchase biological assets.
IAS 41 presumes that fair value can be reliably measured for most biological assets.
However, that presumption can be rebutted for a biological asset that, at the time it is initially
recognised, does not have a quoted market price in an active market and for which alternative
fair value measurements are determined to be clearly unreliable. In such a case, the asset is
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. But the entity must
still measure all of its other biological assets at fair value less costs to sell. If circumstances
change and fair value becomes reliably measurable, a switch to fair value less costs to sell is
required.
Other issues
The change in fair value of biological assets is part physical change (growth, etc) and part unit price
change. Separate disclosure of the two components is encouraged, not required.
Agricultural produce is measured at fair value less costs to sell at harvest, and this measurement is
considered the cost of the produce at that time (for the purposes of IAS 2 Inventories or any other
applicable standard).
Agricultural land is accounted for under IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment. However, biological
assets (other than bearer plants) that are physically attached to land are measured as biological assets
separate from the land. In some cases, the determination of the fair value less costs to sell of the
biological asset can be based on the fair value of the combined asset (land, improvements and
biological assets).
Government grants
Unconditional government grants received in respect of biological assets measured at fair value less
costs to sell are recognised in profit or loss when the grant becomes receivable.
If such a grant is conditional (including where the grant requires an entity not to engage in certain
agricultural activity), the entity recognises the grant in profit or loss only when the conditions have
been met.
Disclosure requirements in IAS 41 include:
Aggregate gain or loss from the initial recognition of biological assets and agricultural
produce and the change in fair value less costs to sell during the period
description of an entity's biological assets, by broad group
Description of the nature of an entity's activities with each group of biological assets and non-
financial measures or estimates of physical quantities of output during the period and assets
on hand at the end of the period
om
Information about biological assets whose title is restricted or that are pledged as security
.c
Commitments for development or acquisition of biological assets
ya
en
Financial risk management strategies
k
Reconciliation of changes in the carrying amount of biological assets, showing separately
ea
om
changes in value, purchases, sales, harvesting, business combinations, and foreign exchange
.s
difference
w
w
Objectives of farm accounting w
a) For control purposes e.g. the farmer can control his activities such as stock inputs.
b) To facilitate credit transactions with suppliers
c) To help in making managerial decisions
d) To evaluate the performance of the concern i.e. whether you are operating at a profit/ loss.
e) To help the farmer in obtaining a loan i.e. financial assistance from third parties.
1. Inter-activity transfers;
Dr. Revenue a/c (input)
Cr. Revenue a/c (output).
Generally a farm is employed with different economic activities e.g. poultry, fishing, crops,
dairy cattle etc.
As a result the output of one economic activity may be used by another economic activity as an
input.
To account for this, the output of the farmer activity should be treated as an income for that
respective activity and as an expense for the latter activity.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 168
FINANCIAL REPORTING
3. Related items
e.g. In sale of related items, the proceedings on sale related items should be treated as revenue in
the same department e.g. sale of eggs and manure.
In Family Labour: This is usually provided for free. It should be valued at market price and
treated as capital i.e. the double entry would be:
Dr. Wages/ General P&L account
Cr. Capital a/c
4. Family consumption
The family may consume some of the products. The products consumed should be valued at
market price and treated as both revenue as well as drawings i.e.
om
Dr. Drawings
.c
ya
Cr. Sales a/c / Revenues
ken
ea
5. Workers/ Labourers consumption
om
Labourers may at some point consume some products while working in the farm. The products
.s
consumed should be valued at market price and then treated as revenue in the respective
w
w
accounts and treated as well as general expense accounts to be transferred to P&L.
w
N/B:
i. At the end of accounting period all biological assets should be measured at their fair market
value less estimated point of sale cost.
ii. Stud animals:These livestock not meant for sale or meat production. They are also maintained
for other purposes such ploughing. They should be treated as fixed assets.
ILLUSTRATION
Joseph Mokua, a farmer extracted the following trial balance as at 31 October 2004:
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Crop insurance 240
Stocks as at 1 November 2003
Growing crops, wheat, seeds and fertilizers 1,000
Livestock 1,250
Livestock feeds 300
Land and buildings at cost 10,000
Farm machinery (cost Sh. 5,400,000) 3,900
Profit and loss account balance (1 November 2003) 500
Loan from Farmers’ Bank Ltd 3,000
Sale of wheat 1,750
Sale of cattle 3,000
Sale of carcass 750
Manager’s personal account 100
Bank overdraft 150
Sundry creditors 750
om
Interest on loan from Farmers Bank Ltd 225
.c
Office expenses 200
ya
Crop expenses 500
en
Livestock wages 800
k
ea
Other livestock expenses 615
om
Purchase of seeds 200
.s
Livestock purchases 625
w
w
Livestock feeds purchased 35
w
Capital 13,500
Farmhouse expenses 60
Staff meals 25
Repairs to farm machinery 50
Tools and implements (1 November 2003) 125
Sundry debtors 1,500
Cash in hand 1,300
Manager’s salary 300
General farm labour wages 250 _____
23,500 23,500
Additional information
1. The entire crop insurance was taken with effect from 1 November 2003 to provide an annual
risk cover against crop losses due to climatic risks such as floods, drought and plant diseases.
2. Manager’s salary and staff meals are charged to the livestock and crop activities in the ration
of 1:4 respectively.
3. Depreciation on tools and implements is to be apportioned equally between the crop and
livestock activities. The book value of tools and implements as at 31 October 2004 was Sh.
100,000.
4. Provisions for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 8% of the year end debtors and bad debts
of Sh. 25,000 are to be written off.
5. Farm machinery is to be depreciated at the rate of 20% per annum on cost.
6. Crops consumed by some of the farm labourers during the year ended 31 October 2004 were
valued at Sh. 50,000.
7. During the year ended 31 October 2004, Joseph Mokua’s family members provided general
farm labour valued at Sh. 100,000 the family also consumed crops valued at Sh. 160,000.
8. The loan from Farmers’ bank Ltd. was obtained on 1 January 2004 and was to be repaid in full
by the end of the fifth year. Interest was to be paid semi-annually on 30 June and 31 December
at the rate of 15% per annum. The entire loan was used on crop activities.
9. Assume there were no transfers of inputs between the main activities of crop farming and
livestock farming.
10. Stocks as at 31 October 2004 were as follows.
Shs. “000”
Growing crops 170
Wheat, seeds and fertilizers 300
Livestock 2,000
Livestock feeds 50
Required:
a) Crop account for the year ended 31 October 2004
om
b) Livestock account for the year ended 31 October 2004
.c
ya
c) General profit and loss account for the year ended 31 October 2004.
en
d) Balance sheet as at 31 October 2004.
k
ea
om
SOLUTION
.s
w
w
(a)
w
Joseph Mokua
Crop account for the year ended 31 October 2004
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Opening stocks: Growing crops, 1,000 Sale of wheat 1,750.0
Wheat seeds and fertilizers 200 Contra: Crops to workers 50.0
Purchases: seeds 1,200 Drawings 160.0
General P&L A/C 207.5
Closing stocks: Growing crops (170)
Wheat seeds and fertilizers (300)
Cost of crops, seeds & fertilizers 730.0
Crop insurance 240.0
Interest on loan from bank 375.0
Crop expenses 500.0
Contra: crops to workers 50.0
Staff meals 20.0
Depreciation: Tools and 12.5
implements 240.0 _____
Managers salary 2.167.5 2,167.5
(b)
Joseph Mokua
Livestock account for the year ended 31 October 2004
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Opening stock: livestock 1,250.0 Sale of cattle 3,000
Feeding materials 300.0 Sale of carcasses 750
Purchases: Livestock 625.0
Feeding materials 35.0
2,210.0
Closing stock: Livestock (2,000).0
Livestock feeds (50).0
Cost of livestock & materials 160.0
Wages for rearing livestock 800.0
Other livestock expenses 615.0
Staff meals 5.0
Depreciation: Tools & 12.5
implements 60.0
Managers salary 2,097.5 ____
Profit & loss A/C 3,750.0 3,750
om
.c
ya
en
(c)
k
ea
Joseph Mokua
om
General profit and loss account for the year ended 31 October 2004
.s
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
w
w
Livestock profit 2,097.5
w
Crop loss (207.5)
1,890.0
Less expenses :
Office expenses 200
Farmhouse expenses 60
Machinery repairs 50
Farmlabour wages 250
Bad debts 25
Provision for b/debts 118
Depn: Farm machinery 1,080
Labour by family 100 1,883
Net operating profit 7
(d)
Joseph Mokua
Balance sheet as at 31 October 2004
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Non-current assets:
Land and buildings 10,000
Farm machinery 2,820
Tools and implements 100
12,920
Current assets:
Stock: Growing crops 170
Wheat, seeds, fertilizers 300
Livestock 2,000
Livestock feeds 50
Sundry debtors 1,357
Cash in hand 1,300 5,177
18,097
Financed by:
Capital 13,600
om
Net Profit 507
.c
ya
14,007
en
Drawings (160)
k
ea
13,847
om
Loan 3,000
.s
16,847
w
w
Current liabilities:
w
Labour by family 100
Managers personal a/c 100
Bank overdraft 150
Sundry creditors 750
Accrued loan interest 150 1,250
18,097
INSURANCE FIRMS
Insurance companies
Insurance is a form of contract or agreement under which one party undertakes to indemnify another
party the losses suffered due to specified causes in consideration for a fixed sum of money known as
a premium. The party undertaking to indemnify another is called the insurer; whereas the party
paying the premiums in order to receive indemnity is called the insured. The document containing
the terms of the insurance contract is known as a policy.
Insurance is generally classified into two:
i) Life assurance
ii) General insurance
Life Assurance
Life assurance guarantees that, on the policy holder (or the insured) attaining a certain age or on his
death, he will receive a certain amount of money paid to him by the insurer.
Throughout the period of the policy, the insured has to pay regular premiums. Life assurance is
known as assurance because ultimately the policy must be paid whether due to death or maturity.
Some of the commonly used terms in life assurance are:
om
1) Annuity: This is an annual payment, which a life insurance office guarantees to pay regularly
.c
as long as one lives in consideration of a lump sum received at the beginning. It is almost the
ya
reverse of a live policy contract. The amount payable depends upon the age of the person
en
concerned (called an annuitant) and the prevailing rate of interest. The regular payment
k
ea
(annuity) is an expense, whereas the lump sum received at the beginning is called
om
‘consideration for annuities granted’ and is income.
.s
w
2) Whole life policy – is a policy, which matures on the policy holder attaining a certain age or
w
w
on his death, whichever is earlier.
3) Endowment policy is a policy, which matures on the policyholder attaining a certain age or
on his death, whichever is earlier.
4) With profits policies are those policies on which, in addition to a guaranteed sum payable on
maturity, a share of the profits of the life office will be payable.
5) Without profits policies are those which entitle the policy holder to get only a fixed sum of
money on maturity.
6) Bonus is the share of profit that the policyholder gets form the insurance company.
7) Reversionary bonus is that which is payable only on the maturity of the policy.
8) Bonus in cash is payable immediately.
9) Bonus in reduction of premimum is bonus which is payable in cash but the policyholder has
opted not to accept it in cash, and instead offset this against premiums due from him.
10) Reinsurance means insurance taken by an insurance company in order to cover itself against a
large risk.
11) Retrocession is where an insurance company reinsurance company reinsures one property
with more than on Reinsurance Company.
12) Commission on reinsurance ceded – when a company reinsures some of the risk, the
company will receive a commission from the reinsuring firm, such is known as commission
on reinsurance ceded and is income.
13) Commission on reinsurance accepted – when our insurance company decides to accept
reinsurance premiums from another insurance company because the other insurance company
decided to reinsure its business with us, we have to pay a commission to the other insurance
company. Such is known as commission on reinsurance accepted and is an expense.
14) Surrender value is the amount that a policyholder can get immediately in cash back from the
life assurance company if he stops paying premiums. It is the present cash value of the policy.
The other option to the policyholder is to get the policy.
15) Paid up – In this case, no further premiums are payable and the policy amount is reduced
proportionately to the number of premiums paid having regard to total number of premiums
payable. The policy will mature in its normal course.
16) Claim – means the amount payable due to the death of the policyholder it is called a ‘claim by
death’. If the claim is paid upon the policyholder attaining the age mentioned in the policy, it
is known as claims by maturity (or survivance)
om
recovered and recoverable from x Premiums received less premiums paid
.c
ya
reinsurance companies. x for reinsurance. x
en
Annuities paid and due x Consideration for annuities granted. x
k
Bonus paid in cash. x Interest received less withholding tax x
ea
om
Bonus utilized in reduction of premium x Dividend received less withholding tax x
.s
Rent income x
w
Expenses of management: Fines for getting lapsed policies revived x
w
w
Commissions to agents x Other gains incomes x
Salaries etc. x Registration fees x
Travelling expenses x
Directors fees x
Auditors fees x
Printing and stationery x
Rent for all offices occupied x
Bad debts x
Other expenses and losses x
Life assurance fund c/f x ___
xx xx
1. Claims: Any amount payable by the insurance company is called a claim. In life assurance
business, claims may arise due to two reasons i.e. by death or maturity. While calculating the
figure for claims all claims intimated and accepted or not accepted at the end of the year,
expenses relating to claims are to be added and out of the total claims outstanding at the
beginning of the year and reinsurance recoveries are to be deducted. The amount of
reinsurance recoveries is received under reinsurance contract and it reduces the total claims to
be paid by the business.
2. Annuity: It is annual payment which a life insurance company guarantees to pay for lump
sum money received in the beginning. It is an expense and shown on the debit side of revenue
account.
3. Surrender value: if an insured is unable to pay the future premium he can get his policy paid
from the corporation. It is the present cash value of the policy, which a holder gets from the
corporation on surrendering all the rights of the policy. There is no surrender value in case of
general insurance policies.
4. Bonus in cash: If the insurer has with profit policy, he will get the bonus from the
corporation. If the bonus is paid in cash, it is shown on the debit side of the revenue account
as an expense. Interim bonus will not be shown anywhere while preparing final accounts.
Instead it will be adjusted while calculating true surplus and amount to be paid to policy
holders.
5. Bonus in reduction of premium. Instead of paying bonus in cash, the corporation may
deduct the bonus from the premiums due from the insured. This is known as bonus in
reduction or premium. It is shown both on the debit side and credit side (by adding to the
premium) of revenue account.
6. Expenses of management: These are to be shown in combining the details constituting such
expenses can be given either in the revenue account or in the form of an attached schedule of
working note.
om
7. Bad debts taxes and other expenditure: These are to be shown separately on the debit side
.c
ya
of the revenue account.
en
8. Life assurance fund: The difference between the credit and debit side or revenue account is
k
ea
not profit but life assurance fund at the end of the period.
om
.s
Credit Side Items
w
w
1. Life assurance fund: This fund at the beginning of the period is to be shown on the credit
w
side of the revenue account.
2. Premium: The premium received during the accounting period plus outstanding at the end
of the period plus, bonus in reduction of premium minus outstanding premium at the
beginning of the period minus reinsurance premium is to be shown under this heading.
3. Consideration for Annuities Granted: Any lump sum payment received by the insurance
company in lieu of granting annuity is called as consideration for annuity granted and will
be shown as an income on the credit side of revenue account.
4. Interest, Dividend and Rent: If the life insurance company has received any interest,
dividend and rent on its investment, income tax thereon should be deducted. Interest
accrued and outstanding is added to this item.
5. Registration fee: This is an item of income and shown on the credit side of revenue account.
6. Reinsurance: An insurance company may pass on some business to another insurance
company and therefore pass some element of risk to the other company. This is called
reinsurance. The company, which passes some business to the other company, gets some
commission, which is known as commission on reinsurance business ceded and is shown on
the credit side of revenue account. The company which accepts such business is required to
pay commission on reinsurance business accepted and such commission will become an
expense and will be shown on the debit side of revenue account.
Note: The debit side cannot be more than the credit side
om
Contingent liabilities xx xx
.c
ya
ken
ea
ILLUSTRATION
om
.s
QUESTION
w
w
w
Tengo Insurance Company ltd. Engages in general insurance business. The following trial balance
was extracted from its books as at 31 March 2004.
Marine 800
Fire 540
Claims paid:
Marine 2,470
Fire 1,800
Legal costs incurred on claims:
Marine 180
Fire 130
Survey expenses relating to claims:
Marine 320
Bad debts:
Marine 170
Fire 120
Investment in shares 1,400
Freehold property 4,200
Motor vehicles (net book value) 3,500
Machinery and equipment (net book value) 1,500
Furniture (net book value) 1,300
Audit fees 240
Directors’ fees 495
Depreciation of fixed assets 905
Management expenses:
Marine 650
om
Fire 580
330
.c
Sundry creditors
ya
Investment income 280
en
3,000
k
Ordinary share capital
ea
1,000
Share premium
om
450
Profit and loss account balance as at 1 April 2003
.s
w
Premiums outstanding – 1 April 2003:
w
w
Marine
Fire 800
700
23,700 23,700
Additional information:
Required:
a) Revenue accounts for both marine and fire insurance for the year ended 31 March 2004.
b) Profit and loss account for the year ended 31 March 2004.
c) Balance sheet as at 31 March 2004.
SOLUTION
Tengo Insurance Company Ltd
Revenue Account for the year ended 31st March 2004
Marine Fire
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Net Premiums
Direct premium received 4500 3500
Reinsurance premium received 1200 800
Reinsuarance premium paid (800) (500)
Premiums outstanding b/d (900) (700)
Premiums o/s c/d 1500 700
Net premium received 5500 3800
Add: un earned premiums
om
Add: unearned premiums b/d 4800 2500
.c
ya
Less: unearned premiums c/d (5500) (1900)
en
Net premium 4800 4400
k
ea
Net Claims incurred
om
Claims paid 2470 1800
.s
w
Claims outstanding b/d (800) (540)
w
w
Claims intimated & outstanding c/d 750 480
Legal cost 180 130
Survey expenses 320 ____
2920 1870
Net Expenses Incurred
Commissions: Ceded (40) (25)
Accepted 60 40
Bad debts 170 120
Management expenses 650 580
Underwriting profit / loss 840 715
1040 1815
om
.c
ya
Tengo Insurance Company Ltd
en
Statement of Financial Position for the year ended 31st March 2004
k
ea
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
om
Assets
.s
w
Non-Current Assets
w
w
Freehold property 4200
Motor vehicle 3500
Machinery and equipment 1500
Furniture 1300
Investment in shares 1400
11900
Current Assets
Commission ceded: Marine 40
Fire 25
Premiums o/s c/d: Marine 1500
Fire 700
Sundry debtors 730
Bank balance and cash in hand 110 3105
Total Assets 15,005
Capital + Liabilities
Capital and Reserves
Ordinary share capital 3000
Share premium 1000
Retained earnings old 1196.5
Liabilities
Current liabilities
Commission Accepted : Marine 60
Fire 40
Claims o/s: Marine 750
Fire 480
Unearned premiums c/d: Marine 5500
Fire 1900
Sundry creditors 330
Proposed dividends 300
Corporation tax payable 448.5 9,808.5
Total equity and liabilities 15,005
BANKS
Bank means a company which carries on, or proposes to carry on, banking business in Kenya but
does not include the Central Bank;
Banking business means -
a. The accepting from members of the public of money on deposit repayable on demand or at
om
the expiry of a fixed period or after notice;
.c
ya
b. The accepting from members of the public of money on current account and payment on and
en
acceptance of cheques; and
k
ea
c. The employing of money held on deposit or on current account, or any part of the money, by
om
lending, investment or in any other manner for the account and at the risk of the person so
.s
w
employing the money.
w
w
Accounts and Audit
Financial Year
The financial year of every institution shall be the period of twelve months ending on the 31st
December in each year.
Where the financial year of an institution is different from that prescribed in this section, the
institution shall, within twelve months of the commencement of this section, change its
financial year to comply with the provisions of this section.
Form of accounts.
All entries in any books and all accounts kept by an institution shall be recorded and kept in
the English language, using the system of numerals employed in Government accounts.
The Central Bank may, at any time, issue directions to an institution requiring it to maintain
such books, records or information, in addition to any books, records or information then
already maintained by it, as the Central Bank may consider to be necessary.
Accounts to be exhibited
- Every institution shall exhibit throughout the year in a conspicuous position in every office
and branch in Kenya a copy of its last audited balance sheet and last audited profit and loss
statements (which shall be in conformity with the minimum financial disclosure requirements
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 181
FINANCIAL REPORTING
prescribed from time to time by the Central Bank and shall include a copy of the auditor’s
report) together with the full and correct names of all persons who are officers of the
institution in Kenya, and shall, within three months of the end of each financial year, cause a
copy of the balance sheet and last audited profit and loss statements for that financial year to
be published in a national newspaper.
Appointment of auditors
- Every institution shall appoint annually an auditor qualified under section 161 of the
Companies Act and approved by the Central Bank, whose duty it shall be to audit and make a
report upon the annual balance sheet and profit and loss account which are to be submitted to
the Central Bank under section 23 (1).
- -If an institution fails to appoint an approved auditor under subsection (1), or to fill any
om
vacancy for an auditor which may arise, the Central Bank may appoint an auditor and fix the
.c
ya
remuneration to be paid by the institution to him.
en
- The Central Bank may require an auditor to undertake the following duties in addition to
k
ea
those provided under subsection (1) –
om
a. to submit such additional information in relation to his audit as the Central Bank may
.s
consider necessary;
w
w
b. to carry out any other special investigation; and
w
c. to submit a report on any of the matters referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b);
d. And the institution concerned shall remunerate the auditor in respect of the discharge
by him of all or any of such additional duties.
- If the auditor of an institution, in the course of the performance of his duties under this Act, is
satisfied that -
a) there has been a serious breach of or non-compliance with the provisions of this Act,
the Central Bank of Kenya Act or the regulations, guidelines or other matters
prescribed by the Central Bank;
b) a criminal offence involving fraud or other dishonesty has been committed by the
institution or any of its officers or employees;
c) losses have been incurred which reduce the core capital of the institution by fifty per
cent or more;
d) serious irregularities have occurred which may jeopardize the security of depositors or
creditors of the institution; or
e) he is unable to confirm that the claims of depositors and creditors of the institution are
capable of being met out of the assets of the institution, He shall immediately report
the matter to the Central Bank.
- The Central Bank may arrange trilateral meetings with an institution and its auditor from time
to time, to discuss matters relevant to the Central Bank’s supervisory responsibilities which
have arisen in the course of the statutory audit of the institution including relevant aspects of
the institution’s business, its accounting and control system and its annual accounts.
- If an auditor of an institution fails to comply with the requirements of this Act, the Central
Bank may remove him from office and appoint another person in his place.
- A person shall not be qualified for appointment as an auditor of an institution if he is -
a) a director, officer or employee of that institution; or
b) a person who is a partner of a director, officer or employee of that institution; or
c) a person who is an employer or an employee of a director, officer or employee of that
institution; or
d) a person who as a director, officer or employee of an associate of that institution; or
e) a person who, by himself, or his partner or his employee, regularly performs the duties
of secretary or book-keeper for that institution; or
f) a firm or member of a firm of auditors of which any partner or employee falls within
the above categories.
om
which did not appear in the accounts for the preceding financial year.
.c
ya
- An institution aggrieved by a decision of the Central Bank under subsection (1) may appeal
en
to the Minister within 14 days.
k
ea
- The decision of the Minister under subsection (3) shall be final.
om
.s
w
w
w
Bank Accounts
Profit and loss account at a bank
Profit and loss account for the year ended (date)
Current year Previous
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Income
Interest on advances (loan, overdrafts, etc) x x
Interest on government securities x x
Interest on placement and bank balances (with other)
Less:
Interest paid on deposits (fixed and savings) x x x
Interest paid on other bank borrowings x x x x
Net interest income x (x) (x)
Other incomes
· Dividend income x x
· Fee and commission on income x x
· Net gain from dealing securities x x
· Discounts on bills purchased x x
· Net gain arising from investment securities x x
· Net gain arising from foreign currency dealings x x
· Profit on disposal of collaterals
Operating income
Other expenses
Fee and commission expense x x
Net losses arising from dealing with securities x x
Net losses arising from foreign currency dealings x
Loss on disposal of collaterals x
General admin. Expenses:
· Staff costs x x
· Director’s emoluments as directors x x
· Director’s emoluments as executives x x
· Equipment and property expenses x x
- Depreciation x x
· Auditor’s remuneration x x
· Contribution to deposit protection fund (DFF) x x
· Operating lease rentals x x
· Legal and professional fees x x
Other operating expenses x x
x
Other operating before provisions (x) (x)
Movement in provision for bad and doubtful debts x x
Profit before tax x x
Taxation x x
Transfer to reserves x x
Dividends to shareholders x x
om
Retained profit for the year x (x) (x)
.c
ya
Retained profit B/F x x
en
Retained profit C/F x x
k
ea
x x
om
.s
Interest on government securities includes – Interest earned on Treasury Bills and Treasury Bonds,
w
w
interest may also be earned on CBK deposits.
Equipment x x
Vehicles x x
xx xx
Liabilities
Deposits from other banks x x
Customer deposits:
Savings deposits x x
Current and demand deposits x x
Fixed deposits x x
Negotiable CDs x x
Bills payable x x
Bills for collection x x
Acceptances, endorsements and other obligations x x
Other liabilities:
Tax payable x x
Interest payable and other obligations x x
Other payable x x
Interest payable and other accruals (exp) x x
Proposed dividends x x
Rebate on bills discounted x x
TOTAL LIABILITIES (xx) (xx)
NET ASSETS xx xx
Share capital x x
Reserves x x
om
Retained profits x x
.c
ya
Shareholders’ funds xx xx
ken
ea
Notes on the balance sheet: (to be disclosed below balance sheet)
om
.s
w
i) Contingent Liabilities
w
w
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Acceptance and letters of credit x x
Guarantees and performance bonds x x
Liability on bills of exchange discounted x x
ILLUSTRATION
QUESTION
The following trial balance was extracted from the books of Regional Commercial Bank Ltd as at 31
March 2006:
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Property and equipment 14,427
Interest on loans and advances 8,395
Interest on customers’ 5,308
Customers deposits 82,230
Shares capital 10,000
Revaluation reserve 2,480
Staff costs 2,184
Borrowed funds 3,520
Directors emoluments 645
Depreciation on property and equipment 815
Other interest income 430
Specific provision for doubtful debts 2,750
Interest on government securities 4,768
Other operating expenses 1,630
om
Repair and maintenance 210
.c
Printing and stationary 278
ya
en
Deposits and placements due from banking
k
institutions 8,560
ea
om
Loans and advances to customers 67,655
Deposits and placements due to other
.s
w
banking institutions 6,410
w
w
Interest on deposit and placements
with other banking institutions 3,800
Other interest expense 314
Interest paid on deposits and
placements from other banking institutions 1,280
Cash and balances with the
Central Bank of Kenya 3,630
Interim dividend paid 400
Bad debts written off 279
Share premium 3,000
Fees and commission income 764
Dividend income 408
Investment in securities 5,460
Miscellaneous accruals 140
Government securities 13,200
Retained profit (1 April 2005) 2,480
Other assets 5,300
131,575 131,575
Additional information :
1. An analysis of the debtors balances as at the end of the year showed that an additional
provision of sh.1,850,000 for non-performing loans should be made.
2. A provision of sh.1,050,000 should be made for tax on the profit for the year ended 31 March
2006.
3. Interest accrued and not accounted for in the books as at 31 March was as follows:
On loans and advances sh.642,000
On customers’ deposits sh.448,000
4. The directors of the bank have proposed a final dividend of 6%.
Required:
i. Profit and loss account for the year ended 31 March 2006
ii. Balance sheet as at 31 March 2006.
SOLUTION
Regional Commercial Bank Ltd
Income Statement for the year ended 31st March 2008
Sh. Sh.
Interest Income
Interest on loan & advances (8395 + 642) 9037
Interest on government securities 4768
Interest on deposits and placement with other banking institutions 3,800
Other interest income 430
om
Gross interest income 18,035
.c
Less: Interest Expenses
ya
en
Customers deposits 5308
k
Add: Accrued 448
ea
Deposits and placements from other banks
om
Other interest expenses 5756
.s
w
Net interest income 1280 (7,350)
w
w
Non-Interest Income 314 10,685)
Fees and Commission income
Dividend income
Total income 764
Less: Non-Interest Expenses 408
Staff costs 11,857
Director’s emoluments 2184
Dep. On property and equipment 645
Specific provisions for doubtful 815
Repairs and maintenance 1850
Printing and stationery 210
Bad debts written off 278
Other operating expenses 279
Operating profit 1630 7891
Less: Taxation 3966
1050
Less: Dividend: Interim 2916
: Proposed 400
Retained profit 600 (1000)
Add: Retained earnings b/d 1916
Retained profit c/d 2480
4396
om
Liabilities
.c
Customer deposit 32230
ya
en
Accrued interest on customer deposits 443
k
Miscellaneous accruals 140
ea
om
Deposit and placements due to other banks 6410
Borrow funds 3520
.s
w
Tax 1050
w
w
Proposed dividends 600
94393
Total equity and liabilities 114 274
PROFESSIONAL FIRMS
NB: A bill of cost journal may also be maintained by lawyers on behalf of the clients and main
purpose is to record expenses incurred by lawyers on behalf of the clients.
om
Terminologies:
.c
ya
1. Work – in – progress
en
This constitutes the value of uncompleted work on behalf of the client not yet charged to the client.
k
ea
In order to determine the fees charged for the period (total income), the closing Work-In-Progress
om
will be added while the opening Work-In-Progress subtracted from fees/ cost account.
.s
2. Disbursements
w
w
These are payments made by the lawyers on behalf of the clients who have sufficient funds in their
w
accounts.
Journal Entries
1. To record cash received on behalf of the client:
Dr. Cashbook (Client’s column)
Cr. Clients a/c (Client’s column)
2. To record payment of expenses on behalf of clients:
a. With sufficient funds:
Dr. Client’s a/c (Client’s column)
Cr. Cash Book (Client’s column)
b. With insufficient funds:
Dr. Client’s a/c (office column)
Cr. Cash Book (office column)
3. With the office expenses paid:
Dr. Respective expense account / P&L account
Cr. Cash Book (Office Column)
4. To record fees charged for professional services rendered
a)
ILLUSTRATION
om
Juma and Company Advocates
.c
ya
Balance sheet as at June 2003
en
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
k
ea
Assets
om
Non-current assets
.s
Equipment 800
w
w
Furniture 350
w
Library books 280 1,430
Current assets
Work-in-progress 210
Stationary 140
Debtors for fee and disbursements 330
Cash at bank:
Office 300
Client 250 1,230
2,660
Capital 1,800
Non-current liabilities
Loan 500
Current liabilities
Creditors 110
Clients- for money held on their behalf 250 360
2,660
The following transactions were carried out by Juma and Company Advocates in the year ended 30
June 2004.
1. 1.Received Sh. 850,000 on behalf of their clients.
2. 2.Spent the amounts shown below on behalf of clients who had sufficient cash held by the
firm:
Sh. ‘000’
Purchase of equipment 260
Payment of rent 130
Payment of repair costs 80
3. Purchased new equipment for office use for Sh. 400,000 and paid Sh. 100,000 cash, the
balance remaining as a loan.
4. Spent Sh. 350,000 on the purchase of land on behalf of a client who had a credit balance of
Sh. 120,000 with the firm.
5. Charged clients Sh. 1,050,000 for services rendered in the year ended 30 June 2004.
6. Received Sh. 680,000 from clients settlement of amounts due for services rendered. The firm
received authority from clients to transfer Sh. 240,000 from the clients account to the office
account in the settlement of amounts due to the firm.
7. The following expenses were incurred by the firm in the year ended 30 June 2004, all were
settled in cash:
Sh.
‘000’
om
Rent 120
.c
ya
Salaries and wages 360
en
Office expenses 90
k
ea
Interest on loan 30
om
Loan repayment 300
.s
8. During the year ended 30 June 2004, the firm received Sh. 480,000 from the clients as
w
w
settlement of disbursements made on their behalf by the firm.
w
9. Purchased library books worth Sh. 160,000 and paid for them in cash.
10. Purchased stationery on credit for Sh. 210,000 and paid the creditors a total of Sh. 240,000 in
the year ended 30 June 2004.
11. Drawings for personal use in the year ended June 2004 amounted to Sh. 180,000.
12. On 30 June 2004, stationery in the store valued at Sh. 160,000. On the same date, work-in-
progress not yet charged to clients was valued at Sh. 350,000.
The firm provides depreciation at the following rates based on books value:
Equipment - 5% per annum
Furniture - 10% per annum
Library books - 12.5% per annum
Required:
(a) Profit and loss account for the year ended 30 June 2004.
(b) Balance sheet as at 30 June 2004
SOLUTION
Cash book
Details Office Client ‘000’ Details Office ‘000’ Client ‘000’
‘000’
Bal. b/d 300 250 Purchase of equ. - 260
Client account. - 850 Rent - 130
Receipts clients 680 - Repair costs - 80
Funds transfer (Contra) 240 - Equipment 100 -
Client’s account Disburse 480 - Land 230 120
Bal. c/d 110 _ Fund transfer© - 240
Rent 120 -
Salaries & wages 360 -
Office expenses 90 -
Interest on loan 30 -
_ Loan repayment 300 -
Library books 160 -
Creditors 240 -
Drawings 180 -
__ Bal. c/d ___ 270
1810 1100 1810 1100
Client’s Account
om
Details Office Client Details Office Client
.c
ya
‘000’ ‘000’ ‘000’ ‘000’
en
Bal. b/d 330 260 Bal. b/d - 250
k
ea
Equipment - 130 Cash book - 850
om
Rent - 80 Cash book 680 -
.s
Repair costs - 120 Fund, transfer 240 -
w
w
Land 230 - & 480 -
w
Fees / costs 1050 240 Cash book 21 __
& Bal. c/d - 270 Bal. c/d
_____ ____
1610 1100 1610 1100
Equipment Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Bal. b/d 800 Bal. c/d 1200
Bank 400 _____
1200 1200
Creditor’s Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Cash book 240 Bal. b/d 110
Bal. c/d 80 Stationery 210
320 320
Drawings Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Bal. c/d 180 Cash book 180
Loan Account
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Cash book 300 Bal. b/d 500
Bal. c/d 500 Equipment 300
800 800
om
.c
ya
Stationery Account
ken
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
ea
om
Bal. c/d 140 P & L 190
.s
Creditors 210 Bal. c/d 160
w
350 350
w
Juma & Co. Advocates w
Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 30th June 2004
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
Income
Fees / costs 1050
Add: closing w/p 350
Less: opening w/p (210)
Total income 1190
Less: expenditure
Dep. Equipment (5% x 1200) 60
Furniture (10% x 350) 35
Library bonuses (12.5% x 440) 55
Loss of stationery 190
Rent 120
Salaries and wages 360
Office expenses 90
Interest on loan 30 (940)
Net profit 250
om
Loan
.c
Current liabilities 500
ya
Creditors
en
Bank overdraft 80
k
ea
Clients – for money held on behalf 110
om
Total equity & liabilities 270 960
.s
w
2830
w
w
INDEPENDENT LOCAL AND FOREIGN BRANCHES
BRANCH ACCOUNTING
A branch is a segment of or a component of a business situated/ located in the same town, in the
same country or different country with the head office. Branches do not have share capital or
contributed capital. They are owned by the businesses which establish them.
There are there types of branches:
a. Dependent branches
These are branches which don’t maintain their own accounting records. They are maintained in the
Head Office.
b. Independent branches
Are branches that maintain their own accounting records like any other independent business only
that they do not have share capital or contributed capital; instead they have what is referred to as
head office current account which shows the net investment by the head office in the branch.
c. Foreign branches
Are branches which operate in other countries other than the country of the head office (main
business)
They may be either dependent or independent branches.
Dependent branches
Are small branches whose main activity is to sell the goods supplied by the head office. They are
therefore referred to as selling agents.
They do not maintain accounting records and the transactions between them and head office is
recorded by the head office.
As mentioned above, they sell goods supplied by head office and so it is important to determine the
value at which such goods sent are recorded/ invoiced by the head office.
There are two alternative ways of invoicing/ recording goods sent to branches. These are:
i. At cost
ii. At cost plus mark up
iii. At selling price
The method used to record the goods sent to branches determines the records maintained by the head
office.
Ledger accounts maintained where goods are sent to branch (at cost)
om
branch to head office and by customers to branch.
.c
ya
-Abnormal losses e.g. goods stolen, lost, cash stolen, and normal losses.
en
-Branch inventory / closing stock
k
ea
om
b. Good sent to branch account
.s
This account is used to record the cost of the goods sent by the head office to the branch and the cost
w
w
of goods returned by the branch to the head office.
Journal Entries
1. Goods sent to branch
Dr. Branch stock a/c
Cr. Goods sent to branch a/c
2. Returns of goods to head office by branch
om
sale.
.c
ya
This balance should be transferred to the purchase account.
en
Dr. Goods sent to branch a/c
k
ea
Cr. Purchases a/c
om
.s
w
w
10. Branch closing stock
w
Any closing stock in the branch should be shown as a balance carried down (Bal c/d) on the credit
side of the branch stock a/c
The balance which remains in the branch stock account is the branch gross profit. Therefore, branch
stock a/c where goods are sent to the branch as cost acts as a branch trading account.
ILLUSTRATION 1
Required
i) Branch inventory account
ii) Goods sent to branch account
iii) Branch debtors account
iv) Branch trading, profit and loss account
SOLUTION;
Branch Stock Account
Shs. Shs.
Bal b/d 550,000 Goods sent 150,000
om
Goods sent to branch 600,000 Cash sales 2,500,000
.c
Debtors 300,000 Debtors – sales 7,000,000
ya
Profit & Loss Account Goods stolen 50,000
en
Gross profit 3,550,000 Bal c/d 7,000,000
k
ea
10,400,000 10,400,000
om
.s
w
Goods sent to branch Account
w
w
Shs. Shs.
Branch stock 150,000 Branch stock account 6,000,000
Purchases 585,000 ______
6,000,000 6,000,000
Shs. Shs.
Branch stock 35,000 Profit and loss 35,000
Branch Trading Profit and Loss Account
Sales – Cash sales 2,500,000
Credit sales 7,000,000
Less: Return inwards (300,000) 6700,000
Total sales 9,200,000
Less: cost of sales
Opening stock 550,000
Add: goods sent 6,000,000
Less: Returns to head office (150,000) 5850,000
Goods available for sales 6400,000
Less: goods stolen (50,000)
Closing stock (700,000)
Cost of sales 5650,000 (5650,000)
Gross Profit 3,550,000
Less: Expenses
Goods stolen 50,000
Cash stolen 35,000
Bad debts 75,000
Discount allowed 120,000
Branch expenses 780,000 ______
Branch profit 2,490,000
om
.c
ya
Ledger Accounts Maintainted Where Goods Are Sent At Cost Plus Mark Up Or At Selling
en
Price
k
ea
Other than the Head Office sending the goods to branch at cost, it may add a profit to the cost and
om
send the goods at cost plus profit.
.s
The profit is usually a certain percentage on the cost of goods. (mark-up) or a certain percentage on
w
w
the selling price of the goods (margin).
w
When recording it is important to split the invoice price into cost and profit. This profit charged is
recorded separately into an account referred to as branch mark-up account/ branch adjustment
account/ provision for unrealized profit account.
This account is used to determine the realized gross profit and the unrealized profit on branch
closing stock at the end of the period.
The ledger accounts maintained include:
i. Branch stock account
ii. Goods sent to branch account
iii. Branch mark-up account
iv. Branch debtors account
v. Branch creditors account
vi. Branch expenses account
vii. Branch profit and loss account
om
Cr. Branch mark-up – at mark-up
.c
ya
9. Goods stolen at the branch
en
Dr. Goods stolen a/c at cost
k
ea
Dr. Branch markup - at mark-up
om
Cr. Branch stock a/c – at invoice price
.s
10. Cash sale stolen
w
w
Dr. Cash stolen a/c
w
Cr. Branch stock a/c
11. Reduction in price/ mark down of goods in the branch
If price of goods is reduced at the branch, it is important to determine whether the new selling
price is still above the cost of the good or it is below the cost of the goods.
If the new selling price is still above the cost or at cost, the reduction is only an elimination of the
profit that could have been earned on such goods thus with the reduction.
Dr. Branch mark-up a/c
Cr. Branch stock a/c
If the price of goods is reduced below the cost, then
a. With the reduction from the original selling price to the cost of the goods.
Dr. Branch mark-up a/c
Cr. Branch stock a/c
(This is an elimination of the profit that would have been earned on sale of the goods)
b. With the reduction from cost to the new selling price which is below the cost,
Dr. P&L a/c
Cr. Branch stock a/c
(This is a loss to the company)
12. Balancing the goods sent to branch account
The balancing figure in the goods sent to branch account should be transferred to the purchases
account/ goods available for sale a/c.
Dr. Goods sent to branch a/c
Cr. Purchases account/ goods available for sale.
13. Balancing the branch stock a/c
Where goods are sent to the branch at selling price, the closing stock in the branch is not given
and it is determined as a balance carried down.
Where it is given, it should be shown as a balance carried down on the credit side of the branch
stock account. Then, the branch stock account may or may not balance.
If it does not balance, and the balancing figure is on the debit side, the balance is taken as a
normal stock difference which may arise as a result of the branch selling goods at a price higher
than the invoice price thus with this difference;
Dr. Branch stock a/c
Cr. Branch mark-up a/c
If it does not balance, and the balancing figure is on the credit side, this balance may be either a
normal or abnormal loss.
If it is a normal loss:
Dr. Branch mark-up a/c
Cr. Branch stock a/c
If it is an abnormal loss
Dr. Branch mark-up a/c - with mark-up
Dr. Abnormal loss a/c - cost
om
Cr. Branch stock a/c - at invoice value price.
.c
ya
14. Balancing the branch mark-up a/c
en
The mark-up on branch closing stock/ unrealized profit on branch closing stock should be
k
ea
determined and be shown as a balance carried down on the debit side of the branch mark-up a/c.
om
The branch mark-up a/c is then balanced and the balancing figure represents the branch gross profit
.s
realized during the period.
w
w
w
Illustration Question
Tamim Gowns is a fashionable ladies-wear chain of clothing stores, started in Kakamega but not
present in all the major towns in Kenya and in Kampala, Uganda and Dar-es-salaam, Tanzania. The
accounts of all the branches are maintained in the books of the head office, now situated in Nairobi.
The figures below that refer to goods are stated at selling prices. The following figures to
transactions carried out by the Mombasa branch in the year ended 31 May 2001
Sh. ‘000’
Opening stock at commencement of the year 5,280
Goods received from head office 116,728
Goods received from Voi branch 560
Goods sent to Taita branch 720
Goods returned to Mombasa branch by credit customer (normal goods) 880
Goods returned to Voi branch by Mombasa credit customer (approved
by) Head office: All these goods had been marked up by 15% 322
Goods returned by Mombasa branch to Head office 1,360
Cash sales 52,800
Cash stolen from Mombasa branch on 12 December 2000 240
Goods stolen from Mombasa branch on 12 December 2000 960
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 200
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Additional information
1. The Mombasa branch is managed by a particularly competent group of women. Other than the
thefts stated above, there were no shortages or surpluses of goods or cash during the year.
2. Demand for certain casual wear has been high during the year; to prevent stock-outs from
occurring, these lines are normally marked up in price using a formula linked to the number of
items sold in the preceding week. Included in the opening stock were goods with a normal selling
price of sh 800,000 but which had been marked up by a further 10% of this price. The normal
selling price of the goods is head office cost plus 60% of cost. All these marked-up goods were
sold in the year. Goods with a normal selling price of sh 1,200,000 had been marked up by an
additional 15%. Three quarters of these goods had been sold by 31 May 2001.
3. In the income statements produced for management, cash stolen and goods stolen are shown as
separate line items.
Required
Prepare the Mombasa Branch Stock Account and the Mombasa Branch Mark-up Account in the
books of the Head Office, and the Memorandum Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the
Mombasa Branch for the year ended 31 May 2001.
om
SOLUTION;
.c
ya
Branch Stock Account
en
Sh. “000” Sh. “000”
k
ea
Bal. b/d 5280 Goods to Taita 720
om
Goods sent to Branch 116728 Returns to h/o 1360
.s
w
Goods from voi 560 Cash sales 52800
w
w
Returns inward by debtor 880 Cash stolen 240
Additional M-up Good stolen 960
(1120 x 15%) 168 Credit sales 61686
____ Bal. c/d 5850
123616 123616
Workings
1. Opening stock
Selling price(sp) Mark-up Cost
Normal goods 4400 1650 2750
Normalized goods 800 300 500
Anomaly: (10% x 800) 80 80 ____
Total 5280 2030 3250
322
= = . 280
1.15
Mark-up= 280 + (280 15%) = 147
om
.c
Tamim Gowns
ya
Mombasa Branch
en
Memorandum Income Statement For the year Ended 31st May 2001
k
ea
Sh. “000” Sh. “000” Sh.
om
“000”
.s
w
Sales: Cash banked 52800
w
w
Cash stolen 240 53040
Credit 61686
Less: Returns: to Mombasa 880
To Voi 322 (1202) 60484
Total sales 113524
Less: Cost of Sales
Opening stock 72955 3250
Goods sent to Branch. (116728x 5/8) 350
Goods from Voi (560x 5/8) (850)
Less; Returns to head office (1360x 5/8) (450)
Goods Taita (720x 5/8) (175)
By debtor to Voi (322 – 147) 71830
Goods available for sale 75080
Less: Closing stock (5850 –2220) (3630)
Cost of goods stolen (600) (70850)
Branch Gross Profit 42674
Less: Expenses
Cash stolen 240
Cost of goods stolen 600
Sh.
st
Opening balances 1 January 2010
Branch inventory (invoice price) 300,000
Branch debtors 450,000
Closing balances 31st December 2010 250,000
Branch inventory (invoice price)
Transactions for the year
Good sent by head office to branch (invoice price) 2,500,000
Goods returned by branch to head office (invoice price) 200,000
Cash sales 800,000
Credit sales 2,700,000
Return from customers to the branch 100,000
om
Discount allowed 30,000
.c
Bad debts written off 20,000
ya
Branch expenses 500,000
en
Goods stolen at branch 30,000
k
ea
Cash sales stolen at branch (not included in other sales) 15,000
om
Cash received from branch debtors 2,450,00
.s
w
w
w
Required
i) Branch inventory account
ii) Branch adjustment / mark up account
iii) Goods sent to branch account
iv) Branch debtors account
v) Branch trading, profit and loss account
Solution;
Notes
Invoice price = Cost + Profit
125% = 100 + 25
Mark-up = = 25% =
Mark-up = = 25% =
om
Shs. Shs.
.c
Returns to h/o by branch 40,000 Bal b/d (1/5 x 300,000) 60,000
ya
Goods stolen (1/5 x 30,000) 6,000 Branch stock (1/5 x 2,500,000) 500,000
en
k
Gross profit 1,559,000 Branch stock 1,095,000
ea
Bal c/d (1/5 x 250,000) 50,000
om
1,655,000 1,655,000
.s
w
w
w
Branch debtors a/c
Shs. Shs.
Bal b/d 450,000 Returns 100,000
Credit sales 2,700,000 Discount allowed 30,000
Bad debts 20,000
Cash 2,450,000
Bal c/d 550,000
3,150,000 3,150,000
X Limited
Voi Branch Profit and Loss Account
Sales – Cash sales 800,000
Cash sales stolen 15,000
Credit sales 2,700,000
Returns inwards (100,000) 2,600,000
Total sales 3,415,000
Less: cost of sales – (At cost)
Opening stock (300,000 – 60,000) 240,000
Goods sent (2,500,000 – 50,000) = 2,000,000
Less: Returns (200,000 – 40,000) = (160000) 1,840,000
Goods available for sales 2,080,000
Less: goods stolen (30,000 – 60,000) (24,000)
Closing stock (250,000 – 50,000) (200,000)
Cost of sales 1,856,000 1,856,000
Gross Profit 1,559,000
Less: Expenses
Goods stolen 24,000
Cash stolen 15,000
om
Discount allowed 30,000
.c
Bad debts 20,000
ya
en
Branch expenses 500,000
k
Profit 970,000
ea
om
.s
w
w
INDEPENDENT BRANCHES
w
These are branches which maintain their own books of accounts. They operate as independent
businesses only that they do not have share capital or contributed capital.
Instead they have what we call Head Office current account which shows the amount the branch
owes the Head Office.
In some cases, these branches transacts with the Head Office. Such transactions include:
i. Receipt of goods from Head Office
ii. Expenses of branch paid by Head Office
iii. Branch customer paying to Head Office etc.
Such transactions are recorded in an account called/ referred to as the current account.
Where the Head Office has several branches, a current account is maintained for each branch. The
current account maintained by Head Office is referred to as branch current account and the current
account maintained by branch is referred to as Head Office current account.
om
ix. Branch debtor paying direct to Head Office
.c
ya
Dr. Cashbook
en
Cr. Branch current account
k
ea
x. Head Office debtor paying direct to branch
om
Dr. Branch current account
.s
Cr. Debtor account
w
w
xi. At the end of accounting period the branch profit/ loss should be transferred to Head Office
w
books
Dr. Branch current account
Cr. Head Office income statement
om
.c
ya
As can be observed from above entries all transactions must pass through the current account thus
en
the current accounts will have equal business but on opposite sides it but at the end of the period.
k
ea
Sometimes the current account balances may fail to agree due to the following reasons:
om
i. Errors made when recording
.s
ii. Goods in transit
w
w
iii. Cash in transit
w
Errors should be corrected.
Goods in transit
These should be recorded in either the branch books or the Head Office books but not in both books.
Cash in transit
These should be recorded in either the branch books or Head Office books not in both books.
om
.c
ya
ILLUSTRATION
en
United unity ltd operates in Nairobi and has a branch in Webuye. The following transactions were
k
ea
carried out between the Nairobi head office and the Webuye branch during the year ended 31st
om
December 20xx.
.s
a) Goods sent to branch ksh 1,500,000.
w
w
b) Goods received by branch ksh 1,400,000.
w
c) Cash remitted to head office ksh 1,300,000.
d) Cash received by head office ksh 1,250,000.
e) Branch current account balance b/d 250,000.
f) Head office current account balance b/d 50,000.
Additional information
1) The branch made a profit of Ksh 400,000 during the year.
2) During the year the branch paid ksh 100,000 for the head office electricity expense, neither
the head office nor the branch had recorded this transaction.
3) A head office debtor paid to branch ksh 200,000, the head office recorded this transaction
correctly and the branch debited its cash book and credited its debtors.
Required
i) Journal entries to record the above transactions
ii) Branch current account
iii) Head office current account.
.
SOLUTION
Branch books
Dr Cr
Shs Shs
om
1. Goods received account 1,400,000
.c
Head office current account 1400,000
ya
2. Head office current account 1,300,000
en
Cash / bank account 1,300,000
k
ea
3. Income statement 400,000
om
Head office current account 400,000
.s
4. Head office current account 100,000
w
w
Cash / bank account 100,000
w
5. Debtors 200,000
Head office current account 200,000
Branch Books
Head office current Account
Shs. Shs.
Cash/ bank 1,300,00 Bal b/d 50,000
Cash/ bank 100 ,000 Good received 1,400,000
Bal c/d 750,000 Profit and loss 400,000
om
8. Goods sent to branch account 240
.c
Branch current account 240
ya
9. Branch current account 1306
en
Profit and loss account 1360
k
ea
om
.s
w
Branch Books
w
w
Dr Cr
Shs Shs
1. Profit and loss account 1680
H.O current account 1680
2. H.O current account 2500
Branch inventory account 2500
3. Debtors account 180
H.O current account 180
4. Profit and loss account 120
H.O current account 120
5. No entry
6. Goods in transit account 800
H.O current account 800
7. H.O current account 606
Goods received 606
8. No entry - -
9. Profit and loss 1300
H.O current account 1306
om
.c
ya
ii. Goods received from Head Office
en
These forms part of goods available for sale in the branch but should be excluded in the goods
k
ea
available for sale for the business as a whole.
om
.s
w
iii. Goods in transit
w
w
Goods in transit are not part of the closing stock of neither the Head Office nor the branch but are
part of closing stock of the enterprise as whole / combined business.
v. Current account
The branch current account balance represents the Head Office investment in the branch, thus should
be carried as an asset of the head office but not for the enterprise as a whole.
Head Office current account balance represents the amount the branch owes the Head Office thus
should be carried as a liability of the branch but not for the enterprise as a whole.
FOREIGN BRANCHES
These are branches situated in foreign countries other than the country of the Head Office.
An entity may carry out foreign activities in two ways:
i. It may have foreign currency transactions
ii. It may have a foreign operation
Functional currency is the currency of the primary economic environment in which an entity
operates. This means that the foreign currency transaction must be translated using the foreign
currency exchange rate prevailing as at the date the foreign currency transaction takes place.
At the year end, monetary items which remain unsettled should be retranslated using the rate as at
the date the statement of financial position is prepared i.e. closing rate.
Monetary items settled during the period are translated at the exchange rate prevailing as at the date
of settlement.
om
Any exchange difference resulting from the translation and the retranslation should be reported to
.c
ya
the income statement during the period it arises.
en
Exchange difference is the difference arising from translating a given number of units of one
k
ea
currency at different exchange rates.
om
.s
w
w
ILLUSTRATION
w
A limited company sold goods to a US based customer for $100,000 on credit on 1/9/29011. On
31/10/2011, a limited company received $60,000 and the balance was received on 20/2/2012.
The year of the company ends on 31st December each year.
Required:
i. Journal entries to record the above transaction
ii. Exchange gains/ losses
iii. Receivables account
Journal Entries
1. 1/9/2011
Sales = US$ 100,000 x 120 = ksh. 12,000,000
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 212
FINANCIAL REPORTING
2. 31/10/2011
Receipt of cash US $ 60,000 x 125 = Ksh. 7, 500, 000
Dr. Cash book 7,500,000
Cr.Receivables 7,500,000
Exchange difference
On recognition US $ 6,000,000 x 120 = 7,200,000/=
On receipt US $ 60,000 x 125 = 7,500,000/=
Exchange difference (gain) 300,000
This is a realized exchange gain.
Dr. Receivables Account 300,000
Cr.Income statement (P&L) 300,000
3. 31/12/2011
As at the year end,
Receivable $100,000 - $60,000 = $40,000
Retranslated amount = $40,000 x 130 = Ksh. 5,200,000
On recognition= $40,000 x 120 = Ksh. 4,800,000
om
Exchange difference (gain) 400,000
.c
ya
This is an unrealized gain (but not yet settled) which is reported to P&L.
en
Dr. Receivable a/c 400,000
k
ea
Cr. Profit and Loss a/c 400,000
om
.s
4. 20/2/2012
w
w
On settlement of the balance:
w
Amount received= $40,000 x 127 = ksh. 5,080,000
Retranslated amount= $40,000 x 130 = ksh. 5,200,000
Exchange (loss) (120,000)
This is a realized loss.
Dr. P&L account 120,000
Cr. Receivable 120,000
Receivables A/C
Sales Ksh. Cash Ksh.
P&L (gain) 1,200,000 Bal c/d 7,500,000
Bal b/d 700,000 Cash/ Bank 5,200,000
12,700,000 P&L (loss) 12,700,000
5200000 5,080,000
5,200,000 120,000
5,200,000
In order to incorporate the results (the operating results) of a foreign operation. With those of the
reporting entity, the financial statement of the foreign operation must be translated to the currency of
the reporting entity.
There are two methods used in the translation of the financial statements of the foreign operation.
i. Temporal method/ functional currency method
ii. Closing rate method/ presentation method/ net investment method.
om
prevailing as at the date of acquisition.
.c
ya
iv. Depreciation is translated at exchange rates used to translate the related assets.
en
v. Incomes and expense are translated at exchange rate prevailing as at the date of
k
ea
transaction (spot rate)
om
vi. An average rate may be used where the exchange rates does not fluctuate greatly.
.s
vii. Any exchange difference is reported to the income statement as a gain or a loss.
w
w
w
Closing Rate/ Presentation Currency/ Net Investment Method
This method is applicable when the foreign operation operates with a significant degree of autonomy
and cash flows of the foreign operation have no direct effect to the operations of the reporting entity.
This method is applied as follows:
i. Both monetary and non-monetary items are translated at closing rate.
ii. Revenues and expenses are translated at rates which were prevailing as at the date of the
transaction (spot rate)
Any resulting exchange difference is carried out as a separate component of equity (translation
res.)until the disposal of the foreign operation where it is transferred to the
The members delegate the day to day running of the society to a management committee which is
charged with the responsibility of steering the member’s objective and accounting for all the
resources received from members and from member’s activity.
The objectives of the members define the primary goals of each cooperative and the kind of books of
accounts that should be maintained.
Distinction should be made between the society general and the activities undertaken by the society.
The activities of each cooperative society is determined by the members produce e.g. coffee, cotton,
tea etc.
i) Marketing members produce e.g. coffee, cotton, tea etc.
ii) Trading services where the cooperative society store and sell to members certain products
i.e. animal feeds, farm implements, fertilizers etc.
iii) Training extension and research services which involve the society expanding the members
capacity to enhance their produce.
iv) Loans and advance where members can borrow cash.
The management committee should maintain proper book of accounts which depends on the primary
activity of the cooperative society.
On regular basis the management committee should provide members with information that can help
them to evaluate:
The fulfilment of members objectives.
Evaluate the actual financial performance against budgets.
Evaluate performance of the management committee.
Evaluate any weaknesses or strengths in the control system.
om
The information provided to the members should help them to make decisions as to whether to
.c
ya
change the management committee, implement new control procedures or to expand the members
en
activity. Such information are classified into two categories:
k
ea
1. Economic report
om
2. Annual financial statements
.s
w
w
w
Economic report
This is a summary of the economic and financial performance of each activity of the cooperative
society. It analysis the performance of the prior period against the actual performance of the current
period in order to indicate trend.
The current period performance are also compared with the budgeted performance in order to
indicate the variance from the expectation. Explanation for significant variance should also be
provided.
Illustration
The following information has been extracted from the books of Ungula Cotton Farmers Co-
operative Society Limited for the third quarter ended 30 September 2008. The central management
committee (CMC) of the co-operative society has requested the manager of the society to carry out a
detailed analysis of the actual performance of the co-operative society and compare this performance
with the budget and present a comprehensive economic report during the next CMC meeting.
om
.c
ya
Additional information
en
a) Quantity of cotton sold in Tonnes
k
ea
i) Actual 421,675
om
ii) Budget 500,000
.s
w
b) All the cotton is exported to the United States (US). The Kenya shilling has been weakening
w
w
against the US dollar.
c) The co-operative society operates under stiff competition
d) Ginnery equipment is due for replacement
e) The government is encouraging farmers to grow more cotton.
Required;
Economic report for the quarter ended 30 September 2008
SOLUTION
Ungula Cotton Farmers Coop Society
Economic Report for year-end 30th September 2008.
Actual Actual Budget Difference
Sale of cotton 4,855,520 4,645,250 213,270
Expenses
Ginery 311,756 142355 (169,401)
Taxes / local authority 122,450 136495 14045
Sale and wages 18,250 16210 (2040)
Lab wages 113, 650 128,520 14,940
Statutory deductions 1,925 1495 (430)
Other expenses 5265 5495 230
Administration 83770 49,380 (34,390)
Other direct costs 61,215 34,540 (26,675)
ILLUSTRATION
om
The following is the trial balance report of Mwanzo Mpya Farmers Co-operative Society as at 31st
.c
December 2008.
ya
k en
ea
Sh. Sh.
om
Activity:coffee
.s
Sale of clean coffee 6,900,000
w
w
Sale of mbuni 5,000,000
w
Payments to producers 11,050,000
Grading charges 5,800
Transport charges 24,200
Salaries of factory workers 90,000
Casual labour wages 55,000
Depreciation of coffee equipment 105,000
General expenses 1,000
Activity: Stores for resale
Sales 650,000
Cost of sales 300,000
Salaries and wages 80,000
Overtime 2,000
NSSF 3,000
Electricity 125,000
Repairs and Maintenance 60,000
Insurance 10,000
Depreciation 40,000
Trade licences 15,000
Activity: Society General
om
Prepayments 30,000
.c
ya
Cash in hand 100,000
en
Share capital 800,000
k
ea
Entrance fees 50,000
om
Statutory reserve fund 5,000
.s
Long-term loan 150,000
w
w
Payment due to members 9,500
w
Creditors and accruals _____ 20,000
13,651,000 13,651,000
Required
i. Statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31/12/2008
ii. Appropriation account for the year ended 31/12/2008
iii. Statement of financial position as at 31/12/2008.
(Ignore taxation)
Solution
Mwanzo Mpya Farmers Co-op Society
Coffee Activity Income Statement for year end
Incomes 6,900,000
Sale of clean coffee 5,000,000
Sale of Mbuni 11,900,000
Expenses
Total exp. 11,331,000
505,000
om
.c
ya
en
Mwanzo Mpya Farmers Co-op Society
k
ea
Statement of Comprehensive Income for year ended 31st December 2008.
om
Sh. Sh.
.s
w
Incomes
w
w
Profit from coffee activity 569,000
Profit from stores 15000
Interest income 4000
Dividends from CIC 2500
590,500
Rental income 60,000 650,500
Expenses
Salaries and wages 90,000
Travelling 12,000
Education 68,000
Dep. 100,000
Audit fees 50,000
Bank charges 6200
Commission sitting Au. 20,000
Entertainment 3800
Printing and stationery 8000
Post and telephone 2000 _
290,500
om
Shares in CIC 10,000
.c
Current Assets
ya
Stock of stores 15,000
en
Member debtors 65,000
k
ea
Prepayments 100,000
om
Cash 30,000
.s
w
1,325,000
w
w
Equity and Liabilities
S/capital 800,000
Entrance fees 50,000
Statutory Res fund (5,000 + 58,100) 63,100
Retained profits 232,400
Non-Current Liabilities
Long term loan 150,000
Current liabilities 9500
Payment due to members 20,000
Creditors and accruals 1,325,000
REVISION EXERCISES
QUESTION 1
a) In the context of IAS 41 (Agriculture), explain 6the meaning of the following terms:
i. Biological transformation
ii. Agricultural activity
b) Wakulima Ltd. is a farming business carrying out livestock, poultry and crop farming activities.
The information provided below was extracted from the books of the company as at 30 June 2006:
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Stock - 1 July 2005
Fertilizers 2,600
Growing crops 6,800
Cattle 8,300
Cattle feed 3,200
Seeds 2,050
om
Poultry 3,800
.c
Poultry feed 1,800
ya
Eggs 200
en
Land and buildings (net book value) 40,000
k
ea
Machinery and equipment ( net book value) 20,000
om
Furniture (net book value) 5,000
.s
Farm tools 4,000
w
w
Sundry debtors 5,450
w
Cash at bank 850
Ordinary share capital 40,000
Share premium 20,000
Profit and loss account (1 July 2005) 6,850
Purchases:
Poultry 18,000
Cattle 47,000
Cattle feed 14,.000
Seeds 5,000
Poultry feed 6,000
Fertilizers 11,500
Sales:
Crops 35,650
Milk 15,200
Cattle 78,000
Poultry 35,00
Eggs 2,800
Salaries and wages:
Crops 6,000
Cattle 7,200
Poultry 4,800
Expenses:
Crops 2,500
Cattle 4,000
Poultry 3,000
Manager’s salary 6,000
Postage and stationery 800
General expenses 7,000
Insurance 3,700
Finance costs 1,750
Depreciation on assets 6,000
Accrued expenses 1,500
Sundry creditors 3,300
Bank loan 20,000
258,300 258,300
Additional information:
1. As at 30 June 2006, stocks were valued as follows:
Sh.’000’
Poultry 2,150
Cattle 6,500
Cattle feed 2,800
Seeds 1,800
Poultry feed 1,200
Fertilizers 2,200
om
Growing crops 7,100
.c
ya
Eggs 150
ken
ea
2. During the year ended 30 June 2006, the workers consumed products whose values were as
om
shown below:
.s
Sh.’000’
w
w
Poultry 800
w
Cattle 1,500
Crops 1,200
Eggs 150
3. Depreciation expense for the year ended 30 June 200-6 is to be apportioned in the ratio of 3:2:1
between the crops activity, livestock activity respectively.
4. The directors of the company have recommended a dividend of 10%.
Required:
i) Crops account, livestock account and poultry account fro the year ended 30 June 2006.
ii) General profit and loss account for the year ended 30 June 2006.
Solution:
Comprises the process of growth, degeneration, production and procreation that cause qualitative and
quantitative changes in a biological asset.
It is the management by an enterprise of the biological transformation of biological assets for sale into
agricultural produce or into additional biological assets.
b) i) Crop Account
Sh.000 Sh,000
Opening stock Sales 35,650
Growing crops 6,800 Wages in kind 1,200
Seeds 2,050
Fertilizers 2,600
Purchases
Seeds 5,000
Fertilizers 11,500
Salaries and wages
Cash 6,000 Closing stock
In kind 1,200
Expenses 2,500 Growing crops 7,100
Depreciation 3,000 Seeds 1,800
Profit to general profit Fertilizer 2,200
and loss account 7,300 -
om
47,950 47,950
.c
ya
en
Livestock Account
k
ea
om
Sh.000 Sh.000
.s
Opening stock Sales
w
w
- Cattle 8,300 Cattle 78,000
w
- Cattle feed 3,200 Milk 15,200
Wages in kind 1,500
Purchases Closing stock
- Cattle 47,000 - Cattle 6,500
- Cattle feed 14,000 - Cattle feed 2,800
Salaries and wages
- In cash 7,200
- In kind 1,500
Expenses 4,000
Depreciation 2,000
Profit to general profit and loss 16,800
account
104,000 104,000
Poultry account
Sh.000 Sh.000
Opening stock Sales
- Poultry 3,800 Poultry 35,000
- Poultry feed 1,800 Eggs 2,800
- Eggs 200 Wages in kind
General Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 30 June 2006
Sh,000 Sh.000
Profit from
-Crop activity 7,300
-Cattle activity 16,800
Poultry activity 2,700
26,800
Expenses
Managers salary 6,000
Postage and stationery 800
om
General expenses 7,000
.c
ya
Insurance 3,700
en
Finance cost 1,750
k
ea
Net profit 19.250
om
Proposed dividend 4,000
.s
Retained profit 3,550
w
w
w
QUESTION 2
The following trial balance has been extracted from the books of Lina Insurance Company Ltd as at
31 December 2002:
Sh. ‘000’ Sh. ‘000’
Net premium written: Fire 53,816
Motor 107,691
Unearned premiums as at 1 January 2002: Fire 36,018
Motor 72,037
Net commissions paid: Fire 1,733
Motor 3,469
Net claims paid: Fire 27,892
Motor 55,781
Net claims outstanding as at 1 January 2002: Fire 36,018
Motor 72,037
Management expenses to be charged to revenue account 77,554
Management expenses not to be charged to revenue account 10,000
Bad and doubtful debts 2,500
Treasury bills 99,550
Treasury bonds 5,693
Motor vehicle (Net book value) 500
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 224
FINANCIAL REPORTING
om
b) Profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2002
.c
ya
c) Balance sheet as at 31 December 2002
ken
ea
Solution:
om
Revenue Account
.s
w
w
Net claim paid Fire Motor CombinedUnearned Fire Motor Combined
w
Claims outstanding c/d 27,892 55,781 83,673premium b/d 36,018 72,037 108,055
Claims outstanding b/d 45,000 79,000 124,000Net premium 53,816 107,691 161,507
Incidental cost (36,018) (72,037) (198,055) ____ _____ _____
Net claims - - - 89,834 179,728 269,562
Less: Expenses 36,874 62,744 99,618
Management 25,842 51,712 77,554
Net commission ceded 1,733 3,469 5,202
paid 5,385 11,803 17,188
Profit 20,000 50,000 70,000
Unearned premium c/d 89,834 179,729 269,562
Balance Sheet
Fixed Assets: - motor vehicle Shs‘000’ Shs‘000’
Equipment’s 500
Investments - treasury bills 7,207
- Treasury bonds 99,550
Current assets – deposit in bank 237,050 5,693
Amount due from other insurances 3,470 240,520
353,470
Capital and liabilities
Share capital 60,000
Revaluation reserves 25,000
Retained earning 64,470
Underwriting provision 149,470
Unearned premium c/d (20+50) 70,000
Outstanding claims c/d (45+79) 124,000
om
Other liabilities
.c
Bank overdrafts 8,000
ya
Amount due to other insurances 2,000
en
353,470
k
ea
om
.s
w
QUESTION 3
w
w
Hazina Bank Ltd., a registered commercial bank, prepares its accounts to 30 June each year. The
trial balance of the bank as at 30 June 2003 was as follows:
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Treasury bills 2,344,000
Loans to customers 5,946,400
Other money market placements 34,600
Property, plant and equipment 1,008,000
Cash and balances with the Central Bank 1,257,000
Interest on loans 870,800
Interest on treasury bills and bonds 476,400
Foreign exchange income 144,000
Fees and commissions income 340,400
Deposits with other banks 230,000
Other fixed assets 64,000
Interest on placements and bank balances 72,000
Non-operating income 34,000
Customers’ deposits 8,480,000
Deposits and balances due to other banks 430,000
Depreciation charges 84,000
Directors emoluments 25,000
Bad and doubtful debts 68,000
Required:
(a) Profit and loss account for the year ended 30 June 2003.
(b) Balance sheet as at 30 June 2003.
om
.c
ya
(These statements should be presented in accordance with IAS 30 – Disclosures in the Financial
en
Statements of Banks and Similar Financial Institutions).
k
ea
om
Solution:
.s
w
w
w
Hazina Bank Ltd.
Profit and Loss account for the year ended 30 June 2003
Expenditure
Staff costs 590,000
Contribution to staff provident fund 29,000
Directors emoluments 25,000
Depreciation expense 84,000
Interest on deposits from customers 300,000
Interest on borrowed funds 70,000
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 227
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Sh.’000’
Cash and bank balances 1,257,000
Treasury bills and bonds 2,344,000
Deposits with other banks 230,000
om
Interest receivable 150,000
.c
ya
Other money market placements 34,600
en
Loans and advances to customers 5,946,400
k
ea
Property, plant and equipment 1,008,000
om
Other fixed assets 64,000
.s
11,034,000
w
w
Liabilities
w
Customers deposits (8,480 + 70) 8,550,000
Deposits and balances due to other banks 430,000
Taxation 200,000
Proposed dividends 75,000
9,255,000
Share capital 500,000
Reserves 1,279,000
Shareholders funds 1,779,000
11,034,000
QUESTION 4
a) Briefly explain the following terms as used in the accounts of professional practitioners:
i. Office account
ii. Client account
iii. Costs charged to clients
iv. Work-in-progress.
b) Given below is a trial balance extracted from the books of Kamau and Nyambati, a firm of
practicing advocates as at 31 October 2002:
om
Furniture, fittings and library books 45,000
.c
ya
Cash at bank:
en
Clients’ account
k
ea
Office account 24,800 ______
om
55,700
.s
506,000 506,000
w
w
Additional information:
w
1) The uncompleted work on 31 October 2002 was valued at Sh.23,500.
2) It is estimated that debts amounting to Sh.5,500 are uncollectible and should be written off.
3) Depreciation should be provided at 20% per annum on the book value of the furniture, fittings
and library books.
Required:
i. Profit and loss account for the year ended 31 October 2002.
ii. Balance sheet as at 31 October 2002.
Solution:
a) i) Office Account
This is an account opened by a professional practitioner separate form those of the client to serve as bank
account which would deal with operation of the office only e.g. Fee received or charged and expenses paid
for the office.
iv) Work-In-Progress
This means work that remains uncompleted at the year-end e.g. a lawyer may be handling some cases at the
end of the year where the judgment has not been heard. It must be accounted for in the profit and loss
account.
om
Sundry expenses 8,500
.c
ya
Depreciation
en
20% x 45,000 9,000
k
ea
Profit c/d 298,000
om
250,000 250,000
.s
w
w
Opening work in progress 36,800 29,800
w
Profit c/d for the year 16,500 Profit b/d 23,500
53,300 Closing work in progress 53,300
Note: all adjustments concerning the office account and client account have already been affected.
QUESTION 5
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 230
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Accumulated fund as at 1 November 2001 461,560
Accrued expenses 240
Administration expenses 2,840
Cash and demand deposits 23,460
Change in market value of investments 22,640
Lumpsum retirement benefits 4,820
Contributions due in 30 days 4,940
Normal contributions by:
Employer 36,480
Employees 18,240
Transfer in from other schemes 3,150
Individual transfers out to other schemes 1,860
Investment income 47,400
Immovable property 132,320
om
Government securities (long-term) 263,605
.c
Members’ voluntary contributions 4,560
ya
en
Pension 7,640
k
Equity investments: Quoted 87,835
ea
Unquoted 19,900
om
Unpaid benefits ______ 320
.s
w
571,950 571,950
w
w
Required:
(i) Statement of changes in net assets for the year ended 31 October 2002.
(ii) Statement of net assets as at 31 October 2002.
Solution:
(a) The first meeting of creditors’ voluntary winding up should be held on the same day when the members
have passed a resolution to wind up the company or on the day after. In this meeting the creditors shall:
Statement of changes in net assets for the year ended 31 October 2002
Sh. Sh.
Contributions received
From employer: Normal 18,240 36,480
From members: Normal 4,560 22,800
Additional voluntary
Transfer in 3,150
From other sources (individual transfers in) 47,400
Investment income 109,830
Benefits payable 7,640
Pensions 4,820
Commutations of pensions and lumpsum benefits 1,860 (14,320)
Payments on accounts of leavers: individual transfer out 95,510
Changes in market value of investments (22,640)
72,870
Payments: Administration expenses (2,840)
70,030
om
.c
ya
Wafanyakazi retirement benefit Scheme
en
Statement of net assets as at 31 October 2002
k
ea
Sh. Sh.
om
Investment assets
.s
Fixed interest securities
w
w
Kenya Government securities 263,605
w
Equity investments
Quoted 87,835
Unquoted 19,990 107,825
Cash and demand deposits 23,460
394,890
Fixed Assets :
Freehold property 132,320
Current Assets 527,210
Contributions due within 30 days
Current liabilities 4,940
Unpaid benefits (320)
Accrued expenses (240)
(560) 4,380
531,590
Accumulated fund as at 01.11.01 461,560
Net change for the year 70,030
531,590
TOPIC 5
PUBLISHED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
OVERVIEW
IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements sets out the overall requirements for financial
statements, including how they should be structured, the minimum requirements for their content
and overriding concepts such as going concern, the accrual basis of accounting and the current/non-
current distinction. The standard requires a complete set of financial statements to comprise a
statement of financial position, a statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, a
statement of changes in equity and a statement of cash flows.
IAS 1 was reissued in September 2007 and applies to annual periods beginning on or after 1 January
2009.
om
SUMMARY OF IAS 1
.c
ya
Objective of IAS 1
ken
ea
The objective of IAS 1 (2007) is to prescribe the basis for presentation of general purpose financial
om
statements, to ensure comparability both with the entity's financial statements of previous periods
.s
w
and with the financial statements of other entities. IAS 1 sets out the overall requirements for the
w
w
presentation of financial statements, guidelines for their structure and minimum requirements for
their content. Standards for recognizing, measuring, and disclosing specific transactions are
addressed in other Standards and Interpretations.
Scope
Applies to all general purpose financial statements based on International Financial Reporting
Standards
General purpose financial statements are those intended to serve users who are not in a position to
require financial reports tailored to their particular information needs.
The objective of general purpose financial statements is to provide information about the financial
position, financial performance, and cash flows of an entity that is useful to a wide range of users in
making economic decisions. To meet that objective, financial statements provide information about
an entity's:
assets
liabilities
equity
income and expenses, including gains and losses
contributions by and distributions to owners
cash flows
That information, along with other information in the notes, assists users of financial statements in
predicting the entity's future cash flows and, in particular, their timing and certainty.
om
present a statement of financial position (balance sheet) as at the beginning of the earliest
.c
comparative period.
ya
en
An entity may use titles for the statements other than those stated above.
k
ea
om
Reports that are presented outside of the financial statements – including financial reviews by
.s
w
management, environmental reports, and value added statements – are outside the scope of IFRSs.
w
w
Fair presentation and compliance with IFRSs
The financial statements must "present fairly" the financial position, financial performance and cash
flows of an entity. Fair presentation requires the faithful representation of the effects of transactions,
other events, and conditions in accordance with the definitions and recognition criteria for assets,
liabilities, income and expenses set out in the Framework. The application of IFRSs, with additional
disclosure when necessary, is presumed to result in financial statements that achieve a fair
presentation.
IAS 1 requires that an entity whose financial statements comply with IFRSs make an explicit and
unreserved statement of such compliance in the notes. Financial statements shall not be described as
complying with IFRSs unless they comply with all the requirements of IFRSs (including
Interpretations).
Inappropriate accounting policies are not rectified either by disclosure of the accounting policies
used or by notes or explanatory material.
IAS 1 acknowledges that, in extremely rare circumstances, management may conclude that
compliance with an IFRS requirement would be so misleading that it would conflict with the
objective of financial statements set out in the Framework. In such a case, the entity is required to
depart from the IFRS requirement, with detailed disclosure of the nature, reasons, and impact of the
departure.
Going concern
IAS 1 requires that an entity prepare its financial statements, except for cash flow information, using
the accrual basis of accounting.
Consistency of presentation
The presentation and classification of items in the financial statements shall be retained from one
period to the next unless a change is justified either by a change in circumstances or a requirement of
a new IFRS.
om
.c
Materiality and aggregation
ya
k en
Each material class of similar items must be presented separately in the financial statements.
ea
Dissimilar items may be aggregated only if they are individually immaterial.
om
.s
w
Offsetting
w
w
Assets and liabilities, and income and expenses, may not be offset unless required or permitted by an
IFRS.
Comparative information
IAS 1 requires that comparative information shall be disclosed in respect of the previous period for
all amounts reported in the financial statements, both face of financial statements and notes, unless
another Standard requires otherwise.
Reporting period
There is a presumption that financial statements will be prepared at least annually. If the annual
reporting period changes and financial statements are prepared for a different period, the entity must
disclose the reason for the change and a warning about problems of comparability.
An entity must normally present a classified statement of financial position, separating current and
non-current assets and liabilities. Only if a presentation based on liquidity provides information that
is reliable and more relevant may the current/non-current split be omitted. In either case, if an asset
(liability) category combines amounts that will be received (settled) after 12 months with assets
(liabilities) that will be received (settled) within 12 months, note disclosure is required that separates
the longer-term amounts from the 12-month amounts.
Current assets are cash; cash equivalent; assets held for collection, sale, or consumption within the
entity's normal operating cycle; or assets held for trading within the next 12 months. All other assets
are non-current.
om
Current liabilities are those expected to be settled within the entity's normal operating cycle or due
.c
within 12 months, or those held for trading, or those for which the entity does not have an
ya
en
unconditional right to defer payment beyond 12 months. Other liabilities are non-current.
k
ea
om
When a long-term debt is expected to be refinanced under an existing loan facility and the entity has
.s
the discretion the debt is classified as non-current, even if due within 12 months
w
w
w
If a liability has become payable on demand because an entity has breached an undertaking under a
long-term loan agreement on or before the reporting date, the liability is current, even if the lender
has agreed, after the reporting date and before the authorization of the financial statements for issue,
not to demand payment as a consequence of the breach. However, the liability is classified as non-
current if the lender agreed by the reporting date to provide a period of grace ending at least 12
months after the end of the reporting period, within which the entity can rectify the breach and
during which the lender cannot demand immediate repayment.
Additional line items may be needed to fairly present the entity's financial position.
IAS 1 does not prescribe the format of the balance sheet. Assets can be presented current then non-
current, or vice versa, and liabilities and equity can be presented current then non-current then
equity, or vice versa. A net asset presentation (assets minus liabilities) is allowed. The long-term
financing approach used in UK and elsewhere – fixed assets + current assets - short term payables =
long-term debt plus equity – is also acceptable.
om
Regarding issued share capital and reserves, the following disclosures are required:
.c
ya
en
numbers of shares authorized, issued and fully paid, and issued but not fully paid
k
ea
par value
om
reconciliation of shares outstanding at the beginning and the end of the period
.s
description of rights, preferences, and restrictions
w
w
treasury shares, including shares held by subsidiaries and associates
w
shares reserved for issuance under options and contracts
a description of the nature and purpose of each reserve within equity
FORMAT
Current assets
Inventories Xx
Trade receivables Xx
Other current assets Xx
Cash and cash equivalents Xx
Total assets XX
om
Share capital Xx
.c
Retained earnings Xx
ya
Other components of equity Xx
ken
Non-controlling interest Xx
ea
Total equity Xx
om
Xx
.s
w
Non-current liabilities
w
w
Long-term borrowings
Deferred tax Xx
Long-term provisions Xx
Long-term provisions Xx
Total non-current liabilities Xx
Xx
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Short-term borrowings Xx
Current portion of long-term borrowings Xx
Current tax payable Xx
Short-term provisions Xx
Total current liabilities Xx
Total liabilities Xx
Total equity and liabilities Xx
Xx
Information presented either on the face of the statement of financial position or by note
Further sub-classification of the line items listed above should be disclosed either on the face of the
statement of financial position or in the notes. The classification will depend upon the nature of the
entity's operations As well as each item being sub-classified by its nature, any amounts payable to or
receivable from any group company or other related party should also be disclosed separately.
The sub-classification details will in part depend on the requirements of IFRSs. The size, nature and
function of the amounts involved will also be important and the factors listed above should be
considered.
Disclosures will vary from item to item and IAS'1 gives the following examples.
a) Property, plant and equipment are classified by class as described in IAS 16, Property, plant
and equipment
b) Receivables are analyzed between amounts receivable from trade customers, other members
of the group, receivables from related parties, prepayments and other amounts.
c) Inventories are sub-classified, in accordance with IAS 2 Inventories, into classifications such
as merchandise production supplies, materials, work in progress and finished goods.
d) Provisions are analyzed showing separately provisions for employee benefit costs and any
other items classified in a manner appropriate to the entity's operations
e) Equity capital and reserves are analyzed showing separately the various classes of paid in
capital, share premium and reserves
om
.c
The standard then lists some specific disclosures which must be made, either on the face of the
ya
en
statement of financial position or in the related notes.
k
ea
om
Share capital disclosures (for each class of share capital)
.s
w
i. Number of shares authorized
w
w
ii. Number of shares issued and fully paid, and issued but not fully paid
iii. Par value per share, or that the shares have no par value
iv. Reconciliation of the number of shares outstanding at the beginning and at the end of the year
v. Rights, preferences and restrictions attaching to that class including restrictions on the
distribution of dividends and the repayment of capital.
vi. Shares in the entity held by the entity itself or by related group companies
vii. Shares reserved for issuance under options and sales contracts, including the terms and
amounts
Description of the nature and purpose of each reserve within owners' equity
Some types of entity have no share capital, e.g partnerships. Such entities should disclose
information which is equivalent to that listed above. This means disclosing the movement during the
period in each category of equity interest and any rights, preferences or restrictions attached to each
category of equity interest.
An entity must present current and non-current assets as separate classifications on the face of the
statement of financial position. A presentation based on liquidity should only be used where it
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 239
FINANCIAL REPORTING
provides more relevant and reliable information, in which case all assets and liabilities must be
presented broadly in order of liquidity.
In either case, the entity should disclose any portion of an asset or liability which is expected to be
recovered or settled after more than twelve months. For example, for an amount receivable which is
due in instilments over 18 months, the portion due after more than twelve months must be disclosed.
The IAS emphasizes how helpful information on the operating cycle is to users of financial
statements:
Where there is a clearly defined operating cycle within which the entity supplies goods or services,
then information disclosing those net assets that are continuously circulating as working capital is
useful.
This distinguishes them from those net assets used in the long-term operations of the entity. Assets
that are expected to be realized and liabilities that are due for settlement within the operating cycle
are therefore highlighted.
The liquidity and solvency of an entity is also indicated by information about the maturity dates of
assets, and liabilities. Under IFRS 7 Financial instruments; disclosures requires disclosure of
maturity dates of both financial assets and financial liabilities. (Financial assets include trade and
other receivables; financial liabilities include trade and other payables.)
om
.c
Current Assets
ya
ken
An asset should be classified as a current asset when it:
ea
om
is expected to be realized in, or is held for sale or consumption in, the normal course of the
.s
w
entity's operating cycle; or
w
w
is held primarily for trading purposes or for the short-term and expected to be realized within
twelve months of the end of the reporting period; or
Is cash or a cash equivalent asset which is not restricted in its use.
Non-current assets include tangible, intangible, operating and financial assets of a long-term nature.
Other terms with the same meaning can be used (e.g 'fixed', 'long-term').
The term 'operating cycle' has been used several times above and the standard defines it as follows.
The operating cycle of an entity is the time between the acquisition of assets for processing and their
realization in cash or cash equivalents.
Current assets therefore include inventories and trade receivables that are sold, consumed and
realized as part of the normal operating cycle. This is the case even where they are not expected to
be realized within twelve months.
Current assets will also include marketable securities if they are expected to be realized within
twelve months after the reporting period. If expected to be realized later, they should be included in
non-current assets.
Current Liabilities
The categorization of current liabilities is very similar to that of current assets. Thus, some current
liabilities are part of the working capital used in the normal operating cycle of the business (i.e. trade
payables and accruals for employee and other operating costs). Such items will be classed as current
liabilities even where they are due to be settled more than twelve months after the end of the
reporting period.
om
There are also current liabilities which are not settled as part of the normal operating cycle, but
.c
which are due to be settled within twelve months of the end of the reporting period. These include
ya
en
bank overdrafts, income taxes, other non-trade payables and the current portion of interest-bearing
k
ea
liabilities. Any interest- bearing liabilities that are used to finance working capital on a long-term
om
basis, and that are not due for settlement within twelve months, should be classed as non-current
.s
liabilities.
w
w
w
A non-current financial liability due to be settled within twelve months of the end of the reporting
period should be classified as a current liability, even if an agreement to refinance, or to reschedule
payments, on a long-term basis is completed after the end of the reporting period and before the
financial statement are authorized for issue.
A non-current financial liability that is payable on demand because the entity breached a condition
of it loan agreement should be classified as current at the end of the reporting period even if the
lender has agreed after the end of the reporting period, and before the financial statements are
authorized for issue not to demand payment as a consequence of the breach.
However, if the lender has agreed by the end of the reporting period to provide a period of grace
ending at least twelve months after the end of the reporting period within which the entity can rectify
the breach and during that time the lender cannot demand immediate repayment, the liability is
classified as non- current.
The revision of IAS 1 in 2007 introduced a new statement, the statement of comprehensive income.
This shows both income statement items and items which would previously have gone to the
statement of recognized income and expense.
The format for a single statement of comprehensive income is shown as follows in the standard. The
section down to 'profit for the year' can be shown as a separate 'income statement' with an additional
'statement of other comprehensive income'.
om
.c
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
FORMAT
ABC Group - Statement of Comprehensive Income for The Year Ended 31 December 2013
2013
Revenue Xx
Cost of sales Xx
Gross profit Xx
Other income Xx
Distribution costs Xx
Administrative expenses Xx
Other expenses Xx
Finance costs Xx
Share of profit of associates Xx
Profit before tax Xx
Income tax expense Xx
Profit for the year from continuing operations Xx
Loss for the year from discontinued operations Xx
Profit for the year Xx
om
- Cash flow hedges Xx
.c
- Gains on property revaluation Xx
ya
- Actuarial gains (losses) on defined benefit pension plans Xx
en
Share of other comprehensive income of associates Xx
k
ea
Income tax relating to components of other Xx
om
comprehensive income Xx
.s
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax
w
w
Total comprehensive income for the year Xx
w
Profit attributable to: Xx
Owners of the parent Xx
Non-controlling interest
Total comprehensive income attributable to; Xx
Owners of the parent Xx
Non-controlling interest
Xx
Earnings per share (in currency units) Xx
Xx
Xx
The standard lists the following as the minimum to be disclosed on the face of the income statement.
a) Revenue
b) Finance costs
c) Share of profits and losses of associates and joint ventures accounted for using the equity
rnethod.
d) Pre-tax gain or loss recognized on the disposal of assets or settlement of liabilities attributable
to discontinued operations
e) Tax expense
f) Profit or loss
The following items must be disclosed in the income statement as allocations of profit or loss for the
period.
The allocated amounts must net be presented as items of income or expense. (These relate to group
accounts, covered later in this text.)
Income and expense items can only be offset when and only when:
An analysis of expenses must be shown either in the income statement section (as above, which is
om
encouraged by the standard) or by note, using a classification based on either the nature of the
.c
expenses or their function. This sub-classification of expenses indicates a range of components of
ya
financial performance; these may differ in terms of stability, potential for gain or loss and
ken
predictability.
ea
om
.s
Nature of expense method
w
w
w
Expenses are not reallocated amongst various functions within the entity, but are aggregated in the
income statement according to their nature (e.g purchase of materials, depreciation, wages and
salaries, transport costs). This is by far the easiest method, especially for smaller entities.
You are likely to be more familiar with this method. Expenses are classified according to their
function as part of cost of sales, distribution or administrative activities. This .method often gives
more relevant information for users, but the allocation of expenses by function requires the use of
judgement and can be arbitrary. Consequently, perhaps, when this method is used, entities should
disclose additional information on the nature of expenses, including staff costs, and depreciation and
amortization expense.
Which of the above methods is chosen by an entity will depend on historical and industry factors,
and also the nature of the organisations. Under each method, there should be given an indication of
costs which are likely to vary (directly or indirectly) with the level of sales or production. The
choice of method should fairly reflect the main elements of the entity's performance. This is the
method you should expect to see in your exam that you get no marks for writing out the format for a
financial statement. However, you must write the format so that you can then fill in the numbers and
earn the marks.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 244
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Dividends
IAS 1 also requires disclosure of the amount of dividends per share for the period covered by the
financial statements. This may be shown either in the income statement or in the statement of
changes in equity.
Further points
a) All requirements previously set out in other Standards for the presentation of particular line
items in the statement of financial position and income statement are now dealt with in IAS 1.
These line items are: biological assets; liabilities and assets for current tax and deferred tax; and
pre-tax gain or loss recognized on the disposal of assets or settlement of liabilities attributable
to discontinued operations.
b) An entity must disclose, in the summary of significant accounting policies and/or other notes,
the judgement made by management in applying the accounting policies that have the most
significant effect on the amounts of items recognized in the financial statements.
c) An entity must disclose in the notes information regarding key assumptions about the future,
and other sources of measurement uncertainty, that have a significant risk of causing a material
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year.
Changes in equity
om
IAS 1 requires a statement of changes in equity. This shows the movement in the equity section of
.c
the statement of financial position. A full set of financial statements includes a statement of changes
ya
en
in equity.
k
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
FORMAT
This is the format of the statement of changes in equity as per IAS 1 (revised).
om
Total comprehensive
.c
ya
income for the year - Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx
en
Transfer to retained earnings - Xx Xx Xx - - -
k
ea
Balance at 31 December 2007 Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx Xx
om
.s
w
w
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Contents of notes w
The notes to the financial statements will amplify the information given in the statement of financial
position, statement of comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity. We have already
note above the information which the IAS allows to be shown by note rather than in the statements.
To some extent, then, the contents of tile notes will be determined by the level of detail shown on
the face of the statements.
Structure
The notes to the financial statements should perform the following functions.
a) Provide information about the oasis on which the financial statements were prepared and
which specific accounting policies were chosen and applied to significant transactions/events.
b) Disclose any information, not shown elsewhere in the financial statements, which is required
by IFRSs
c) Show any additional information that is relevant to understanding which is not shown
elsewhere the financial statements
The way the notes are presented is important. They should be given in a systematic manner and
cross referenced back to the related figure(s) in the statement of financial position, statement of
comprehensive income or statement of cash flows.
Notes to the financial statements will amplify the information shown therein by giving the
following;
IAS 1 suggests a certain order for notes to the financial statements. This will assist users when
comparing the statements of different entities.
om
The order of specific items may have to be varied occasionally, but a systematic structure is still
.c
required
ya
ken
PRESENTATION OF ACCOUNTING POLICIES
ea
om
The accounting policies section should describe the following.
.s
w
w
w
a) The measurement basis (or bases) used in preparing the financial statements
b) The other accounting policies used, as required for a proper understanding of the financial
statements
This information may be shown in the notes or sometimes as a separate component of the financial
statements.
OTHER DISCLOSURES
IAS 1 ends by listing some specific disclosures which will always be required if they are not shown
elsewhere in the financial statements.
a) The domicile and legal form of the entity, its country of incorporation and the address of the
registered office (or, if different, principal place of business)
b) A description of the nature of the entity's operations and its principal activities
c) The name of the parent entity and the ultimate parent entity of the group
ILLUSTRATION
Basweta Ltd, which manufactures footwear, makes up its accounts to 31 March each year. The
company has an authorised share capital of Sh. 600,000,000 divided into 15,000,000 6.5%
preference shares of Sh. 20 each and 30,000,000 ordinary shares of Sh. 10 each. The following trial
balance was extracted as at 31 March 2002.
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Cost of Sales 699,992
Motor vehicle expenses 59,684
Selling and distribution costs 78,840
Depreciation of motor vehicles – for the year 12,580
Wages and salaries 95,834
Administration expenses 11,492
Audit fees 1,400
om
Sales 1,191,864
.c
ya
Discounts received 812
en
Investment income – trade investments 1,072
k
ea
- others 1,608
om
Preference dividends paid 13,000
.s
Debenture interest 1,600
w
w
Corporation tax paid – instalment 8,615
w
Compensation to director for loss of office 8,500
Depreciation of fixtures for the year) 1,040
8% debentures 20,000
Cash in hand 3,000
Ordinary share capital issued and paid-up) 200,000
Bank balance 11,745
Preference share capital issued and paid-up) 200,000
Inventory 31 March 2002) 204,132
Debtors/creditors 336,440 102,000
Deferred tax 3,000
Motor vehicles net book value) 24,800
Provision for doubtful debts 14,400
Fixtures and fittings net book value) 11,300
Profit and loss account 1 April 2001) 110,848
General reserves 60,000
Share premium 40,000
Freehold land and building cost) 270,000
Investments – trade market value Sh.35,000,000) 30,000
Others market value Sh.62,000,000) 61,610
1,945,604 1,945,604
Additional information:
1. Wages and salaries include salary paid to Managing Director of Sh. 30,000,000 and salary paid
to Sales Director of Sh. 25,000,000.
2. Provision is due to be made for directors’ fees Sh. 150,000,000.
3. Provision for doubtful debts is to be adjusted to Sh. 16,822,000.
4. Timing differences of Sh. 4,000,000 are expected to reverse in the near future.
5. The directors recommended an ordinary dividend of Sh.1.35 per share.
6. Corporation tax for the year is Sh.11; 820,000.The corporation tax rate is 30%on adjusted profit.
7. Land and buildings were professionally valued at Sh.300, 000,000 at the year end. The directors
wish to incorporate the valued amount in the financial statements.
8. Information about other fixed asset is as follows:
om
Required
.c
(a) Income statement for the year ended 31 March 2002
ya
en
(b) Balance sheet as at 31 March 2002
k
ea
om
(The above two statement should be presented in the form suitable for publication in accordance
.s
with the requirements of International Accounting Standards .IASs)
w
w
w
SOLUTION
Basweta Ltd
Statement of Changes In Equity As At 31.03.02
Ordinary Preference Share General F.A Rev. Retained Total
share capital share capital premium reserve Reserve earnings Sh.’000’
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Bal b/f 200,000 200,000 400,000 600,000 - 110,848 610,848
Prior adjustment - - - - - - -
200,000 200,000 400,000 600,000 - 110,848 610,848
Restated - - - - - -
Rev. gain on NCA - - - - 30,000 - 30,000
Rev. gain on
investment - - - - 390 - 390
Rev. gain on - - - - - - -
foreign
Net profit: year - - - - - 60,752 60,752
Dividends:
Interim - - - - - (13,000) (13,000)
-
Bal b/d 200,000 200,000 40,000 60,000 30,390 158,600 68,8990
b)
om
.c
Basweta Ltd
ya
en
Balance sheet as at 31 March 2002
k
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
ea
om
Non Current Assets
.s
Plant, property and equipment 334,900
w
w
Investments Other 62000
w
396900
Current Assets
Stock 204,132
Debtors (336,440 – 16,822) 319,618
Trade investments 30,000
Cash and bank (11,745 + 3,000) 14,745 568,495
965395
Financed by:
Authorised share capital
15m shares 6.5% preference @ Sh.20 300,000
50m share ordinary @ Sh.10 300,000
Issued and fully paid 600,000
10m 6.5% preference shares @ Sh.20 200,000
20m Ordinary shares @ Sh.10 200,000
400,000
Reserves
Share premium 40,000
Revaluation reserve 30,390
General reserve 60,000 130,390
Workings
1. Turnover Sh.’000’
As per trial balance 1,191,864
Less proceeds and disposals (1,215)
1,190,649
2. Selling and distribution costs
As per TB 78,840
Motor vehicle expenses 59,864
om
Wages 25,000
.c
Depreciation: Motor vehicle 12,580
ya
en
176,104
k
ea
3. Administrative expenses
om
Wages and salaries 70,834
.s
As per TB 11,492
w
w
Audit fees 1,400
w
Depreciation: fixtures 1,040
Compensation of director for loss of office 8,500
Provision for doubtful debts (16,822 – 14,400) 2,422
Director’s fee 150,000
245,688
Profit on assets disposed
4.
Cost Motor Fixtures & Fittings Total
vehicles
Acc. Dep. 2,800 1,455 4,255
NBV 2,150 905 3,055
Proceeds 650 550 1,200
Profit & Loss 715 500 1,215
6,500
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Profit U Loss 1,800Bal b/d 3,000
Bal c/d (30% x 4,000) 1,200
3,000 3,000
These financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost basis of accounting which is
modified to accommodate the revaluation of certain properties and in accordance with the applicable
IFRSs.
Property plant and equipment is shown at cost or revalued amount less the total accumulated
depreciation, which is based on the estimated useful life of the assets.
Inventory has been stated at the lower of cost and net realizable value.
The profit before tax has been arrived at after charging the following expenses
om
.c
Sh. ‘000’
ya
Directors fee 205,000
ken
Compensation to director for loss of office 8,500
ea
Depreciation 13,650
om
Auditors fee 1,400
.s
w
Staff costs 40,834
w
Note 3 Taxation w
Corporation tax is based on the adjusted profits for tax purpose at a corporation tax rate of 30%
Accumulated Depreciation
Bal as at 01.04.01 - 13,820 8,460 22,280
Eliminated on disposal - (2,150) (905) (3,055)
Charge for the year - 12,580 1,040 13,650
Bal as at 31.03.02 - 24,250 8,595 32,845
NBV as at 31.03.02 300,000 24,150 10,750 315,880
NBV as at 01.04.01 270,000 35,140 10,740 315,880
Note 5 Dividends
During the year the company paid a dividend of sh.1.30 on the preference shares outstanding. The
directors are now proposing a dividend of sh.1.35 per s share on the number of ordinary shares
outstanding at the end of the year.
om
The objective of this Standard is to prescribe the criteria for selecting and changing accounting
.c
ya
policies, together with the accounting treatment and disclosure of changes in accounting policies,
en
changes in accounting estimates and corrections of errors. The Standard is intended to enhance the
k
ea
relevance and reliability of an entity’s financial statements, and the comparability of those financial
om
statements over time and with the financial statements of other entities.
.s
w
w
w
Accounting policies
Accounting policies are the specific principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices applied by an
entity in preparing and presenting financial statements. When a Standard or an Interpretation
specifically applies to a transaction, other event or condition, the accounting policy or policies
applied to that item shall be determined by applying the Standard or Interpretation and considering
any relevant Implementation Guidance issued by the IASB for the Standard or Interpretation.
In the absence of a Standard or an Interpretation that specifically applies to a transaction, other event
or condition, management shall use its judgement in developing and applying an accounting policy
that results in information that is relevant and reliable. In making the judgement management shall
refer to, and consider the applicability of, the following sources in descending order:
(a) The requirements and guidance in Standards and Interpretations dealing with similar and
related issues; and
(b) The definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts for assets, liabilities, income
and expenses in the Framework.
An entity shall select and apply its accounting policies consistently for similar transactions, other
events and conditions, unless a Standard or an Interpretation specifically requires or permits
An entity shall account for a change in accounting policy resulting from the initial application of a
Standard or an Interpretation in accordance with the specific
om
.c
The use of reasonable estimates is an essential part of the preparation of financial statements and
ya
does not undermine their reliability. A change in accounting estimate is an adjustment of the
ken
carrying amount of an asset or a liability, or the amount of the periodic consumption of an asset, that
ea
om
results from the assessment of the present status of, and expected future benefits and obligations
.s
associated with, assets and liabilities. Changes in accounting estimates result from new information
w
or new developments and, accordingly, are not corrections of errors. The effect of a change in an
w
w
accounting estimate, shall be recognised prospectively by including it in profit or loss in:
(a) The period of the change, if the change affects that period only; or
(b) The period of the change and future periods, if the change affects both.
Prior period errors are omissions from, and misstatements in, the entity’s financial statements for
one or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:
(a) was available when financial statements for those periods were authorised for issue; and
(b) Could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the preparation
and presentation of those financial statements.
Such errors include the effects of mathematical mistakes, mistakes in applying accounting policies,
oversights or misinterpretations of facts, and fraud.
Except to the extent that it is impracticable to determine either the period-specific effects or the
cumulative effect of the error, an entity shall correct material prior period errors retrospectively in
the first set of financial statements authorised for issue after their discovery by:
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 254
FINANCIAL REPORTING
(a) restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) presented in which the error
occurred; or
(b) if the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening balances
of assets, liabilities and equity for the earliest prior period presented.
The Standard also requires that an entity should not prepare its financial statements on a going
concern basis if events after the balance sheet date indicate that the going concern assumption is not
appropriate.
Events after the balance sheet date are those events, favourable and unfavourable, that occur
om
between the balance sheet date and the date when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
.c
Two types of events can be identified:
ya
ken
(a) those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the balance sheet date (adjusting
ea
om
events after the balance sheet date); and
.s
(b) those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the balance sheet date (non-adjusting
w
events after the balance sheet date).
w
w
An entity shall adjust the amounts recognised in its financial statements to reflect adjusting events
after the balance sheet date.
An entity shall not adjust the amounts recognised in its financial statements to reflect non-adjusting
events after the balance sheet date. If non-adjusting events after the balance sheet date are material,
non-disclosure could influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial
statements. Accordingly, an entity shall disclose the following for each material category of non-
adjusting event after the balance sheet date:
If an entity receives information after the balance sheet date about conditions that existed at the
balance sheet date, it shall update disclosures that relate to those conditions, in the light of the new
information.
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
Discontinued operations
Discontinued operation is a component (a part of an entity) that either has been disposed off or is
classified as held for sale and;
IFRS 5 requires an entity to present the income statement of a group with separate columns for
continuing operations, discontinued operations and enterprise as a whole disclosing the following in
respect of a discontinued operation:
om
to sell.
.c
ya
2. The analysis of the single amount in (1) above either on the face of the income statement or in
ken
the notes to the income statement. The single amount should be analyzed into;
ea
(i) The revenue, expenses and pre-tax profits or loss of discontinued operation
om
(ii) The related tax expense.
.s
w
(iii) The gain/loss on disposal of discontinued operations
w
w
(iv) The related tax expenses of discontinued operations.
REVISION EXERCISES
QUESTION1
Bara Ltd, a company quoted on the stock exchange, extracted the following trial balance as at 31
October 2006.
Sh. '000' Sh. '000'
Land and buildings at cost 270,000
Plant at cost 156,000
Purchases 78,200
Distribution 10,000
Administrative expenses 5,500
Loan interest paid 2,000
Leased plant rental 22,000
Dividend paid 15,000
Inventories (1November 2005) 37,800
Accounts receivable 53,200
Investments (long-term) 90,000
Revenue 278,400
Income from investment 4,500
Ordinary shares of sh.10 each 150,000
Retained earnings 119,500
om
8% debentures 50,000
.c
Accumulated depreciation: Buildings 60,000
ya
en
Plant 26,000
k
ea
Accounts payable 33,400
om
Differed payable 12,500
.s
Balance at bank 5,400
w
w
739,700 739,700
Additional information: w
1. The land and buildings were purchased on 1 November 1990. The cost of land was sh.70
million or buildings have been purchased by Bara Ltd. since then. However, on 1 November
2005,the land and buildings were professionally valued at sh.80 million respectively. The
estimated useful life buildings before the revaluation was 50 years. However, the revaluation
did not change the useful life of the buildings. Plant is depreciated at 15% per annum using
the reducing balance method. Depreciation expense is to be included under cost of sales in the
income statement.
2. On 1 November 2005, Bara Ltd. entered into a five year lease agreement for an item of plant.
This item had an estimated useful life of five years. The annual rental which was payable in
advance with effect from 1 November 2005 was sh.22 million.
The fair value of the plant is sh.92 million and the implicit interest rate is 10% per annum.
3. The 8% debentures were issued on 1 January 2006 and interest is payable six months in
arrears.
4. The income tax for the year to 31 October 2006 estimated at sh.28.3 million. The differed tax
provision as at 31 October 2006 was increased to sh.14.1 million.
5. Inventories were valued at sh.43.2 million as at 31 October 2006.
Required:
Solution:
a)
Bara Ltd
Sh,000 Sh,000
Revenue 278,400
Cost of sales (115,700)
Gross profit 162,700
Other incomes: investment income 4,500
167,200
Expenses
Distribution costs 10,000
om
Administrative expenses 5,500
.c
Finance costs 10,000 (25,000)
ya
Profit before tax 141,700
ken
Income tax expense (29,900)
ea
Profit for the period 111,800
om
.s
w
w
w
b) Bara Ltd
c) Bara Ltd
Sh,000 Sh,000
Non current assets 434,100
Property, plant and equipment 90,000
Investments 524,100
Current assets
Inventory 43,200
Accounts receivables 53,200 96,400
Total assets 620,500
Equities and liabilities
Ordinary share capital 150.000
Reserves
Revaluation reserve 45,000
Retained profit 216,300
Shareholder funds 411,300
Non-current liabilities
8% debentures 50,000
Deferred tax 14,100
Obligation under finance lease 55,000 119,000
Current liabilities
Accounts/payables 33,400
om
Bank overdraft 5,400
.c
ya
Accrued loan interest 1,000
en
Obligation under finance lease 22,000
k
ea
Current tax 28,300 90,100
om
Total equity and liabilities 620,500
.s
w
w
Workings:
i) Cost of sales w
Sh ‘000’
Opening inventory 37,800
Purchases 78,200
Depreciation: buildings 5,000
Plant: owned 19, 500
Leased 18,400
Closing inventory 43,000
115,700
The accumulated depreciation (60m) represents a 15 years revaluation at Sh 4 million each. The remaining
life is 35 years thus depreciation of buildings will now be 175/35 years
QUESTION 2
HAPA Ltd. manufactures and sells a wide range of food products for both wholesale and retail
outlets. Its authorized ordinary share capital is 5 million shares of Sh 100 par value.
The company has extracted the following trail balance as at 31 October 2004.
Sh “000” Sh “000”
om
Ordinary share capital: issued and fully paid 300,000
.c
Retained earnings 131,000
ya
10% debentures (secured on buildings) 50,000
en
8% debentures (secured on a floating charge) 50,000
k
ea
freehold buildings: Cost 150,000
om
Accumulated depreciation 15,000
.s
Plant and machinery: Cost 220,000
w
w
Depreciation 40,000
w
Additions-plant and machinery 40,000
Motor vehicles: Cost 25,000
Accumulated depreciation 10,000
Land 100,000
Profit for the year 285,820
Trade and other payables 31,400
Trade and other receivables 101,600
Inventories 163,000
Balance at Faida Bank 47,000
Directors remuneration 52,000
Balance at Faulu Bank 3,800
Investment ( market value: Sh. 35 million) 49,620
Interest received 32,000
Interim dividends paid 2,100
Tax paid 21,000
Dividend received 5,700
1,400
963,720 963,720
Additional information
om
disposal.
.c
ya
5. Inventories comprise:
en
Raw materials Sh. ‘000’
k
ea
Work-in-progress 50,900
om
Finished goods 24,875
.s
87,225
w
w
6. Employees costs included in relevant functional expenses are:
w
Salaries and wages Sh. ‘000’
Social security costs 478,770
Pension costs 67,500
42,000
Directors’ fees amounting to Sh. 3 million have not been provided for.
7. The directors propose to pay a final dividend of Sh. 8 per share.
Required:
(a) Income statement for the year ended 31 October 2004
(b) Balance sheet as at 31 October 2004. include relevant notes, using only the
information provided, to ensure that the financial statements are in conformity
with International Financial Reporting Standards
Note: Do not prepare a statement of changes in equity.
Solution:
Turnover 1432,000
Cost of sales (967,170)
Gross profit 464,830
Other incomes 31,500
468,330
Expenses
Distribution costs 87,670
Administration costs 198,640
Finance costs 9,000 (295,310)
Profit before tax 173,020
Income tax expense (53,000)
Profit after tax 120,020
Dividends paid (21,000)
Retained profit for the year 99,020
om
Property /plant equipment 421,500
.c
ya
Investments 35,000
en
456,500
k
ea
Current assets
om
Inventories 163,000
.s
Trade & other receivable 101,600
w
w
Bank balance 49,620 314,220
w
Total assets 770,720
Non-current liabilities
10% Debentures 45,000
Current liabilities
Trade payables & accounts 43,400
Bank overdraft 47,000
8% Debentures 50,000
10% Debentures 5,000
Tax payable 47,300 192,700
Total equity & liabilities 770,720
a) These financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost basis of accounting and in
accordance with the applicable IFRSs.
b) Inventory is valued at the lower of cost and net realizable value.
c) Depreciation is based on the estimated useful life of the assets at the following rates;
Asset Rates
Buildings 2 ½%
Plants and machinery 15%
Motor vehicles 20%
Note 2 Profit for the year is arrived at after changing the following expenses.
Sh.’000’ Sh. ‘000’
Directors emoluments: fees 3,000 52,000
Others 52,000 48,500
Depreciation 3,800
Addition remuneration 588,270
Staff costs
om
buildings machinery vehicles
.c
ya
Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
en
Balance as at 1.11.03 250,000 220,000 25,000 495,000
k
ea
Additions - 45,000 - 45,000
om
Disposals - (20,000) - (20,000)
.s
Balance as at 31.12.04 250,000 245,000 25,000 520,000
w
w
Depreciation
w
Balance as at 1.11.03 15,000 40,000 10,000 65,000
Change for year 3,750 36,750 5,000 45,000
Eliminated disposal - (12,000) - (12,000)
Balance as at 31.10.04 18,750 64,750 15,000 98,500
NBV as at 31.10.04 231,250 18,250 10,000 421,500
NBV as at 1.11.03 235,000 180,000 15,000 430,000
Note 4 inventory
Inventory is made up as follows
Sh.’000’
Row materials 50,900
Work in progress 24,875
Finished goods 87,225
163,000
Workings
Expenses
om
.c
ya
en
k
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
TOPIC 6
Key Definitions
Non-controlling interest (NCI) – It is that portion of net assets of a subsidiary attributable to equity
interest which are not owned directly or indirectly through subsidiaries by the parent.
om
Institutional Requirement
.c
ya
Consolidated financial statements: the financial statements of a group presented as those of a
ken
single economic entity.
ea
om
.s
Control: the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain
w
w
benefits from its activities
w
A subsidiary company is a company in which the investing company (also called parent or parent
company) controls the financial and operating policies of the subsidiary company.
Control is usually based on ownership of more than 50% of voting power, but other forms of control
are possible.
Example:
Z is considering an investment on west, the capital structure of which is as follows 10,000 A voting
ordinary shares 10,000 B non-voting ordinary shares. Both classes of shares have the same dividend
rights:
Answer to Example
i. It is the voting share that gives Z the influence on west. Z should control west in this case.
West will therefore be treated as a subsidiary because Z owns 60% of the voting shares in
west.
ii. As Z has less than 50% of the voting shares this time Z will not probably be able to control
west therefore west will not be treated as a subsidiary
IAS 27 requires that consolidated financial statements shall include all subsidiary of the parent. The
two exceptions to these rules are:
1. Lack of effective control – the excluded should be accounted for as an investment in
accordance with IAS 39
Subsidiary held for resale – held for resale subsidiary is treated as a current asset investment and
valued at lower of the carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell
In most cases, control is evidenced (but not limited) to owning more than 50% of the ordinary share
capital of the subsidiary company. Control may also be exercised in the following ways;
i) The parent company owning more than 50% or the voting rights in the company or subsidiary
om
company.
.c
ya
ii) The parent company being able to appoint majority of the directors in the board of directors.
en
iii) The parent company carrying out favourable transactions with the subsidiary e.g. sale and
k
ea
purchase of goods at a price below the market value.
om
.s
The substance of the relationship between parent company and subsidiary company is the
w
w
effectively, the parent company controls the subsidiary company. This means that the parent
w
company controls the assets of the subsidiary company and is liable to the debts of the subsidiary
company.
1AS 27 therefore requires that the parent a company should include the financial results of the
subsidiary company in its own financial statements. The process involves adding the assets,
liabilities and incomes and expenses of the subsidiary company to those of the parent company
while excluding inter-company transactions and balances. This process is called consolidation and
the combined financial statements are called Group accounts or consolidated accounts.
Principles of consolidation
1. Non-conterminous
Some companies in the group may have differing accounting dates in practice; such companies will
often prepare financial statements up to the group accounting date for consolidation purposes.
For purpose of consolidation, IAS allows use of financial statements made up to date not more than
three months earlier or later than the parent reporting date, with due adjustment for significant
transactions or other events between the dates.
om
statements, i.e. to show the position of the group as if it were a single economic entity. A group
.c
ya
cannot trade with itself, nor can it make a profit out of itself. In a similar way cannot increase its
en
sales or its net assets by transferring assets and liabilities between members of the group
k
ea
om
Related parties
.s
Two parties are considered related if
w
w
1. One party has the ability to control the other party or
w
2. One party has the ability to exercise significant influence over the other party or
3. The parties are under common control. Therefore
1. A company that is a subsidiary is a related party of its parent company
2. This means that the financial statement may have been affected by related party
transactions
Types of transactions that may occur between the parent and subsidiary (related parties) and their
impact on the financial statements of the individual company and the group are:
Even when related party transactions are at arm’s length, it’s important to realize that they are
related party transactions. This is because it is quite possible that they would not have occurred but
for the relationship.
om
.c
by adding together like items of assets, liabilities and equity.
ya
However, in order that Consolidated statement of financial position presents financial information
ken
about a group as that of a single enterprise, the following adjustments or considerations have to be
ea
om
made;
.s
w
w
w
1. Investment in the subsidiary.
The investment in the subsidiary appearing as a Non-current asset in the parent books does not
appear in consolidated statements. However it is credited to the Cost of control account in the
determination of goodwill or discount on acquisition.
2. Goodwill on acquisition
Goodwill is the difference between the value placed upon a firm and the value of its net asset.
IFRS 3 defines goodwill as the future economic benefits that are not separately identifiable.
Net Assets is the shareholder’s interest in a company which can also be determined by considering
the shareholders fund.
Share holders fund comprises of; Ordinary share capital, Share premium, Reserves and Retained TI.
i) Partial method – This is where only the goodwill of the parent portion of net assets in the
subsidiary is considered or is determined.
ii) Full method – Where goodwill of the subsidiary as a whole is considered. In this case
NCI is measured at fair /full value.
Negative goodwill
Goodwill arising on acquisition is one form of purchased goodwill. It is the different between the
cost of investment and the fair value of net assets acquired. This difference can be negative i.e. the
fair value of net assets acquired may exceed the cost of acquisition. IFRS refer to these as Burgan
purchase and in this case the entity should re-asses the amount at which it has measured the cost of
investment and the fair value of the acquiree net assets in order to identify any error.
om
Any excess after the reassessment should be recognised in the income statement as an income,
.c
ya
immediately during the period it arises.
en
k
ea
ILLUSTRATION
om
H limited acquired 75% of the ordinary shares in S limited on 1st January 2011 when S limited
.s
w
w
retained earnings was sh 15,000. The market of S limited ordinary shares as at that date was sh 1.6
w
share. H limited and S limited statement of financial position as at 31st December 2011 was as
follows:
Required
a) Determine the value of goodwill using the two methods
b) Consolidated H of financial position on the assumption that Non-controlling interest (NCI) is
valued at fair value
Solution
Determine the net asset in S limited as at 1/12011 and as at 31/12/2011.
Net Assets = Assets - Liabilities
As at 1/1/2011
Retained earnings 15,000
Ordinary shares 50,000
65,000
As at 31/12/2011
Retained earnings 25,000
Ordinary share capital 50,000
75,00 0
Goodwill on acquisition
Using partial method
Cost of investment 68,000
Less: Net Assets acquired (65,000 x 75%)
19,250
om
.c
ya
Using full method
ken
Parent goodwill 19,250
ea
om
Add: Non-controlling Interest goodwill
.s
Fair value of Non-Controling Interest (25% x 5000) = 12500 x 1.6 20,000
w
w
Less: NCI portion of net asset (25% x 65000) 16,250
w
N.C.I Goodwill 3750
Full Goodwill 23,000
Inventory Account
Shs. Shs.
H Ltd 15,000 Bal c/d 35,000
S Ltd 20,000
35,000 35,000
Investment Account
Shs. Shs.
H Ltd 68,000 Cost of control 68,000
om
.c
ya
Account Payables
en
Shs. Shs.
k
ea
Bal c/d - H Ltd 10,000
om
20,000 S Ltd 10,000
.s
w
20,000 20,000
w
Ordinary sharecapital Account w
Shs. Shs.
Cost of con. (75%x50,000) 37,500 H Ltd 100,000
Non-Controling Int.(25% x 50,000) 12,500 S Ltd
Bal c/d 50,000 50,000
150,000 150,000
Retained Account
Shs. Shs.
Cost of control(75%x15) 11,250 H Ltd 70,000
NCI(25%X25) 6250 S Ltd 25,000
Bal c/d 77,500 ______
95,000 95,000
Goodwill Account
Shs. Shs.
Cost of control 19,250 Bal c/d 23,000
Non-controlling intrest 3,750
23,000 23,000
H. Group
Statement of financial Position as at 31st December 2010
Sh.
Assets
Non – Current Asset
Property,plant & equipment 110,000
om
Goodwill 23,000
.c
ya
Current Assets
en
Inventory 35,000
k
ea
Cash and bank bal. 52,000
om
220,000
.s
w
w
Equity and liabilities
w
Ordinary share capital 100,000
Retained profit 77,500
Net Asset attributable to parent shareholders 177,500
Net Asset attributable to NCI 22,500
Current liabilities
Accounts payables 20,000
220,000
If the inter-company transactions are on credit basis they may give rise to intercompany balances.
However, intercompany balances should be eliminated in full in the consolidated process.
Where the intercompany balances are not the same in the books of the parent and the subsidiary, this
is a result of items in transit which could either be goods in transit or cash in transit.
The adjusting entries should be made in the group account balances for these items in transit before
intragroup balances are eliminated in full;
a. With the goods in transit,
Debit: Group inventory
Credit: Group creditors
b. With cash in transit,
Debit: Group cash and cash equivalents
Credit: Group debtors.
Goods are usually sold between members of the group at prices above the original cost incurred by
the selling company. It is possible that goods sold between the members of the group are not sold to
third parties by the purchasing company at the close of the financial year i.e. they remain in the
inventory of the purchasing company. This gives rise to the element of unrealized profits. The
accounting treatment of intra-group transactions in relation to incomes, expenses and even dividends
is that they should be eliminated in full in the consolidation process. Similarly, profits or losses
arising from inter-company transactions that are not recognized or realized from the assets. E.g.
stocks are eliminated in full.
om
.c
ya
Therefore, with unrealized profits on stock;
ken
ea
Debit: Group income statement
om
Credit: Group inventory
.s
w
However, if the stock of goods relates to an upstream sale, the unrealized profits should be
w
w
eliminated in full from the profits of the subsidiary and from the group inventory with the
Required;
Group inventory
Group Inventory Account
Shs. Shs.
1
H Ltd 1025 Profit and loss ( /3 x 750) 250
S Ltd 2040 Bal c/d 2815
3065 3065
om
.c
Where the parent company acquires preference shares in the subsidiary in addition to ordinary
ya
shares, the nominal value of the preference shares acquired is treated as part of the equity interest
ken
acquired and is credited to the cost of control.
ea
om
The cost of investment in the preference shares is debited to the Cost of Control (COC) account. The
.s
nominal value of the preference shares not acquired by the group is closed to the Non-Controlling
w
w
Interest account.
w
NB: The proportion of preference shares acquired by the parent in the subsidiary does not determine
controlling interest in the subsidiary.
The nominal value of the debentures not acquired by the parent is shown as a separate line item of
non-current liabilities in the CSFP rather than being closed to the Non-controlling interest (NCI)
account.
Interim dividends paid out of post – acquisition profits will not affect the consolidation process. The
accounting entries passed in relation to inter- company interim dividends are;
However, care should be taken when dealing with dividends payable appearing as current liability in
the subsidiary books and as dividends receivable in the holding company books.
The amounts of dividend owing to the holding company are an inter-company balance which should
be eliminated in the preparation of group Financial Statement.
When dividends are paid from pre-acquisition profits, they should be considered as a return on
investment rather than income. Therefore, those dividends paid from pre- acquisition profits (pre-
om
acquisition dividends) should be used to reduce the amounts of original investment in the investee.
.c
ya
Thus pre- acquisition dividends are credited to the Cost of Control (COC) account as part of the
en
equity interest acquired by the subsidiary.
k
ea
The amounts of pre- acquisition dividends can be calculated based upon any of the following three
om
situations:
.s
w
w
w
i. The subsidiary company pays interim dividends as well as declares final dividends both
events taking place after the date of acquisition.
ii. The subsidiary company pays interim dividends and declares final dividends but interim
dividends paid before date of acquisition.
iii. The subsidiary company only declares a first and final dividend during the post – acquisition
period.
ILLUSTRATION 1
SITUATION 1
Investee Company pays interim dividends and declares final dividends during the post – acquisition
period.
H.Ltd acquired 75% shareholding in S.Ltd on 1 April 2011. The group year-end on 31 December
each year S.Ltd paid an interim dividend of Sh. 50,000 on 1 September 2011 and declares a final
dividend of Sh.90, 000 on 31 December 2011.
Required:
Show how H.Ltd will account for the dividends from S.Ltd
Shs
Debit: Dividend receivable 75% × 90,000 67,500
Debit: Cash at bank 75% × 50,000 37,500
105,000
Credit: Income statement 75% × (50,000 + 90,000) × 9/ 12 78,750
Credit: Cost of control(pre-acquisition
acquisition dividends) 26,250
105,000
Pre – acquisition dividends = Total dividends (received and receivable) – Dividend income (earned)
om
SITUATION 2
.c
ya
Subsidiary company pays interim dividends before date of acquisition and declares a final dividend
en
k
at the year end.
ea
om
Using illustration in situation
uation (i) and assuming that the interim dividends were paid on 31 March
.s
2011 and H. Ltd acquired the subsidiary S.Ltd on 30 June 2011.
w
w
w
Required:
Show how the parent could account for the dividends.
Shs Shs
Debit: Dividend receivable 75% × 90,000 67,500
Credit: Cost Of Control (bal) 52,500
Credit: Profit and Loss (75% × (90,000 + 50,000) × 6/12 15,000
SITUATION 3
Investee Company only declares a first and final dividend.
H.Ltd acquired 80% shareholding in S.Ltd on 1 Sep. 2011, the group year ends on 31 Dec each year.
S.Ltd declared a first and final dividend of Sh.120, 000
Required;
Shs Shs
Debit: Dividend receivable 80% × 120,000 × 4/ 96,000
Credit: Profit and Loss 12 64,000
Credit: COC account (bal) 80% × 120,000 32,000
om
.c
Being the amount of dividends receivable by H. Ltd from S. Ltd
ya
ken
ea
9. Bonus shares in subsidiary
om
When a subsidiary company issues bonus shares and the holding company receives its shares, then
.s
w
the holding company will not make any double entry in its books since the bonus shares were not
w
w
paid for by the holding company.
The only entry the holding company will make is to increase the number of shares held in its
subsidiary.
When consolidation workings are to be done it is necessary for the holding company to determine
which profits financed the bonus shares i.e. whether bonus shares
shares were financed from the acquisition
profits or post acquisition profit. The profits used to finance bonus shares have an effect in the
preparation of the cost of control account.
If a revaluation gain:
Debit: Revaluation reserve account
Credit: Cost of Control account (parent share)
Credit: NCI account (minority shares)
b. The subsidiary company may opt not to incorporate the revaluation adjustment in its books of
account.
If the fair value adjustment has not been incorporated in the subsidiary books then whenever
consolidated Financial Statements are to be prepared, two adjustments have to be carried out;
i. Fair value adjustments ( as in option a(i) above)
Debit: PPE account
Credit: Revaluation reserve account
And
Debit: Revaluation reserve account
om
Credit: COC account
.c
ya
Credit: NCI account
en
ii. Depreciation adjustments
k
ea
Whenever there is a fair value adjustment, a depreciation adjustment on revaluation must be
om
made as from the date of acquisition up to the date of consolidation.
.s
w
The depreciation adjustment affects the profits of the subsidiary and therefore those profits must be
w
w
adjusted for depreciation before the Non-controlling interest share. Thus, those profits must be
adjusted for depreciation before the Non-controlling interest share. Thus, with the depreciation
adjustment on revaluation, if upward revaluation;
Debit: Retained earnings (understatement in depreciation)
Credit: PPE account
If on downward revaluation:
Debit: PPE account
Credit: Retained earnings (excess depreciation).
Thus;
i. With the unrealized profit.
Debit: Profit and Loss (selling Co.)
Credit: PPE (purchasing Co.)
ii. With the unrealized loss
Debit: PPE (purchasing Co.)
Credit: Profit and Loss (Selling Co.)
b. Depreciation adjustment
When one group member sells PPE to another group member at a profit, the purchasing company
would end up overstating depreciation because of using over valued amount. Thus, the depreciation
adjustment should be made in the books of the purchasing company from the date of transaction.
To do adjustment one is required to first calculate whether the purchasing company has been
overcharged or undercharging depreciation,
om
.c
ya
N.B It is advisable to do the necessary adjustment before distributing retained profits of the
en
subsidiary into amounts to be passed to the cost of control, Non-Controlling Interest and profit and
k
ea
loss account.
om
.s
w
IFRS 3 requires the application of full method of accounting of goodwill on acquisition. This entails
w
w
recognition of goodwill on acquisition attributable for the holding company and also attributable to
the Non-controlling interest. Therefore, goodwill on acquisition includes the share of goodwill on
acquisition attributable for the holding company and also attributable to the Non-controlling interest.
Therefore goodwill on acquisition includes the share of goodwill on acquisition of Non-controlling.
This is opposed to partial method of accounting for goodwill on acquisition where goodwill on
acquisition only comprises of the group share of goodwill on acquisition as determined through the
cost of control account. Impairment losses are recognized as expenses in the period. When using full
method, the impairment loss arising should be allocated to the group and the Non-controlling
interest based on the percentage shareholding.
ILLUSTRATION:
H ltd acquired a controlling interest in S ltd several years ago. During the year ended 31st December
2011 H ltd sold an item of plant to S ltd as 1 April 2011 for Sh20000. H ltd made a profit of 25% on
cost S ltd depreciate similar plant at the rate of 25% p.a on cost.
property,plant&equipment balance as at 31st December were sh 1025 m and 870 respectively.
Required
Group Property, plant & equipment Account
Group Property,plant & equipment Account
Shs. Shs.
H Ltd 1025 Profit and loss (Profit as dep) 4
S Ltd 870 Bal c/d 1895.75
Profit and Loss 0.75
1895.75 1895.75
om
Dr. Profit & loss – 4m
.c
Cr. Proprty,plant & equipment – 4m
ya
ken
ea
Depreciation
om
Depreciation for the year 25% x 20x 9/12 =3.75
.s
Depreciation on cost = 25% x 16 x 4/12 = 3
w
w
Depreciation on profit (25% x 4 x 9/12) = 0.75
Dr. Property, plant& equipment = 0.75 w
Cr. Profit & Loss = 0.75
Intragroup balances: This refers to intragrouped indebtedness where group companies owes each
other.
Intragroup balances should be eliminated in full when consolidating
Any cash in transit should be adjusted before eliminating the intragroup balance.
H Limited acquired a controlling interest in S1 Limited and S2 Ltd several years ago. During the year
ended 31st December 2011, the debtors and creditors balances at the three companies were as
follows:
The following intragroup balances are included in the debtors and creditors balances of the three
companies.
Debtors of H Ltd include Sh 800 due from S Ltd
Debtors of S2 Ltd includes Sh 400 due from H Ltd
Debtors of S1 Ltd include Sh 600 due from S2 Ltd
As at 31st December 2011 S1 Ltd remitted sh 800 to H Ltd which was received by N. sh as at 3rd Jan
2012
Required
Group debtors and creditors balances
Group Debtors
Shs. Shs.
H LTD 4000 Cash in transit 200
S LTD 3600 Intragroup 1600
om
S2 LTD 2000 Bal c/d 7800
.c
9600 9,600
ya
en
Group Creditors
k
ea
Shs. Shs.
om
Intragroup 1600 H Ltd 2800
.s
w
Bal c/d 5200 S1 Ltd 2400
w
w
S2 Ltd 1600
6800 6800
When goods are sold by one company in the group to the other and remain unsold at the end of the
financial year, the amounts of unrealized profits on unsold at the end of the financial year the
amounts of unrealized profits on stock must be ascertained. If unrealized profit is on the closing
stock, the intercompany adjustment made is to add the amount to the group cost of sales.
If the unrealized profit is on the opening stock, the amount is deducted from group cost of sales on
the assumption that profits are realized on FIFO basis.
om
Less: Unrealized Profit on opening Stock (XX)
.c
ya
ken
ILLUSTRATION 2
ea
om
P Co acquired 75% of the ordinary shares of S Co on that company's incorporation in 2003. The
.s
summarised income statements and movement on retained earnings of the two companies for the
w
w
w
year ending 31 December 2006 are set out below.
P Co P Co
Sh Sh
Sales revenue 75,000 38,000
Cost of sales (30,000) (20,000)
Gross profit 45,000 18,000
Administrative expenses ( 14,000) (18,000)
Profit before tax 31,000 10,000
Income tax expense (10,000) (2,000)
Profit for the year 21,000 8,000
Note: Movement on retained earnings
Retained earnings brought/forward 87,000 17,000
Profit for the year 21,000 8,000
Retained earnings carried forward 108,000 25,000
Suppose that S Co had recorded sales of Sh. 5,000 to P Co during 2006. S Co had purchased these
goods from outside suppliers at a cost of Sh. 3,000. One half of the goods remained in P Co's
inventory at 31 December 200 6. Prepare the revised consolidated income statement.
Required;
Prepare the consolidated income statement and extract from the statement of changes in equity
showing retained earnings and non-controlling interest.
SOLUTION
The consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2006 would now be as follows.
Sh.
Sales revenue (75 + 38-5) 108,000
Cost of sales (30,000 + 20,000 – 5,000 + 1,000 ) (46,000)
Gross profit (45,000+ 18,000-1,000) 62,000
Administrative expenses (22,000)
Profit before taxation 40,000
Income tax expense (12,000)
Profit for the year 28,000
om
Retained earnings brought forward 99,750
.c
ya
Profit for the year 26,250
en
Retained earnings carried forward 126,000
k
ea
Unrealised Profit ½ ×( Sh. 5,000 – Sh. 3,000)
om
An adjustment will be made for the unrealised profit against the inventory figure in the consolidated
.s
w
statement of financial position.
w
ii. Non – controlling interest(NCI) w
The NCI in group income statement is recognized with its share of equity interest in the subsidiary
of the profit after tax reported by the subsidiary. However, the net profit after tax of the subsidiary
should be adjusted for the following before NCI share;
a. Unrealized Profit on opening Stock in case of upstream intercompany trading (add)
b. Unrealized Profit on Closing Stock in case of upstream intercompany trading (less)
c. Depreciation adjustment in case of fair value adjustment (less)
d. Unrealised profits incase of upstream transactions(less)
e. Unrealised losses incase of upstream transactions(add)
f. Under depreciation adjust incase of down stream intercompany purchase of PPE
g. Excess depreciation adjust incase of down stream intercompany purchase of PPE
Therefore:
iii. Inter – company dividends
It is only dividends paid or payables by the parent company which appear on the Consolidated
Income Statement.
Dividend paid or payable by the subsidiary are partly intercompany (i.e. to the parent and therefore
should be eliminated in full) and partly belong to the NCI (whom already have been recognized with
their share of the entire PAT of the subsidiary)
ILLUSTRATION 3
Agano Ltd. acquired 72% of the ordinary shares of Dando Ltd. on 1 July 2009 for Sh.250 million.
On 31 August 2009, the statements of financial position of the two companies were as follows:
om
Sh. ‘million’ Sh. ‘million’
.c
ya
Non-current assets:
en
Property, plant and equipment 223 270
k
ea
Investment in Dando Ltd. 250 __
om
473 270
.s
Current assets:
w
w
Inventory 50 62
w
Trade receivables 60 48
Cash and cash equivalents 19 14
129 124
Total assets 602 394
Current liabilities:
Trade payables 12 20
Total equity and liabilities 602 394
Additional Information
1. On 31 July 2009, Dando Ltd. sold an item of property, plant and equipment to Agano Ltd.
realising a profit on sale of Sh.20 million. Agano Ltd. was depreciating this item over its
remaining useful life of 4 years. It is the group's policy to charge a full year's depreciation in
the year of purchase and none in the year of disposal.
2. On 29 August 2009, Agano Ltd. sold goods to Dando Ltd. for Sh.26 million. Agano Ltd. sells
goods at a mark-up of 30%. Dando Ltd. had sold a quarter of these goods by 31 August 2009.
3. As at 31 August 2009, the trade receivables of Agano Ltd. included Sh.12 million due from
Dando Ltd. while the trade payables of Dando Ltd. included Sh.7 million due to Agano Ltd.
4. Goodwill was impaired by 25% as at 31 August 2009.
5. Agano Ltd. and Dando Ltd. had declared dividends of Sh.I5 million and Sh.10 million
respectively before 31 August 2009, but had not adjusted for them.
6. Goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interest was valued at Sh.9.4 million.
Required;
Consolidated statement of financial position/or Agano group as at 31 August 2009,
SOLUTION;
om
Agano Ltd
.c
ya
Statement of financial position as at 31 August 2009
en
Sh. ‘million’ Sh. ‘million’
k
ea
Non-current assets
om
.s
Property, plant and equipment 478
w
w
Goodwill (49.6+9.4-14.75) 44.25
w
522.25
Current assets
Inventory 107.5
Receivables 96
Cash in transit 5
Cash at bank 33 241.5
Total assets 763.75
Non-current liabilities
3% debentures 140
Current liabilities
Dividends Payable 17.8
Payables 25
Total payables and liabilities 763.75
Workings
Cost of control
Shs “millions” Shs “millions”
om
(194.4)
Pre-acquisition dividends 72%x270
.c
ya
72%x10x
en
(6)
k
ea
49.6
om
.s
w
Impairment Loss 25%x (49.6+9.4)m =14.75m
w
w
Group’s share 72%x14.75m =10.62m
N.C.I share 28%×14.75m =4.13m
Non-Controlling Interest
Impairment Loss Shs ‘m’ Ordinary shares (28% x 200) Shs ‘m’
Bal c/d (C.S.F.P) 4.13 Share premium (28% x 10) 56
73.59 Profit and loss Account 2.8
- (28%x34) 9.52
Goodwill 9.4
77.72 77.72
PPE Inventory Receivables Cash Payables
Agano 223 50 60 19 12
Dando 270 62 48 14 20
Adjustments
Plant (20) - - - -
Extra depn 5 - - - -
UPCI - (4.5) - - -
Intercompany debts - - (7) - -
Cash in Transit - - (5) - (7)
478 107.5 96 33 25
om
.c
Illustration
ya
Supposing you are given the following statement of financial position as at 31st December 2010
ken
ea
H Ltd S Ltd
om
Sh, “000” Sh, “000”
.s
w
Assets
w
w
Property,plant & equipment 14,000 8,000
Patents 5,000 2,000
19,000 10,000
Current Assets
Inventory 5,000 4,000
Bank 18,000 6,000
Acc. Receivables 4,000 4,000
27,000 14,000
46,000 24,000
Liabilities and Equity
Ordinary S. Capital Sh 100 15,000 10,000
Retained earnings 25,000 6,000
Acc. Payables 40,000 16,000
6,000 8,000
46,000 24,000
Additional Information
On 1st January 2011, the directors of H Ltd purchased 100% share-holding in S Ltd for Sh
17,000,000 by paying cash to the shareholders of S Ltd.
Required
Present the new statement of financial position of both companies immediately after the purchase of
shares.
Solution
Statement of Financial Position
H Ltd S Ltd
Sh, “000” Sh, “000”
Non- Current Assets 14,000 8,000
Property,plant & equipment 5,000 2,000
Patents 17,000 _____
Investments 36,000 10,000
Current Assets
Inventory 5,000 4,000
Bank 1,000 6,000
Acc. Receivables 4,000 4,000
om
10,000 14,000
.c
46,000 24,000
ya
Liabilities and Equity
ken
Ordinary S. Capital Sh 10@ 15,000 10,000
ea
Retained earnings 25,000 6,000
om
40,000 16,000
.s
w
Liabilities
w
w
A/c Payables 6,000 8,000
46,000 24,000
Observations
1. It can be seen clearly that the new statement of financial position of H Ltd has a new non-
current asset called investments in an amount of Sh 17,000,000. This represents the amount
that was used to purchase the shares in S Ltd. This is supported by a similar reduction in the
amount in the bank account.
2. It can also be seen clearly that there is no change in the new statement of financial position of
S Ltd. Even though, the shareholding has changed hands. This is because changes regarding
shareholding is not recorded in the accounts but in the shareholding register as required by
the separate entity principle.
Illustration
Workings
Cost of Control Account
Shs Shs
Investment in S Ltd 17,000 Ordinary S. Capital 10,000
_ Retained earnings 6,000
___ Goodwill 1,000
17,000 17,000
H Group
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 2/1/2011
om
.c
Sh, “000”
ya
en
Assets
k
ea
Non-Current Assets
om
Property, Plant and equipments 22,000
.s
w
Patents 7,000
w
w
Goodwill 1,000
Total Non-Current Assets 30,000
Current Assets
Inventory 9,000
Bank 7,000
Account receivable 8,000
Total current Assets 24,000
Total Assets 54,000
Illustration III
Suppose H Ltd purchased 100% shareholding of S Ltd on 31 September 2009 at Sh 17,000,000
when the retained earnings of S Ltd stood at sh 4,000,000. During the post aquisition period, H Ltd
made sales on credit to S Ltd and as at 31 December 2010, S Ltd owed H Ltd Sh 1,500,000 which is
included in the accounts payable of S Ltd and the same amount is included in the accounts
receivable of H Ltd.
Required
Consolidated statement of financial position of H and its subsidiary as at 31st December 2010
Accounts Receivable
Shs Shs
H Ltd b/d 4,000 Intragrouping 1,500
S Ltd b/d 4,000 C.S.F.P 6500
8,000 8,000
Accounts Payable
Shs Shs
Intragrouping 1,500 H Ltd b/d 6,000
C.S.F.P 12,500 S Ltd b/d 8,000
14,000 14,000
om
.c
H Group
ya
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 31st December 2010
k en
ea
Sh, “000”
om
Assets
.s
Non-Current Assets
w
w
Property,plant & equipment 22,000
w
Patents 7,000
Goodwill 3,000
32,000
Current Assets
Inventory 9,000
Bank 7,000
Account receivable 6,500
22500
54,000
Liabilities and Equity
Ordinary share capital 15,000
Retained earnings 27,000
42,000
Liabilities
Accounts payable 12,500
54,500
IAS 28 applies to all investments in which an investor has significant influence but not control or
joint control except for investments held by a venture capital organization, mutual fund, unit trust,
and similar entity that (by election or requirement) are accounted for as held for trading under IAS
39. Under IAS 39, those investments are measured at fair value with fair value changes recognized
in profit or loss.
Associate: An enterprise in which an investor has significant influence but not control or joint
control.
Significant influence: Power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions but not
control them.
Equity method: A method of accounting by which an equity investment is initially recorded at cost
and subsequently adjusted to reflect the investor's share of the net profit or loss of the associate
(investee).
Investments in associates
om
This type of investment is something less than a subsidiary, but more than a simple investment. The
.c
ya
key criterion here is significant influence. This is defined as the 'power to participate', but not 'to
en
control' (which would make the investment a subsidiary).
k
ea
Significant influence can be determined by the holding of voting rights (usually attached to shares)
om
in the entity. IAS 28 states that if an investor holds 20% or more of the voting power of the investee,
.s
w
it can be presumed that the investor has significant influence over the investee, unless it can be
w
w
clearly shown that this is not the case.
Significant influence can be presumed not to exist if the investor holds less than 20% of the voting
power of the investee, unless it can be demonstrated otherwise.
The existence of significant influence is evidenced in one or more of the following ways.
a) Representation on the board of directors (or equivalent) of the investee
b) Participation in the policy making process
c) Material transactions between investor and investee
d) Interchange of management personnel'
e) Provision of essential technical information
Thus, an interest of holding of 20% or more but less than 50% of the voting rights is presumed to
create an associate.
om
d) the ultimate or any intermediate parent of the investor produces consolidated financial
.c
ya
statements available for public use that comply with International Financial Reporting
en
Standards.
k
ea
om
'Upstream' and 'downstream' transactions
.s
w
Upstream transactions are, for example, sales of assets from an associate to the investor.
w
w
'Downstream' transactions are, for example, sales of assets from the investor to an associate.
Profits and losses resulting from 'upstream' and 'downstream' transactions between an investor
(including its consolidated subsidiaries) and an associate are eliminated to the extent of the investor's
interest in the associate. This is very similar to the procedure for eliminating intra-group transactions
between a parent and a subsidiary. The important thing to remember is that only the group's share is
eliminated.
The double entry is as follows, where A% is the parent's holding in the associate, and PUP is the
provision for unrealised profit.
For downstream transactions, (parent/subsidiary sells to associate) where the associate holds the
inventory.
ILLUSTRATION 10
Downstream Transaction
A Co, a parent with subsidiaries, holds 25% of the equity shares in B Co. During the year, A Co
makes sales of Sh 1,000,000 to B Co at cost plus a 25% mark-up. At the year-end, B Co has all these
goods still in inventories.
om
Solution
.c
ya
A Co has made an unrealised profit of Sh 200,000 (1,000,000 × 25/125) on its sales to the associate.
en
The group's share of this is 25%, ie Sh 50,000. This must be eliminated.
k
ea
The double entry is:
om
.s
w
DEBIT A: Retained earnings Sh 50,000
w
w
CREDIT Investment in associate (B) Sh 50,000
Because the sale was made to the associate, the group's share of the unsold inventories forms part of
the investment in associate at the year end. If the sale had been from the associate B to A, i.e. an
upstream transaction, the double entry would have been.
If preparing the consolidated income statement, you would deduct the $50,000 from the group share
of the associate's profit.
Associate's losses
When the equity method is being used and the investor's share of losses of the associate equals or
exceeds its interest in the associate, the investor should discontinue including its share of further
losses. The investment is reported at nil value. The interest in the associate is normally the carrying
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 293
FINANCIAL REPORTING
amount of the investment in the associate, but it also includes any other long-term interests, for
example, preference shares or long term receivables or loans.
After the investor's interest is reduced to nil, additional losses should only be recognised where the
investor has incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the associate (for example, if it has
guaranteed amounts owed to third parties by the associate).
Impairment losses
IAS 39 sets out a list of indications that a financial asset (including an associate) may have become
impaired.
Any impairment loss is recognised in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of assets for each
associate individually. An impairment loss is not allocated to any asset, including goodwill, that
forms part of the carrying amount of the investment in associate. Accordingly any reversal of that
impairment loss is recognised in accordance with IAS 36 to the extent that the recoverable amount
of the investment subsequently increases.
om
the associated company.
.c
ya
This means that the group accounts must include the 'gross' share of net assets, pre-tax profits and
en
tax, in accounting for the non-controlling interest separately! For example, we will suppose that P
k
ea
Co owns 60% of S Co which owns 25% of A Co, an associate of P Co. The relevant amounts for
om
inclusion in the consolidated financial statements would be as follows.
.s
w
w
w
1. Consolidated income statement
The results and the operations of the associate are not included in the group consolidated income
statement. It is only group share of the associate profit before taxation and group share of associate
tax that are accounted for.
Since an associate is not a group members the inter-company sales/purchases are supposed to be
eliminated to the extent that they relate to the group (UPCS and UPOS are eliminated to the extent
that they relate to the group).
The following is a suggested layout (for an income statement for a company having subsidiaries as
well as associates.
om
The equity method can be applied as follows:
.c
ya
en
Alternative 1
k
ea
Group share of associate net identifiable assets (year-end) XX
om
Add premium on a acquisition of associate XX
.s
w
Less: premium impairment loss XX
w
w
Net investment in associate (CSFP) XX
Alternative 2 XX
Cost of investment in associate XX
Group share of associate post-acquisition reserves (P and L XX
revaluation) XX
Less: premium impairment loss (XX)
Net investment in associate XX
ILLUSTRATION 11
Show how P Co’s investment in A Co would appear in the consolidated statement of financial
position at 31 December 2006.
SOLUTION
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as At 31 December 2006(Extract)
Sh ‘000’
Non-Current assets
Investment in associate 75,000
Cost
Group share of post-acquisition retained earnings 5,400
(30%×Sh 18,000)
80,400
om
.c
ya
Date of associate’s financial statements:
en
In applying the equity method, the investor should use the financial statements of the associate as of
k
ea
the same date as the financial statements of the investor unless it is impracticable to do so.
om
.s
w
w
If it is impracticable, the most recent available financial statements of the associate should be used,
w
with adjustments made for the effects of any significant transactions or events occurring between the
accounting period ends. However, the difference between the reporting date of the associate and that
of the investor cannot be longer than three months
ILLUSTRATION 12
Set out below are the draft accounts of Parent Co and its subsidiaries and of Associate Co. Parent Co
acquired 40% of the equity capital of Associate Co three years ago when the latter’s retained
earnings stood at Sh 40,000.
om
Summarised Statement of Financial Position
.c
ya
Parent Co & Subsidiaries Associate Co
en
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
k
ea
om
Property, plant and equipment 220 170
.s
w
Investment in Associate at cost 60 -
w
w
Loan to Associate Co. 20 -
Current assets 100 50
Share capita (Sh 1 Shares) 400 220
Retained earnings 250 100
Loan from Parent Co. 150 100
- 20
400 50
Net profit 95 80
Taxation 35 30
60 220
You are required to prepare the summarized consolidated accounts of Parent Co.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 297
FINANCIAL REPORTING
NB;
1) Assume that the associate's assets/liabilities are stated at fair value.
2) Assume that there are no non-controlling interests in the subsidiary companies.
SOLUTION
Parent co
Consolidated income statement
Sh ‘000’
Net profit 95
Share of profits of associate (50 ×40%) 20
Profit before tax 115
Income tax expense 35
Profit attributable to the owners of Parent Co 80
Parent co
Consolidated statement of financial position
Sh ‘000’
Assets 220
om
Property, plant and equipment 104
.c
ya
Interest in associate (see note) 100
ken
Current assets 424
ea
om
Total assets 250
.s
Equity and liabilities 174
w
w
Share capital 424
w
Retained earnings (W)
Total equity and liabilities
Note
Sh ‘000’
Interest in associate 60
Cost 24
Share of post-acquisition retained earnings 40% × (100 - 34
40) 20
Loan to associate 104
Introduction
It has been argued that 'profit' does not always give a useful or meaningful picture of a company’s
operations. Readers of a company’s financial statements might even be misled by a reported profit
figure
a) Shareholders might believe that if a company makes a profit after tax, of say, shs.100,000
om
.c
then this is the amount which it could afford to pay as a dividend. Unless the company has
ya
sufficient cash available 10 stay in business and also to pay a dividend, the shareholders'
ken
expectations would be wrong.
ea
om
b) Employees might believe that if a company makes profits, it can afford to pay higher wages
.s
next year, This opinion may not be correct the ability 10 pay wages depends on the
w
w
w
availability of cash.
c) Survival of a business entity depends not so much on profits as on its ability to pay its debts
when they fall due. Such payments might include 'revenue' items such as material purchases,
wages, interest and taxation etc., but also capital payments for new non-current assets and the
repayment of loan capital when this falls due (for example on the redemption of debentures).
From these examples, it may be apparent that a company's performance and prospects depend not so
much on the profits earned in a period, but more realistically on liquidity or cash flows
Objective of IAS 7
The aim of IAS 7 is to provide information to users of financial statements about the entity s ability
to generate cash and cash equivalents, as well as indicating the cash needs of the entity. The
statement of cash flows provides historical information about cash and cash equivalents, classifying
cash flows between operating, investing and financing activities
Scope
A statement of cash flows should be presented as an Integral part of an entity’s financial statements.
All types of entity can provide useful information about cash flows as the need for cash is universal,
whatever the nature of the revenue-producing activities. Therefore all entities are required by the
standard to produce a statement of cash flows.
om
events.
.c
ya
Cash flow information of a historical nature can be used as an indicator of the amount, timing and
en
certainty of future cash flows. Past forecast cash flow information can be checked for accuracy as
k
ea
actual figures emerge, the relationship between profit and cash flows can be analyzed as can changes
om
in prices over time
.s
w
w
Key Terms w
The standard gives the following definitions the most important of which are cash and cash
equivalents.
om
Investing activities and
.c
ya
Financing activities
en
The manner of presentation of cash flows between operating, investing and financing activities
k
ea
depends on the nature of the entity. By classifying cash flows between different activities in this way
om
users can see the impact on cash and cash equivalents of each one, and their relationships with each
.s
w
other. We can look at each in more detail.
w
Operating activities w
This is perhaps the key part of the statement of cash flows because it shows whether, and to what
extent, companies can generate cash from their operations. It is these operating cash flows which
must, in the end pay for all cash outflows relating to other activities, i.e. paying loan interest,
dividends and so on.
Most of the components of cash flows from operating activities will be those items which determine
the net profit or loss of the entity, i.e. they relate to the main revenue-producing activities of the
entity. The standard gives the following as examples of cash flows from operating activities.
(a) Cash receipts from the sale of goods and the rendering of services
(b) Cash receipts from royalties, fees, commissions and other revenue
(c) Cash payments to suppliers for goods and services
(d) Cash payments to and on behalf of employees.
Certain items may be included in the net profit or loss for the period which do not relate to
operational cash flows, for example the profit or loss on the sale of a piece of plant will be included
in net profit or loss, but the cash flows will be classed as investing.
www.someakenya.co.ke Contact: 0707 737 890 Page 301
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Investing activities
The cash flows classified under this heading show the extent of new investment in assets which will
generate future profit and cash flows. The standard gives the following examples of cash flows
arising from investing activities.
a) Cash payments to acquire property, plant and equipment, intangibles and other non-current
assets, including those relating to capitalized development costs and sell-constructed
property, plant and equipment
b) Cash receipts from sales of property, plant and equipment, intangibles and other non-current
assets
c) Cash payments to acquire shares or debentures of other entities
d) Cash receipts from sales of shares or debentures of other entities
e) Cash advances and loans made to other parties
f) Cash receipts from the repayment of advances and loans made to other parties
Financing activities
This sections of the statement of cash flows shows the share of cash which the entity's capital
providers have claimed during the period. Tl1is is an indicator of likely future interest and dividend
payments. The standard gives the following examples of cash flows which rnigl1t arise under this
om
heading.
.c
ya
a) Cash proceeds from issuing shares
en
b) Cash payments to owners to acquire or redeem the entity’s shares
k
ea
c) Cash proceeds from issuing debentures, loans notes, bonds, mortgages and other short or
om
long- term borrowings.
.s
w
d) Principal repayments of amounts borrowed under finance leases
w
w
Item (d) needs more explanation. Where the reporting entity uses an asset held under a finance lease,
the amounts to go in statement of cash flows as financing activities are repayments of the principal
(capital) rather than the interest. The interest paid will be shown under operating activities.
ILLUSTRATION 1
The notes lo the financial statements of Ashley Co show the following in topped of obligations
under finance leases.
Additions to tangible non-current assets acquired under finance leases were shown in the non-
current asset note at Sh 56,000.
Required
Calculate the capital repayment to be shown in the statement of cash flows of Hayley Co for the year
to 30 June 2005.
SOLUTION
Obligations under Finance Leases
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Capital repayment (bal fig) 14 Bal 1.7 .04 66
Bal 30.6. 05 108 Additions 56
122 122
om
b) Indirect method; net profit or loss is adjusted for the effects of transactions of a non-cash
.c
nature, any deferrals of accruals of past or future operating cash receipts or payments, and
ya
en
items of income or expense associated with Investing or financing cash flows
k
ea
The direct method is the preferred method because discloses information not available elsewhere the
om
financial statements, which could be of use in estimating future cash flows. The example below
.s
w
shows both methods.
w
Using the direct method w
There are different ways in which the information about gross cash receipts and payments can be
obtained. The most obvious way is simply to extract the information from the accounting records.
This may be a laborious task, however, and the indirect method below may be easier. The example
and Question above used the direct method
It is important to understand why certain items are added and others subtracted. Note the following
points;-
a) Depreciation is not a cash expense, but is deducted in arriving at profit. It makes sense,
therefore, to eliminate it by adding it back.
b) By the same logic, a loss on a disposal of a non-current asset (arising through under provision
of depreciation) needs to be added back and a profit deducted.
om
c) An increase in inventories means less cash you have spent cash on buying inventory.
.c
ya
d) An increase in receivables means the company's debtors have not paid as much and therefore
en
there is less cash.
k
ea
e) If we payoff payables, causing the figure to decrease, again we have less cash.
om
.s
w
Interest and dividends
w
w
Cash flows from interest and dividends received and paid should each be disclosed separately. Each
should be classified in a consistent manner from period to period as either operating, investing or
financing activities.
Dividends paid by the entity can be classified in one of two ways;
a) As a financing cash flow, showing the cost of obtaining financial resources.
b) As a component of cash flows from operating activities so that users can assess the entity's
ability to pay dividends out of operating cash flows.
Taxes on income
Cash flows arising from taxes on income should be separately disclosed and should be classified as
cash flows from operating activities unless they can be specifically identified with financing and
investing activities.
Taxation cash flows are often difficult to match to the originating underlying transaction. So most of
the time all tax cash flows are classified as arising from operating activities.
Other disclosures
All entities should disclose, together with a commentary by management, any other information
likely to be of importance for example:
a) Restrictions on the use of or access to any part of cash equivalents
b) The amount of undrawn borrowing facilities which are available
c) Cash flows which increased operating capacity compared to cash flows which merely
maintained operating capacity.
d) Cash flows arising from each reported industry and geographical segment
om
NOTE;
.c
ya
You need to be aware of the format of the statement as laid out in IAS 7; setting out the format is an
en
essential first stage in preparing the statement, so this format must be learnt.
k
ea
om
Introduction
.s
w
In essence, preparing statement of cash flows is very straightforward. You should therefore simply
w
w
learn the format and apply the steps noted in the example below. Note that the following items are
treated in a way that might seem confusing, but the treatment is logical if you think in terms of cash.
a) Increase In inventory is treated as negative (in brackets). This is because it represents a cash
outflow; cash is being spent on inventory.
b) An Increase in receivables would be treated as negative for the same reasons; more
receivables mean less cash.
c) By contrast an increase in payables is positive because cash is being retained and not used to
settle accounts payable. There is therefore more of it.
ILLUSTRATION 2
Kane Co’s income statement for the year ended 31 December 2002 and statements of financial
position at 31 December 2001 and 31 December 2002 were as follows:
Kane co
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 2002
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Sales 720
Raw materials consumed 70
Staff costs 94
Depreciation 118
Loss on disposal of non-current assets 18
300
Operating profit 420
Interest payable 28
Profit before tax 392
Taxation 124
Profit for the year 268
om
1,278 1,336
.c
Current assets
ya
Inventory 24 20
ken
Trade receivables 76 58
ea
om
Bank 48 56
.s
Total assets 148 134
w
w
1,426 1,470
w
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Share capital 360 340
Share premium 36 24
Retained earnings 716 514
1,112 878
Non-current liabilities
Long-term loans 200 500
Current liabilities 12 6
Trade payables. 102 86
Taxation 114 592
Total equity and liabilities 1,426 1,470
Required;
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Kane Co for the year ended 31 December 2002 in accordance
with the requirements of IAS 7, using the indirect method.
SOLUTION
Step 1:
Set out the proforma statement of cash flows with the headings required by IAS 7. You should
leave plan y of space. Ideally, use three; or more sheets of paper, one for the main statement one for
the notes and one for your workings. It is obviously essential to know formats very well.
Step 2:
Begin with the cash flows from operating activities as far as possible. When preparing the
statement from statements of financial position, you will usually have to calculate such items as
depreciation, loss on sale of non -current assets, profit for the year and tax paid (see Step 4). Note
that you may not be given the tax charge m the income statement. You will then have to assume that
the tax paid in the year is last year’s year-end provision and calculate the charge as the balancing
figure.
Step 3:
om
Calculate the cash flow figures for purchase or sale of non-current assets, issue of shares and
.c
ya
repayment of loans it these are not already given for you (as they may be).
ken
ea
Step 4:
om
If you are not given the profit figure, open up a working for profit or loss. Using the opening and
.s
w
closing balances of retained earnings, the taxation charge and dividends paid and proposed, you will
w
w
be able to calculate profit for the yea; as the balancing figure to put in the cash flows from operating
activities section.
Step 5:
You will now be able to complete the statement by slotting in 'lie figures given or calculated.
Kane co
Statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 2002
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax 392
Depreciation charges 118
Loss on sales of tangible non-current assets 18
Interest expense 28
Increase in inventories (4)
Increase in receivables (18)
Increase in payables 6
Cash generated from operations 540
Interest paid (28)
Dividends paid (66)
Tax paid (86 + 124 – 102) (108)
Net cash from operating activities 338
Cash flows from investing activities
Payments to acquire tangible non-current assets (90)
Receipts from sales of tangible non- current assets (W) 12
Net cash used in investing activities
Cash flows from financing activities
om
Issues of share capital (360 + 36 – 340 – 24) 32
Long-term loans repaid (500 – 200) (300)
.c
ya
Net cash used in financing activities (268)
en
Decrease in cash and cash equivalents (8)
k
ea
Cash and cash equivalents at1.1. x 2 56
om
Cash and cash equivalents at 31.12 x 2 48
.s
w
w
w
Workings: non-current asset disposals
Cost
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
At1.1. 02 1,560 At 31.12.02 1,596
Purchases 90 Disposals (balance) 54
1,650 1,650
Accumulated Depreciation
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
At 31.12.02 318 At 1.1.02 224
Depreciation on disposals 24 Charge for year 118
(balance) ___
342 342
NBV of disposals 30
Net loss reported (18)
Proceeds of disposals 12
Note; there are a number of issues you might deal with In the statement of cash flows in an exam.
Examples are
Share capital issues. The proceeds will be split between share capital and share premium
Bonus Issues. These do not involve cash.
Revaluation of non-current assets. This must be taken into account in calculation
acquisiuons and disposals.
Movement on deferred tax . This must be taken into account in calculating tax paid
Finance leases. Assets acquired under finance leases must be adjusted for in non-current
asset calculations and the amount paid under the finance lease must appear as a cash flow.
Consolidated statements of cash flows follow the same principles as for single company statements,
with some additional complications.
Cash flows that are internal to the group should be eliminated in the preparation of a consolidated
statement of cash flows. Where a subsidiary undertaking joins or leaves a group during a financial
year the cash flows of the group should include the cash flows of the subsidiary undertaking
concerned for the same period as that for which the group's income statement includes the results of
the subsidiary undertaking.
om
Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries and other business units
.c
ya
An entity should present separately the aggregate cash flows arising from acquisitions and from
en
disposals of subsidiaries or other business units and classify them as investing activities.
k
ea
om
Disclosure is required of the following, in aggregate, in respect of both acquisitions and disposals of
.s
w
subsidiaries or other business units during the period.
w
w
Total purchase/disposal consideration
Portion of purchase/disposal consideration discharged by means of cash/cash equivalents
Amount of cash/cash equivalents in the subsidiary or business unit disposed off
Amount of assets and liabilities other than cash/cash equivalents in the subsidiary or business
unit acquired or disposed of, summarized by major category
The amounts shown in the statements of cash flows for purchase or disposal of subsidiaries or
business units will be the amounts paid or received net of cash/cash equivalents acquired or disposed
of.
ILLUSTRATION 3
NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
The following are extracts of the consolidated results for Jamvi Co for the year ended 31 December
2008.
om
.c
ya
SOLUTION
en
Calculate the dividends paid to the non-controlling interest during the year
k
ea
om
Non-Controlling Interest
.s
w
w
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
w
Dividend paid 9 Balance b/d 300
Balance c/d 306 Profit for period (I/S) 15
315 315
Where an interest in a jointly controlled entity (see IAS 31) is accounted for using proportionate
consolidation the reporting entity's proportionate share of the jointly controlled entity's cash flows
in the consolidated statement of cash flows
When the equity method is used, only the actual cash flows from sales or purchases between the
group and the associate/joint venture, and investments in and dividends from the entity should be
included. Dividends should be included in operating cash flows, where they are shown within
operating profit in the statement of comprehensive income.
ILLUSTRATION 4
ASSOCIATE
The following are extracts of the consolidated results of Pripon Co for the year ended 31 December
2008.
om
Calculate the dividend received from the associate
.c
ya
en
Solution
k
ea
Associate
om
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
.s
w
Balance b/fwd 264 Dividend from associate 18
w
w
Profit after tax(60-30) 30 Balance c/fwd 276
294 294
ILLUSTRATION 5
Topiary Co is a 40 year old company producing garden statues carved from marble. Twenty two
years ago it acquired a 100% interest in a marble importing company, Hardstuff Co. In 20x 9 it
acquired a 40% interest in a competitor Landscapes Co and on 1 January 20 x 7 it acquired a 75%
interest in Garden Furniture Designs. The draft consolidated accounts for the Topiary Group are as
follows.
Draft Consolidated Income Statement for the Year Ended 31 December 2007
Sh ‘000’
Operating profit 4,455
Share of profit after tax of associate 1,050
Income from long-term investment 600
Interest payable (450)
Profit before taxation 5,655
Tax on profit
Income tax 1,173
Deferred taxation 312
Tax attributable to investment income 135
(1,620)
Profit for the year 4,035
Non-controlling interest
Attribute to: Owners of the parent 3,735
Non-controlling interest 300
4,035
om
Assets
.c
Non-current assets
ya
Tangible assets
ken
Buildings at net book value 6,600
ea
Machinery: cost 4,200 9,000
om
aggregate depreciation (3,300) (3,600)
.s
w
net book value 900 5,400
w
w
7,500 11,625
Goodwill 300
Investments in associates 3,000 3,300
Long-term investments 1,230 1,230
11,730 16,455
Current assets
Inventories 3,000 5,925
Receivables 3,825 5,550
Cash 5,460 13,545
12,285 25,020
Equity and liabilities 24,015 41,475
Equity
Share capital: 25c shares 6,000 11,820
Share premium account 6,285 8,649
Retained earnings 7,500 10,335
Total equity 19,785 30,804
Non-controlling interest - 345
19,785 31,149
Non-current liabilities
Obligations under finance leases 510 2,130
Loans 1,500 4,380
Current liabilities
Trade payables 840 1,500
Obligations under finance leases 600 720
income tax 651 1,386
Accrued interest and finance charges 90 2,181 120 3,726
24,015 41,475
Note
1. There had been no acquisitions or disposals of buildings during the year. Machinery costing
Sh 1.5m was sold for Sh 1.5m resulting in a profit of. Sh 300,000. New machinery was
acquired in 2007 including additions of Sh 2.55m acquired under finance leases.
2. Information relating to the acquisition of Garden Furniture Designs
Sh ‘000’
Machinery 495
Inventories 96
Trade receivables 24
Cash 336
Trade payables 204)
Income tax (51)
756
om
Non-controlling interest (189)
.c
ya
567
en
Goodwill 300
k
ea
867
om
2,640,000 shares issued as part consideration 825
.s
Balance of consideration paid in cash 42
w
867
w
w
3. Loans were issued at a discount in 2007 and the carrying amount of the loans at 31 December
2007 included Shs. 120,000 representing the finance cost attributable to the discount and
allocated in respect of the current reporting period.
Required
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for the Topiary Group for the year ended 31
December 2007 as required by IAS 7, using the indirect method. There is no need to provide notes
to the statement of cash lows.
SOLUTION
Topiary Group Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows For the Year Ended 31 December 2007
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Cash flows from operating activities
Net profit before tax 5,655
Adjustments for:
Depreciation (W1) 975
Profit on sale of plant (300)
Share of associate's profits (1,050)
Investment income (600)
Interest payable 450
Operating profit before working capital changes 5,130
Increase in trade and other receivables (5,550 - 3,825 - 84) (1,641)
Increase in inventories (5,925 - 3,000 - 96) (2,829)
Increase in trade payables (1,500 - 840 - 204) 456
Cash generated from operations Interest paid (W2) 1,116
Income taxes paid (W3) (300)
(750)
Net cash from operating activities 66
om
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W5) (3,255)
.c
ya
Proceeds from sale of plant 1,500
en
Dividends from investment (600 - 135) 465
k
ea
Dividends from associate (W6) 750
om
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest (W7) (144)
.s
Net cash used in investing activities (390)
w
w
w
Cash flows from financing activities
Issue of ordinary share capital (W8) 7,359
Issue of loan notes (W9) 2,760
Capital payments under finance leases (W10) (810)
Dividends paid (3,735 + 7,500 -10,335) (900 )
Net cash flows from financing activities 8,409
Workings
1 Depreciation charges
Plant and Equipment
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Balance brought forward 3,300 Depreciation on disposal 300
Charge for year 600 Balance c/d 3,600
3,900 3,900
Freehold buildings (Sh 6,600,000 – Sh 6,225,000) = Sh 375,000
2. Interest
Interest Payable
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Discount 120 Accrued interest b/d 90
Interest paid 300 Expenses 450
Accrued interest c/d 120 540
540
3. Taxation
Income Tax Payable
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Cash outflow 750 b/d – current tax 651
c/d – Current tax 1,386 - deferred tax 39
- deferred tax 90 Income statement transfer 1,485
(1,173 + 312)
On acquisition 51
2,226 2,226
om
4. Purchase of subsidiary
.c
ya
Sh '000’
en
Cash received on acquisition 336
k
ea
Less cash consideration (42)
om
.s
Cash inflow 294
w
w
5. Purchase of property, plant and equipment, machinery
w
Machinery
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Balance B/d 4,200 Disposal 1,500
On acquisition 495 Bal c/d 9,000
Leased 2,550
Cash outflow 3,255
10,500 10,500
6. Dividends from associate
Investment in Associate
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Balance B/d 3,000 Dividends received 750
Share of profit after tax 1,050 Balance C/d 3300
4,050 4050
7. Non-controlling interest
Non-Controlling Interest
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Dividend paid 144 Balance b/fwd Nil
Balance c/fwd 345 Profit for year 300
___ On acquisition 189
489 489
om
Loan Notes
.c
ya
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
en
Balance b/fwd 1,500 Balance c/fwd 4,380
k
ea
Finance cost 120
om
Cash inflow 2,760
.s
w
4,380 4,380
w
10. Capital payments under finance leases w
Financial Leases
Sh '000’ Sh '000’
Cash outflow 810 Bal /fwd:
Carried forward: Current 600
Current 720 Long-term 510
Long-term 2,130 New lease commitment 2,550
3,660 3,660
Joint venture is form of business combination where the acquirer obtains joint control of the
acquiree. In this case the acquirer together with another entity (co-venturer) obtains the joint control
of the net assets and operations of the acquiree. Therefore the acquirer obtains 50% shareholding in
the acquiree.
Key Terms
Venturer; A party to a joint venture and has joint control over that joint venture.
Investor in a joint venture: A party to a joint venture and does not have joint control over that
joint venture.
Control: Refers to the power to govern the financial and operating policies of an activity so as to
obtain benefits from it
Under IAS 31 the types of joint ventures are;-
om
Jointly controlled assets involve the joint control, and often the joint ownership, of assets dedicated
.c
ya
to the joint venture. Each venturer may take a share of the output from the assets and each bears a
en
share of the expenses incurred. IAS 31 requires that the venturer should recognise in its financial
k
ea
statements its share of the joint assets, any liabilities that it has incurred directly and its share of any
om
liabilities incurred jointly with the other venturers, income from the sale or use of its share of the
.s
w
output of the joint venture, its share of expenses incurred by the joint venture and expenses incurred
w
w
directly in respect of its interest in the joint venture.
(iii) Jointly Controlled Entities
A jointly controlled entity is a corporation, partnership, or other entity in which two or more
venturers have an interest, under a contractual arrangement that establishes joint control over the
entity. Each venturer usually contributes cash or other resources to the jointly controlled entity.
Those contributions are included in the accounting records of the venturer and recognised in the
venturer’s financial statements as an investment in the jointly controlled entity.
ILLUSTRATION
Set out below are the draft accounts of Parent Co and its subsidiaries and of Joint Venture Co. Parent
Co acquired 50% of the equity capital of Joint Venture Co three years ago when the latter's retained
earnings stood at Sh 40,000.
Summarised Statement of Financial Position
Parent Co &Subsidiaries Joint Venture Co
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Tangible non-current assets 220 170
Investment in joint venture 75 -
Current assets 100 50
Loan to Joint Venture 20 -
415 220
Share capital (Sh1 shares) 250 100
Retained earnings 165 100
Loan from Parent Co - 20
415 220
om
Summarised Income Statements
.c
Parent Co & Joint Venture
ya
Subsidiaries Co
ken
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
ea
Profit before tax 95 170
om
income tax expense 35 30
.s
w
Profit for the year 60 50
w
w
Dividends paid in the year 50 10
Parent Co has taken credit for the dividend paid by Joint Venture Co.
You are required to prepare the summarised consolidated statement of financial position of Parent
Co, under both the formats of proportionate consolidation recommended by IAS 31.
Note: The loan is the proportion of the Sh 20,000 lent to the other venture.
Workings
1. Goodwill
Sh ‘000’
Consideration transferred 75
Share of net assets acquired (50% x 140) 70
Premium on acquisition 5
2. Retained earnings
Parent Co & Subsidiaries Joint Venture Co
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Per question 165 100
Pre-acquisition (40)
Post-acquisition 60
Group share in joint venture
(Sh 60 x 50%) 30
Group retained earnings 195
om
venture are shown as separate line items in preparation of group financial statements
.c
ya
ken
ILLUSTRATION
ea
om
Considering the question above the presentation for separate line method will be as follows
.s
w
w
Solution: Separate line method
w
Parent co
Consolidated statement of financial position
Sh ‘000’ Sh ‘000’
Goodwill (as above) 5
Tangible non-current assets
Group 220
Joint venture (170×50%) 85 305
Current assets
Group 100
Joint venture (50%×50) 25 125
Loan to joint venture 10
445
250
Share capital 195
Retained earnings (as above) 445
In both these cases the consolidated income statements would be shown in the same way.
The use of the proportionate consolidation method should be discontinued from the date the venture
ceases to have joint control over the entity.
om
.c
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
w
w
w
REVISION EXERCISE
QUESTION 1
Given below are the comparative balance sheets of Tausi Ltd., a trading company, for the years
ended 31 October 2000 and 2001:
2001 2000
Assets Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’ Sh.’000’
Non-current assets:
Goodwill 23,500 32,650
Premises 200,000 80,000
Plant and machinery 290,100 278,200
Office equipment 126,250 639,850 87,360 478,210
Current assets:
Stock 88,890 67,815
Debtors 57,890 52,015
Bank 9,210 155,990 - 119,830
795,840 598,040
Capital and Liabilities
Capital: 425,000 250,000
Ordinary shares 75,000 160,000
10% redeemable preference shares 33,000 -
om
Share capital 30,000 -
.c
ya
Capital redemption reserve 38,000 12,000
en
General reserve 22,300 11,200
k
ea
Profit and loss account 623,300 433,200
om
.s
Non-current liability
w
w
Bank loan 63,000 50,000
w
Current liabilities
Creditors 49,820 40,290
Current tax 30,500 28,500
Proposed ordinary dividends 26,000 18,000
Accruals 3,200 5,420
Bank overdraft - 109,540 22,630 114,840
795,840 598,040
3. Part of plant and machinery which had cost Sh.60,000,000 on acquisition and on which
Sh.42,000,000 accumulated depreciation had been provided was sold for Sh.25,000,000 during
the year.
4. Included in the depreciation charge for the year is Sh.15,100,000 in respect of plant and
machinery.
5. New office equipment was purchased in the year for Sh.55,000,000. There was no disposal of
office equipment during the year.
6. It is the company’s policy not to depreciate premises. The change in the premises account balance
was due to a revaluation of the asset.
7. The revaluation reserve arising in (6) above was all to finance the issue of fully paid-up bonus
shares of Sh.10 each to ordinary shareholders.
8. A new bank loan of Sh.25,000,000 was received in the year. Bank interest of Sh.8,000,000 was
also paid in the year.
9. Current tax liability is in respect of the tax charge for the respective year.
10. During the year ended 31 October 2001 an interim dividend of Sh.14,000,000 was paid.
Required:
Cash flow statement in accordance with IAS 7.
om
Solution:
.c
ya
Tausi Limited
en
Cash Flow Statement
k
ea
“Shs 000” “Shs 000”
om
Net profit before 145,100
.s
Adjusted for – depreciation – equipments 16,110
w
Plant & machinery 15,100
w
w
Gain on disposal (7,000)
Goodwill amortized 9,150
Interest 8,000
Cash flow from operation before working capital 186,460
changes (21,075)
Increase in stock (2,200)
Decrease in accruals (5,875)
Increase in debtors 9,530
Increased in debtors 166,840
Less tax paid (28,500)
Net cash flow from operating activities 138,340
Cash Flow From Investing Activities
Purchase of equipment (55,000)
Purchase of plant & machinery (45,000)
Sale of plant & machinery 25,000
Net cash outflow from investing activities (75,000)
Cash Flow From Financing Activities
Issue of ordinary shares 89,700
Redemption of preferential shares (86,700)
Loan repayment (12,000)
Dividend paid – preference (7,500)
-ordinary (32,000)
loan acquisition 25,000
interest paid (8,000)
net cash outflow from financing activities (31,500)
change in cash and cash equivalent 31,840
cash and cash equivalent of the beginning (22,630)
cash and cash equivalent at the end 9,210
Workings
1) Redeemed shares
om
.c
ya
2)Preference dividends
en
10% x 75,000,000 = 7,500,000
k
ea
om
3) Gain on Disposal
.s
42,000,000 – All depreciation
w
w
25,000,000 – Proceeds
w
67,000,000
60,000,000 – Cost
7,000,000 - Gain
QUESTION 2
During the month of March 2001, a manufacturing firm advertised in the local press that it had
bonded goods which were to be auctioned. On reading the advertisement, Mr Michael Karanja and
Mr. Joseph Abuya agreed to pool their resources together and participate in the auction. They agreed
to share the joint venture profits and losses. Karanja and Abuya in the ration of 3:2 respectively
Karanja sent Abuya a cheque of Sh. 2,400,000 on 15 March 2001 to provide him with funds for
Karanja’s participation in the joint venture.
Karanja and Abuya successfully bought goods and managed to sell all of the goods purchased by the
end of April 2001. Their cash transactions appeared as follows:
Karanja Abuya
Sh. Sh.
Sales 3,840,000 2,520,000
Travelling expenses 392,400 555,600
Advertising 123,600 109,200
City Council charges 102,000 84,000
Salaries and wages 57,600 78,100
Sundry expenses 70,800 34,800
Purchases 1,920,000 1,320,000
Telephone expenses 33,700 28,900
Insurance 12,300 11,200
Transportation of goods 157,000 121,500
Settlement between Karanja and Abuya was done by cheque on 30 April 2001.
Required:
a) Memorandum joint venture account.
b) Joint Venture account with Abuya in Karanja’s ledger
c) Joint Venture account with Karanja in Abuya’s ledger
Solution:
om
(a) Joint venture with Abuya a/c
.c
ya
Shs Shs
ken
Remittance 2,400,000 Bank (sales) 3,840,000
ea
Traveling expenses 392,400 Bank A/c (final remittance) 2,117,780
om
Advertising 123,600
.s
w
City council expenses 102,000
w
w
Sundry expenses 70,800
Salaries charges 57,600
Purchases 1,920,000
Telephone 33,700
Insurance 12,300
Transport 157,000
Share of profit 688,380 -
5,957,780 5,957,780
b)
Shs Shs
Traveling 555,600 Bank a/cRemittance 2,400,000
Advertising 109,200 Sales 2,520,000
City council 84,000
Salaries wages 78,100
Sundry charges 34,800
Purchases 1,320,000
Telephone 28,900
Insurance 11,200
Transport 121,500
Share of profit 458,920
Bank(final remittance) 2,117,780
4,920,000 4,920,000
c)
om
Advertising 232,000
.c
City council 186,000
ya
Salaries + wages 135,700
en
Sundry charges 105,600
k
ea
Purchases 3,240,000
om
Telephone expenses 62,600
.s
Insurance 23,500
w
w
Transport 278,500
w
Share of profit
- Karanja 688,380
- Abuya 458,920
6,360,000 6,360,000
QUESTION 3
On 1 January 2003; Hassan and Kamau entered into a joint venture to buy and sell goods. It was
agreed that Hassan should receive a commission of 2% on all sales in consideration for which he
was to bear all losses from bad debts. Profits and losses were to be shared equally.
The following transactions took place:
2 January 2003: Hassan purchased goods for Sh. 680,000 paying Sh. 480,000 in cash and
accepted two bills of exchange, one for Sh. 80,000 and the other for Sh. 120,000.
3 January 2003: Hassan sent to Kamau goods which had cost Sh. 275,000 and Kamau
transferred Sh. 350,000 to Hassan in cash.
9 January 2003: Hassan sold goods to Otieno for Sh. 42,000 and to Wafula for Sh. 25,000 and
they accepted bills of exchange for the amounts respectively due from them. Hassan endorsed
both bills to Kamau who discounted them incurring discounting charges of Sh. 2,000.
3 February 2003:Hassan sold goods for Sh. 180,000. On delivery, the customer rejected
goods invoiced at Sh. 9,000 and these goods were collected by Kamau who sold them to
another customer for Sh. 11,000.
11 Feb 2003:Otieno met his bill but Wafula’s bill was dishonoured. Wafula could not meet
his debt and it was written off as a bad debt.
5 March 2003: Kamau paid the bill for Sh.80,000 which had been accepted by Hassan and
Hassan paid the second bill for Sh. 120,000.
20 March 2003: Hassan sold the remainder of the goods in his possession for Sh. 291,000 and
Kamau’s sales on the same date amounted to Sh. 340,000. Bad debts (apart from the amount
due from Wafula) were Sh. 4,200 of which Sh. 3,000 was in respect of sales by Hassan.
- On 30 April 2003, the venture was closed. Kamau took over the stock in his
possession at a valuation of Sh. 50,000 and the sum required to settle accounts
between the venturers was paid by the relevant venturer.
Required:
om
.c
ya
a) Joint venture accounts which would appear in the books of Hassan and Kamau for the period
en
ended 30 April 2003.
k
ea
b) Memorandum joint venture account showing the distribution of profit for the period ended 30
om
April 2003.
.s
w
w
w
Solution:
Hassan Books
3.1.2003 Bank A/C (purchases 480,000 3.1.2003 bank A/c Cash from Kamau 350,000
5.3.2003 Bank A/C (purchases) 120,000 3.2.2003 Bank (sales) 171,000
20.3.2003 Commission income A/C 17,600 20.3.2003 Bank (sales) 291,000
Share of profit 155,200 20.3.2003 Stock A/c (stock to
20.3.2003 Bank A/c (cash from Kamau) 275,000
Kamau) 403,250 20.3.2003 Stock to Kamau 9,000
_______ 20.3.2003 Bill to Kamau __80,000
1,176,000 1,176,000
Kamau’s Books
3.1.2003 Bank A/C (Cash to House) 350,000 9.1.2003 bank A/c (sales) 67,000
9.1 2003 Bank A/C (Discharges) 2,000 3.2.2003 bank (sales) 11,000
5.3.2003 Bank (purchases) 80,000 20.3.2003 bank (sales) 340,000
3.1.2003 stock A/C (stock) 284,000 20.3.2003 bal. C/d (closing stock) 50,000
3.1.2003 share of profit 155,200 20.3.2003 bank A/C (Cash fromHassan) 403,2000
871,200 871,200
QUESTION 4
om
.c
a) Briefly explain the meaning of the following terms in relation to bills of exchange:
ya
en
i. Accommodation bill.
k
ea
ii. Noting charges.
om
b) On 1 April 2005, Limo, Tergat, Wambani and Gachara entered into a joint venture for the
.s
w
purposes of importing second had cars from Dubai and selling them in Eldoret town. The profit
w
w
or loss from the venture was to be shared as follows: Limo 10%. Tergat 20%. Wambani 30%
and Gachara 40%.
Limo was assigned the responsibility of going to Dubai to buy the cars. Tergat was to clear the cars
at the port of Mombasa. Wambani was to transport the cars from Mombasa to Eldoret and Gachara
was to sell the cars once they were received in Eldoret.
The following is a summary of the transactions undertaken:
1. Gachara remitted Sh.4million to Limo and Wambani remitted Sh.500,000 to Tergat towards the
joint venture.
2. Limo incurred the following expenses on behalf of the joint venture:
Sh.
• Travelling expenses 45,000
• Entertainment 45,000
• Purchase of cars 3,600,000
• Shopping expenses 1,710,000
3. Tergat received the purchase and consignment documents from Limo and incurred the following
expenses to clear the cars:
Sh.
• Customs duty 1,860,000
• Clearing agents’ fees 200,000
4. While transporting the cars from Mombasa, Wambani incurred the following expenses:
Sh.
• General expenses 162,000
• Haulage 135,000
• Insurance 235,800
5. In order to sell the cars, Gachara incurred the following expenses:
Sh.
• Security 126,000
• Storage charges 81,000
• Sales commissions 264,600
6. Gachara sold some cars for Sh.7,900 and the remaining ones were taken over by Tergat for his
own use at a value of Sh.1,350,000
om
7. All the transactions were completed by 31 May 2005.
.c
ya
en
Required:
k
ea
i) Memorandum joint venture profit and loss account for the two months ended 31 May 2005.
om
ii) The joint venture accounts in the books of Limo, Tergat, Wambani and Gachara for the two
.s
w
months ended 31 May 2005.
w
w
Solution:
a) An accommodation bill may be described as a bill which is drawn, accepted or endorsed without
consideration but simply to oblige and help to raise money by discounting or negotiating it. Accommodation
bills are also known as kite bills.
i. Noting or notary charges: the cost formally presenting a dishonoured bill to the acceptor (drawee)
usually by a lawyer acting as a notary public.
Sh. Sh.
Sale of cars 7,900,000
Add value of cars retained by Tergat 1,350,000
9,250,000
Less: expenses by Limo
Purchases 3,600,000
Travelling expenses 45,000
Entertainment 45,000
Shipping expenses 1,710,000 (5,400,000)
Expenses by Tergat:
Customs duty 1,860,000
Clearing agents fees 200,000 (2,060,000)
Expenses by Wambani:
General expenses 162,000
Transport (Haulage) 135,000
Insurance 235,800 (532,800)
Expenses by Gachara:
Security 126,000
Storage 81,000
om
Sales commissions 264,600 (471,600)
.c
Profit of the venture 785,600
ya
Share of profit: Limo - 10% 78,560
ken
Tergat – 20% 157,120
ea
Wambani – 30% 235,680
om
Gachara – 40% 314,240 785,600
.s
w
w
ii) In the books of Limo
w
om
Joint Venture with Tergat, Wambani and Gachara
.c
ya
Sh. Sh.
en
Bank remitted – Limo 4,000,000 Bank – sales 7,900,000
k
ea
Security 126,000
om
Storage 81,000
.s
Sales Commissions 264,600
w
w
Profit – 40% 314,240
w
Balance carried down 3,114,160
7,900,000 7,900,000
Cash to Limo 1,478,560 Balance brought down 3,114,160
Cash to Tergat 367,120
Cash to Wambani 1,268,480 _______
3,114,160 3,114,160
TOPIC 7
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF PUBLIC SECTOR ENTITIES
International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSAS) are a set of accounting standards
issued by the IPSAS Board for use by public sector entities around the world in the preparation of
financial statements. These standards are based on International Financial Reporting Standards
(IFRS) issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).
The International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSAS) are a set of currently (February
2015) 38 accrual-based standards and one comprehensive cash-based standard on accounting
for public sector entities. The Standards are developed and published by the so-called
"International Public Sector Accounting Standards Board" (IPSASB or IPSAS-Board).
The IPSAS aim to: improve the quality and transparency of public sector financial reporting as well
to enhance governments' financial management capabilites.
om
All standards are principally published in English. In terms of content, most IPSAS have a
.c
corresponding International Accounting Standards (IAS)/International Financial Reporting Standard
ya
(IFRS) on which they are based. These IAS/IFRS are primarily designed for enterprises - and not
ken
for public sector entities - which is why the IAS/IFRS were adjusted to public sector
ea
characteristics. IPSAS are designed to be used by public sector entities (e.g. state government,
om
municipal government). However, they should not be applied by government business enterprises
.s
w
(GBE). GBEs are supposed to apply IAS/IFRS.
w
w
One major problem of the International Public Sector Accounting Standards is that they primarily
focus on accounting, i.e. ex-post financial reporting. A true modernisation of public financial
management, however, requires the implementation of accrual-based accounting as well as accrual-
based budgeting. In the public sector, the annual budget is one of the most (if not the most)
important financial governance instrument(s). Hence, reforming public sector budgeting is
absolutely essential for modernising public financial management. The IPSAS can function as a
suitable basis for reforming and harmonising public sector accounting. Yet for the purposes of
reforming and harmonising public sector budgeting, new public sector budgeting standards need to
be developed (e.g. also inspired by existing national budgetary laws that are already based on
accrual principles)
IPSASB activities
The IPSASB's current activities are focused on the development of International Public Sector
Accounting Standards (IPSAS) for financial reporting by governments and other public sector
entities (the Standards Project).
The IPSASB's Standards Project was established in late 1996. The objectives of the initial stage of
the project were to develop by the end of November 2001:
A background paper identifying current practices and issues in public sector financial
reporting
A core set of IPSAS based (to the extent appropriate) on the International Accounting
Standards in place as at August 1997
An IPSAS on the cash basis of accounting
Guidance on the transition from the cash to the accrual basis of accounting.
The Preface to International Financial Reporting Standards issued by the International Accounting
Standards Board explains that International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) are designed to
apply to the general purpose financial statements of all profit-oriented entities. Government Business
Enterprises (GBEs) as defined by the IPSASB are profit-oriented entities. Accordingly, they are
required to comply with IFRS.
om
.c
ya
Is an entity with the power to contract in its own name
en
Has been assigned the financial and operational authority to carry on a business
k
ea
Sells goods and services, in the normal course of its business, to other entities at a profit or
om
full cost recovery
.s
Is not reliant on continuing government funding to be a going concern (other than purchases
w
w
of outputs at arm's length)
w
Is controlled by a public sector entity.
The IPSASB develops accrual-based International Public Sector Accounting Standards (IPSAS) to
address public sector financial reporting issues in two different ways:
Cash basis:
Allows for transparent financial reporting of cash receipts, payments and balances, under the cash
basis of accounting
Accrual Accounting:
Focuses on revenue, cost, assets, liability and equity, instead of cash flow only
om
.c
Transparency
ya
en
Disclosure information requirements of various reports facilitate transparency in the financial
k
dealings of public institutions. These disclosures enables users of financial information interpret the
ea
om
reports in the right context and better decision making processes.
.s
w
w
Consistency
w
IPSASs also improve consistency in preparation and reporting of financial information. This in turn
enables users to draw consistent conclusions given similar sets of financial statements.
Accountability
Adoption of IPSASs improves accountability and ease the audits of public institutions. This
translates into timely audit reports, better information to donors and countries providing external
assistance, better quality and credibility of financial reports.
Governance
IPSASs results in stronger governance procedures and a framework for the accounting practise in
the public sector. This strengthens the financial management of public institutions.
IPSAS Summary
The following is a summary of the provisions of all International Public Sector Accounting
Standards (IPSAS) outstanding at 1 February 2012. These standards are based on accrual
accounting.
.
om
IPSAS 22 Disclosure of Financial Information About the General Government Sector N/A
.c
ya
IPSAS 23 Revenue from Non-Exchange Transactions (Taxes and Transfers) N/A
en
IPSAS 24 Presentation of Budget Information in Financial Statements N/A
k
ea
IPSAS 25 Employee Benefits IAS 19
om
IPSAS 26 Impairment of Cash-Generating Assets IAS 36
.s
IPSAS 27 Agriculture IAS 41
w
w
IPSAS 28 Financial Instruments: Presentation IAS 32
w
IPSAS 29 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement IAS 39
IPSAS 30 Financial Instruments: Disclosures IFRS 7
IPSAS 31 Intangible Assets IAS 38
IPSAS 32 Service Concession Arrangements: Grantor IFRIC 12
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To set out the manner in which general purpose financial statements shall be prepared under the
accrual basis of accounting, including guidance for their structure and the minimum requirements
for content.
Summary
Fundamental principles underlying the preparation of financial statements, including going
concern assumption, consistency of presentation and classification, accrual basis of
accounting, aggregation and materiality.
A complete set of financial statements comprises:
• Statement of financial position;
• Statement of financial performance;
• Statement of changes in net assets/equity;
• Cash flow statement;
• When the entity makes it approved budget publicly available, a comparison of budget
and accrual amounts;
• Notes, comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory
notes.
An entity whose financial statements comply with IPSASs shall make an explicit and
unreserved statement of such compliance in the notes. Financial statements shall not be
described as complying with IPSASs unless they comply with all the requirements of
IPSASs.
Assets and liabilities, and revenue and expenses, may not be offset unless offsetting is
permitted or required by another IPSAS.
Comparative prior-period information shall be presented for all amounts shown in the
financial statements and notes. Comparative information shall be included when it is relevant
to an understanding of the current period's financial statements. In the case presentation or
om
classification is amended, comparative amounts shall be reclassified, and the nature, amount
.c
ya
of, and reason for any reclassification shall be disclosed.
en
The statement of changes in net assets/equity shows all changes in net assets/equity.
k
ea
Financial statements generally to be prepared annually. If the date of the year end changes,
om
and financial statements are presented for a period other than one year, disclosure thereof is
.s
w
required.
w
w
Current/non-current distinction for assets and liabilities is normally required. In general,
subsequent events are not considered in classifying items as current or non-current. An entity
shall disclose for each assets and liability item that combines amounts expected to be
recovered or settled both before and after 12 months from the reporting date, the amount to be
recovered or settled after more than 12 months.
IPSAS 1 specifies minimum line items to be presented on the face of the statement of
financial position, statement of financial performance and statement of changes in net
assets/equity, and includes guidance for identifying additional line items, headings and sub-
totals.
Analysis of expenses in the statement of financial performance may be given by nature or by
function. If presented by function, classification of expenses by nature shall be provided
additionally.
IPSAS 1 specifies minimum disclosure requirements for the notes. These shall include
information about:
• accounting policies followed;
• the judgments that management has made in the process of applying the entity's
accounting policies that have the most significant effect on the amounts recognized
in the financial statements;
• the key assumptions concerning the future, and other key sources of estimation
uncertainty, that have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the
carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year;
• the domicile and legal form of the entity;
• a description of the nature of the entity's operations;
• a reference to the relevant legislation; and
• The name of the controlling entity and the ultimate controlling entity of the
economic entity.
An appendix to IPSAS 1 provides illustrative statements of financial position, statements of
financial performance and statements of changes in net assets/equity.
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To prescribe the criteria for selecting and changing accounting policies, together with the accounting
treatment and disclosure of changes in accounting policies, changes in accounting estimates, and
corrections of errors.
om
.c
ya
Summary
en
• In the absence of an IPSAS that specifically applies to a transaction, other event or condition,
k
ea
management shall use judgement in developing and applying an accounting policy that results
om
in information that is:
.s
Relevant to the decision-making needs of users, and
w
w
Reliable, in that the financial statements:
w
- Represent faithfully the financial position, financial performance and
cash flows of the entity;
- Reflect the economic substance of transactions, other events and
conditions and not merely the legal form;
- Are neutral, i.e., free from bias;
- Are prudent; and
- Are complete in all material aspects.
• IPSAS 3 prescribes a hierarchy for choosing accounting policies:
IPSASs, taking into account any relevant implementation guidance;
in the absence of a directly applicable IPSAS, look at the requirements and
guidance in IPSASs dealing with similar and related issues; and the definitions,
recognition and measurement criteria for assets, liabilities, revenue and
expenses described in other IPSASs; and
management may also consider the most recent pronouncements of other
standard-setting bodies, and accepted public and private sector practices.
• Apply accounting policies consistently to similar transactions.
• Make a change in accounting policy only if it is required by an IPSAS, or it results in reliable
and more relevant information.
Effective date
Periods beginning on or after July 1, 2001
Objective
To prescribe the accounting treatment for borrowing costs.
om
Summary
.c
ya
Borrowing costs include interest, amortization of discounts or premiums on borrowings, and
en
amortization of ancillary costs incurred in the arrangement of borrowings.
k
ea
Two accounting treatments are allowed:
om
expense model: charge all borrowing costs to expenses in the period when they are
.s
w
incurred; and
w
w
Capitalization model: capitalize borrowing costs which are directly attributable to the
acquisition or construction of a qualifying asset, but only when it is probable that these
costs will result in future economic benefits or service potential to the entity, and the
costs can be measured reliably. All other borrowing costs that do not satisfy the
conditions for capitalization are to be expensed when incurred.
Where an entity adopts the capitalization model, that model shall be applied consistently to
all borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production
of all qualifying assets of the entity. Investment income from temporary investment shall be
deducted from the actual borrowing costs.
A qualifying asset is an asset which requires a substantial period of time to make it ready for
its intended use or sale. Examples include office buildings, hospitals, infrastructure assets
such as roads, bridges and power generation facilities, and some inventories.
If funds are borrowed generally and used for the purpose of obtaining the qualifying asset,
apply a capitalization rate (weighted average of borrowing costs applicable to the general
outstanding borrowings during the period) to outlays incurred during the period, to determine
the amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalization.
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To prescribe requirements for preparing and presenting consolidated financial statements for an
economic entity under the accrual basis of accounting. To prescribe how to account for investments
in controlled entities, jointly controlled entities and associates in separate financial statements
Summary
A controlled entity is an entity controlled by another entity, known as the controlling entity.
Control is the power to govern the operating and financial policies. Consolidated financial
statements are financial statements of an economic entity (controlling entity and controlled
entities combined) presented as those of a single entity.
Consolidated financial statements shall include all controlled entities, except when there is
evidence that:
control is intended to be temporary because the controlled entity is acquired and held
exclusively with a view to its subsequent disposal within twelve months from
acquisition; and
Management is actively seeking a buyer.
No exemption for controlled entity that operates under severe long-term funds transfer
om
restrictions. A controlled entity is not excluded from consolidation because its activities are
.c
ya
dissimilar to those of the other activities within the economic entity.
en
Balances, transactions, revenue and expenses between entities within the economic entity are
k
ea
eliminated in full.
om
Consolidated financial statements shall be prepared using uniform accounting policies for like
.s
w
transactions and other events in similar circumstances.
w
w
Reporting dates of controlled entities cannot be more than three months different from
reporting date of the controlling entity.
Minority interest is reported in net assets/equity in the consolidated statement of financial
position, separately from the controlling entity's net assets/equity, and is not deducted in
measuring the economic entity's revenue or expense. However, surplus or deficit of the
economic entity is allocated between minority and majority interest on the face of the
statement of financial performance.
In the controlling entity's separate financial statements: account for all of its investments in
controlling entities, associates and joint ventures either using the equity method, at cost or as
financial instruments.
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To prescribe the investor's accounting for investments in associates where the investment in the
associate leads to the holding of an ownership interest in the form of a shareholding or other formal
equity structure
Summary
Applies to all investments in which an investor has significant influence unless the investor
is:
a venture capital organization, or
a mutual fund or unit trust or a similar entity, such as an investment-linked insurance
fund that is measured at fair value, with changes in fair value recognized in surplus or
deficit in the period of the change, in accordance with the relevant international or
national accounting standard dealing with the recognition and measurement of financial
instruments.
When there is evidence that the investment is acquired and held exclusively with a view to its
disposal within twelve months from acquisition and that management is actively seeking a
buyer, the investment shall be classified as held for trading and accounted for in accordance
with the relevant international or national accounting standard dealing with the recognition
and measurement of financial instruments.
Otherwise, the equity method is used for all investments in associates over which the entity
has significant influence.
om
Rebuttable presumption of significant influence if investment held, directly or indirectly, is
.c
20% or more of the voting power of the associate.
ya
Under the equity method, the investment is initially recorded at cost. It is subsequently
en
adjusted by the investor's share of the investee's post acquisition change in net assets/equity.
k
ea
Investor's statement of financial performance reflects its share of the investee's post-
om
acquisition surplus or deficit.
.s
w
The investor's financial statements shall be prepared using uniform accounting policies for
w
w
like transactions and events in similar circumstances.
Reporting dates of associates cannot be more than three months different from the investor's
reporting date.
Even if consolidated accounts are not prepared, for example, because the investor has no
controlled entities, equity accounting is requiredlf application of the requirements in the
relevant international or national accounting standard dealing with the recognition and
measurement of financial instruments indicates that the investment may be impaired, an
entity applies IPSAS 21.
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To prescribe the accounting treatment required for interests in joint ventures, regardless of the
structures or legal forms of the joint venture activities
Summary
Applies to all investments in which investor has joint control unless the investor is:
a venture capital organization, or
a mutual fund or unit trust or a similar entity, such as an investment-linked insurance
fund that is measured at fair value, with changes in fair value recognized in surplus or
deficit in the period of the change, in accordance with the relevant international or
national accounting standard dealing with the recognition and measurement of financial
instruments.
The key characteristic of a joint venture is a binding arrangement whereby two or more
parties are committed to undertake an activity that is subject to joint control. Joint ventures
may be classified as jointly controlled operations, jointly controlled assets and jointly
controlled entities. Different accounting treatments apply for each type of joint venture.
Jointly controlled operations: venturer recognizes the assets it controls, and expenses and
liabilities it incurs, and its share of revenue earned, in both its separate and consolidated
financial statements.
Jointly controlled assets: venturer recognizes in its financial statements its share of the jointly
controlled assets, any liabilities that it has incurred, and its share of any liabilities incurred
jointly with the other venturers, revenue earned from the sale or use of its share of the output
of the joint venture, its share of expenses incurred by the joint venture, and expenses incurred
directly in respect of its interest in the joint venture. These rules apply to both separate and
consolidated financial statements.
om
Jointly controlled entities: two accounting policies are permitted:
.c
Proportionate consolidation: under this method, the venturer's statement of financial
ya
position includes its share of the assets that it controls jointly and its share of the
ken
liabilities for which it is jointly responsible. Its statement of financial performance
ea
includes its share of the revenue and expenses of the jointly controlled entity; and
om
The equity method, as described in IPSAS 7.
.s
w
When there is evidence that the interest in a joint venture is acquired and held exclusively
w
w
with a view to its disposal within twelve months from acquisition and that management is
actively seeking a buyer, the interest shall be classified as held for trading and accounted for
in accordance with the relevant international or national accounting standard dealing with the
recognition and measurement of financial instruments.
Objective
To prescribe the accounting treatment for revenue and costs associated with construction contracts in
the financial statements of the contractor.
Summary
• Contract revenue shall comprise the initial amount agreed in the contract together with
variations in contract work, claims, and incentive payments to the extent that it is probable
that they will result in revenues and can be measured reliably.
• Contract revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable
• Contract costs shall comprise costs that relate directly to the specific contract, costs that are
attributable to general contract activity and that can be allocated to the contract on a
systematic and rational basis, together with such other costs as are directly attributable to the
customer under the terms of the contract.
• Where the outcome of a construction contract can be estimated reliably, revenue and costs
shall be recognized by reference to the stage of completion of contract activity at the
reporting date (the percentage of completion method of accounting).
• If the outcome cannot be estimated reliably, no surplus shall be recognized. Instead, contract
revenue shall be recognized only to the extent that contract costs incurred are expected to be
recovered, and contract costs shall be expensed as incurred.
• In respect of construction contracts in which it is intended at inception of the contract that
contract costs are to be fully recovered from the parties to the construction contract: if it is
probable that total contract costs will exceed total contract revenue, the expected deficit shall
be recognized immediately.
IPSAS 12 Inventories
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
om
To prescribe the accounting treatment of inventories, including cost determination and expense
.c
ya
recognition, including any write-down to net-realizable value. It also provides guidance on the cost
en
formulas that are used to assign costs to inventories.
k
ea
om
Summary
.s
• Inventories are required to be measured at the lower of cost and net realizable value. Where
w
w
inventories are acquired through a non-exchange transaction, their cost shall be measured as
w
their fair value as at the date of acquisition. However, inventories are required to be measured
at the lower of cost and current replacement cost where they are held for:
— Distribution at no charge or for a nominal charge; or
— Consumption in the production process of goods to be distributed at no charge or for
a nominal charge.
• Costs include all purchase cost, conversion cost (materials, labor and overhead), and other
costs to bring inventory to its present location and condition, but not foreign exchange
differences and selling costs. Trade discounts, rebates and other similar items are deducted in
determining the costs of purchase.
• For inventory items that are not interchangeable, specific costs are attributed to the specific
individual items of inventory.
• An entity shall apply the same cost formula for all inventories having similar nature and use
to the entity; a difference in geographical location of inventories by itself is not sufficient to
justify the use of different cost formulas.
• For interchangeable items, cost is determined on either a FIFO or weighted average basis.
LIFO is not permitted.
• For inventories with a different nature or use, different cost formulas may be justified.
• When inventories are sold, exchanged or distributed, the carrying amount shall be recognized
as an expense in the period in which the related revenue is recognized. If there is no related
revenue, the expense is recognized when the goods are distributed or related services have
been rendered.
• Write-downs to net realizable value are recognized as an expense in the period the loss or the
write-down occurs. Reversals arising from an increase in net realizable value are recognized
as a reduction of the inventory expense in the period in which they occur.
I PSAS 13 Leases
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To prescribe, for lessees and lessors, the appropriate accounting policies and disclosures to apply in
relation to finance and operating leases
Summary
A lease is classified as a finance lease if it transfers substantially all risks and rewards
incidental to ownership of an asset. The title may or may not be eventually transferred.
Examples:
Lease covers substantially all of the asset's life; and/or
Present value of lease payments is substantially equal to the asset's fair value.
om
All other leases are classified as operating lease. The land and building elements of a lease of
.c
ya
land and buildings are considered separately for the purposes of lease classification.
en
Finance leases — Lessee's Accounting:
k
ea
Recognize asset and liability at the lower of the present value of minimum lease
om
payments and the fair value of the asset, determined at the inception of the lease. The
.s
w
discount rate applicable for calculating the present value shall be the interest rate
w
w
implicit in the lease or the incremental borrowing rate;
depreciation policy — as for owned assets; and
Finance lease payment — apportioned between interest and reduction in outstanding
liability.
Finance leases — Lessor's Accounting:
recognize as a receivable in the statement of financial position at an amount equal to
the net investment in the lease; and
Recognize finance revenue based on a pattern reflecting a constant periodic rate of
return on the lessor's net investment.
Operating leases — Lessee's Accounting:
Recognize lease payments as an expense in the statement of financial performance on
a straight-line basis over the lease term, unless another systematic basis is
representative of the time pattern of the user's benefit.
Operating leases — Lessor's Accounting:
Assets held for operating leases shall be presented in the lessor's statement of financial
position according to the nature of the asset; and
Lease revenue shall be recognized on a straight-line basis over the lease term, unless
another systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern of the benefits.
Lessors of operating leases shall add initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging
an operating lease to the carrying amount of the leased asset and recognize them as an
expense over the lease term on the same basis as the lease revenue.
Accounting treatment of sale and leaseback transactions depends on whether these are
essentially finance or operating leases.
Effective date
Annual periods beginning on or after January 1, 2008
Objective
To prescribe:
• When an entity shall adjust its financial statements for events after the reporting date.
• Disclosures that an entity should give about the date when the financial statements were
authorized for issue, and about events after the reporting date.
Summary
Events after the reporting date are those events, both favorable and unfavorable, that occur
between the reporting date and the date when the financial statements are authorized for
issue.
om
Adjusting events after the reporting date, those that provide evidence of conditions that
.c
ya
existed at the reporting date — adjust the financial statements to reflect those events that
en
provide evidence of conditions that existed at the reporting date (e.g., settlement of a court
k
ea
case after the reporting date, that confirms that the entity had an obligation at the reporting
om
date).
.s
w
Non-adjusting events after the reporting date, those that are indicative of conditions that arose
w
w
after the reporting date — do not adjust the financial statements to reflect events that arose
after the reporting date (e.g. , a decline in the fair value of property after year end, which does
not change the valuation of the property at the reporting date).
Dividends proposed or declared after the reporting date shall not be recognized as a liability
at the reporting date. Disclosure is required.
An entity shall not prepare its financial statements on a going concern basis if events after the
reporting date indicate that the going concern assumption is not appropriate (e.g., if there is
an intention to liquidate the entity or cease operations after the reporting date, or that there is
no realistic alternative but to do so).
An entity shall disclose the date its financial statements were authorized for issue and who
gave that authorization. If another body has the power to amend the financial statements after
issuance, the entity shall disclose that fact.
If an entity obtains information after the reporting date, but before the financial statements are
authorized for issue, about conditions that existed at the reporting date, the entity shall update
disclosures that relate to these conditions in light of the new information.
An entity shall disclose the following for each material category of non-adjusting event after
the reporting date:
The nature of the event, and
An estimate of its financial effect, or a statement that such an estimate cannot be made.
Effective date
Periods beginning on or after January 1, 2004
Objective
To prescribe appropriate recognition criteria and measurement bases for provisions, contingent
liabilities and contingent assets, and to ensure that sufficient information is disclosed in the notes to
the financial statements to enable users to understand their nature, timing and amount. IPSAS 19
thus aims to ensure that only genuine obligations are dealt with in the financial statements. Planned
future expenditure, even where authorized by management, is excluded from recognition, as are
accruals for self-insured losses, general uncertainties, and other events that have not yet taken place.
Summary
Recognize a provision only when:
A past event has created a present legal or constructive obligation,
An outflow of resources embodying economic benefits or service potential required to
settle the obligation is probable,
And the amount of the obligation can be estimated reliably.
Amount recognized as a provision is the best estimate of settlement amount of the
expenditure required to settle the obligation at reporting date.
om
Requires a review of provisions at each reporting date to adjust for changes to reflect the
.c
current best estimate.
ya
If it is no longer probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits or
en
service potential is required to settle the obligation, the provision shall be reversed.
k
ea
Utilize provisions only for the purposes for which they were originally intended.
om
Examples of provisions may include onerous contracts, restructuring provisions, warranties,
.s
w
refunds and site restoration.
w
w
A restructuring provision shall include only the direct expenditures arising from the
restructuring, which are those that are both:
Necessarily entailed by the restructuring, and
Not associated with the ongoing activities of the entity.
Contingent liability arises when:
there is a possible obligation to be confirmed by a future event that is outside the control
of the entity; or
A present obligation may, but probably will not, require an outflow of resources
embodying economic benefits or service potential; or
A sufficiently reliable estimate of the amount of a present obligation cannot be made (this
is rare).
Contingent liabilities require disclosure only (no recognition). If the possibility of outflow is
remote, then no disclosure.
Contingent asset arises when the inflow of economic benefits or service potential is probable,
but not virtually certain, and occurrence depends on an event outside the control of the entity.
Contingent assets require disclosure only (no recognition). If the realisation of revenue is
virtually certain, the related asset is not a contingent asset and recognition of the asset and
related revenue is appropriate.
If an entity has an onerous contract, the present obligation (net of recoveries) under the
contract shall be recognized and measured as a provision.
om
.c
ya
ken
ea
om
.s
w
w
w